You are on page 1of 438

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY
GRD140 - xxxD

TOSHIBA Corporation 2009


All Rights Reserved.

(Ver. 5.0)

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRD140. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Explanation of symbols used


Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.

DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or


serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or


serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

CAUTION
CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in


minor injury or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
DANGER

Current transformer circuit

Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.

WARNING

Exposed terminals

Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.

Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

Fiber optic

When connecting this equipment via an optical fiber, do not look directly at the optical signal.

CAUTION

Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

CAUTION

Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.

Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.

External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Modification

Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

Disposal

This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing
of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If
any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.

Plastics material

This product contains the following plastics material.


- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Contents
Safety Precautions

1.

Introduction

2.

Application Notes

10

2.1

10
10
17
21
48
50
53
56
59
63
65
65
69
73
77
80
80
82
83
84
87
87
91
96
96

2.2

2.3

2.4
2.5

3.

Overcurrent and Undercurrent Protection


2.1.1 Non-directional Overcurrent Protection
2.1.2 Directional Overcurrent Protection
2.1.3 Scheme Logic
2.1.4 Phase Undercurrent Protection
2.1.5 Thermal Overload Protection
2.1.6 Broken Conductor Protection
2.1.7 Breaker Failure Protection
2.1.8 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush
2.1.9 CT Requirements
Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection
2.2.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection
2.2.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection
2.2.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
2.2.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
Frequency Protection
2.3.1 Frequency element
2.3.2 Frequency rate-of-change element
2.3.3 Trip Circuit
Trip and Alarm Signal Output
Autoreclose
2.5.1 Scheme Logic
2.5.2 Voltage and synchronism check
2.5.3 Sequence Coordination
2.5.4 Setting

Technical Description

100

3.1

100
100
105
105
105
106
108
109
109
109
110
111

3.2

3.3

Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
Input and Output Signals
3.2.1 AC Input Signals
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function
Automatic Supervision
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring
3.3.3 CT Failure Supervision
3.3.4 VT Failure Supervision

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

3.4

3.5
3.6

4.

126

4.1

126
126
128
129
129
132
135
141
146
148
195
199
199
200
200
201

4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7

6.

112
113
114
114
114
115
116
117
117
118
118
121
123
123
123
124
124
125

User Interface

4.2

5.

3.3.5 Trip Circuit Supervision


3.3.6 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
3.3.7 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring
3.3.8 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring
3.3.9 Failure Alarms
3.3.8 Trip Blocking
3.3.9 Setting
Recording Function
3.4.1 Fault Recording
3.4.2 Event Recording
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Metering Function
Fault locator
3.6.1 Application
3.6.2 Distance to Fault Calculation
3.6.3 Starting Calculation
3.6.4 Displaying Location
3.6.5 Setting
Outline of User Interface
4.1.1 Front Panel
4.1.2 Communication Ports
Operation of the User Interface
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
4.2.2 Relay Menu
4.2.3 Displaying Records
4.2.4 Displaying the Status
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
4.2.7 Testing
Personal Computer Interface
Relay Setting and Monitoring System
IEC 60870-5-103 Interface
IEC 61850 Communication
Clock Function

Installation

202

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5

Receipt of Relays
Relay Mounting
Electrostatic Discharge
Handling Precautions
External Connections

202
202
202
202
203

Commissioning and Maintenance

204

6.1
6.2

204
205

Outline of Commissioning Tests


Cautions

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

6.3
6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

7.

6.2.1 Safety Precautions


6.2.2 Precautions for Testing
Preparations
Hardware Tests
6.4.1 User Interfaces
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
Function Test
6.5.1 Measuring Element
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
6.6.2 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test
Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
6.7.5 Storage

Putting Relay into Service

205
205
206
207
207
207
208
209
211
211
224
224
225
225
226
228
228
228
229
230
230
231

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Appendix A Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal
Model to IEC60255-8

233

Appendix B Directional Earth Fault Protection and Power System Earthing

237

Appendix C Signal List

243

Appendix D Event Record Items

283

Appendix E Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation

287

Appendix F Case Outline

303

Appendix G Typical External Connection

305

Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet

313

Appendix I

349

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)

Appendix J Return Repair Form

355

Appendix K Technical Data

359

Appendix L Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

367

Appendix M IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability

371

Appendix N IEC61850: MICS & PICS

383

Appendix O Inverse Time Characteristics

425

Appendix P Ordering

431

The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.5.0)

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

1. Introduction
GRD140 series relays provide four stage non-directional and directional overcurrent protection
for distribution networks, and back-up protection for transmission and distribution networks.
The GRD140 series has three models and provides the following protection schemes in all models.
Directional overcurrent protection and directional zero phase sequence overcurrent
protection for earth fault with definite time or inverse time characteristics
Instantaneous directional overcurrent protection and instantaneous directional zero phase
sequence overcurrent protection for earth fault
Model 110 provides directional earth fault protection and directional sensitive earth fault
protection.
Models 400 and 401 provides three-phase directional phase fault protection and directional earth
fault protection.
Models 420 and 421 provides three-phase directional phase fault protection, and directional earth
and sensitive earth fault protection.
All models include multiple, high accuracy, overcurrent protection elements (for phase and/or
earth fault) with inverse time and definite time delay functions. All phase, earth and sensitive earth
fault overcurrent elements can be independently subject to directional control.
In addition, GRD140 provides multi-shot, three phase auto-reclose, with independent sequences
for phase fault, and earth fault and sensitive earth fault. Auto-reclosing can also be triggered by
external protection devices.
Other protection functions are available according to model type, including thermal protection to
IEC60255-8, negative sequence overcurrent protection, under/overvoltage and
under/overfrequency protections. See Table 1.1.1 for details of the protection functions available
in each model.
All models provide continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits
are also monitored, by trip circuit supervision, CT and VT supervision, and CB condition
monitoring features.
A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and
menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a
front-mounted RS232 port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485, fibre optic port or
Ethernet LAN port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay
settings, and to access data gathered by the relays metering and recording functions. Further, data
communication with substation control and automation systems is supported according to the IEC
61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 standards.
Data available either via the relay HMI or communications ports includes the following functions.
The GRD140 series provides the following functions for all models.
Metering
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording (available via communications ports)
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRD140 series and identifies the functions to be provided

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
by each member.
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions
Model Number

GRD140 110D

Directional Phase Fault O/C OC(67/50P, 67/51P): 1st stage to 4th stage
Directional Earth Fault O/C EF(67/50N, 67/51N): 1st stage to 4th stage

Directional Sensitive Earth Fault O/C SEF(67/50N, 67/51N): 1st stage to 4th stage

400D

420D

401D

421D

Phase Undercurrent UC(37P): 1st and 2nd stage

Thermal Overload (49)

Directional Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent NOC(67/46): 1st and 2nd stage

Phase Overvoltage OV(59): 1st stage to 4th stage

Phase Undervoltage UV(27): 1st stage to 4th stage

Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage NOV(47): 1st and 2nd stage

Under/Overfrequency FRQ(81U/81O): 1st stage to 4th stage

Broken Conductor BCD

Circuit Breaker Fail CBF(50BF)

Cold Load Protection

Inrush Current Detector

Synchronism Check (25)

Fault Locator

CT Supervision

VT Supervision

Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage ZOV(59N): 1st and 2nd stage

Frequency rate-of-change DFRQ:

1st

stage to

4th

stage

Auto-reclose (79)

Trip circuit supervision

Self supervision

CB State Monitoring

Trip Counter Alarm

Iy Alarm
CB Operate Time Alarm

Eight settings groups

Metering

Fault records

Event records

Disturbance records

IEC60870-5-103 Communication

IEC61850 communication

High-speed auxiliary relay (HBO)

Note: The 4th stage of OC, EF, SEF, OV and UV, and the 2nd stage of UC, NOC, ZOV and NOV
are for alarm.

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

2. Application Notes
2.1

Overcurrent and Undercurrent Protection


2.1.1

Non-directional Overcurrent Protection


GRD140 provides distribution network protection with four-stage phase fault and earth fault
overcurrent elements OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, sensitive earth fault elements SEF1 to SEF4, and
two-stage negative sequence overcurrent elements NOC1 and NOC2 which can be enabled or
disabled by scheme switch setting. The OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1, SEF2, NOC1 and NOC2
elements have selective inverse time and definite time characteristics. The protection of local and
downstream terminals is coordinated with the current setting, time setting, or both.
The characteristic of overcurrent elements are as follows:

Stage 4

Stage 1

Note: NOC provides two stage overcurrent elements.

Figure 2.1.1

Characteristic of Overcurrent Elements

2.1.1.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection


In a system for which the fault current is practically determined by the fault location, without
being substantially affected by changes in the power source impedance, it is advantageous to use
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection. This protection provides
reasonably fast tripping, even at a terminal close to the power source where the most severe faults
can occur.
Where ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power source) is small compared with that of
the protected section ZL, there is an appreciable difference between the current for a fault at the far
end of the section (ES/(ZS+ZL), ES: source voltage), and the current for a fault at the near end
(ES/ZS). When operating time is inversely proportional to the current, the relay operates faster for
a fault at the end of the section nearer the power source, and the operating time ratio for a fault at
the near end to the far end is ZS/(ZS + ZL).
The resultant time-distance characteristics are shown in Figure 2.1.2 for radial networks with
several feeder sections. With the same selective time coordination margin TC as the download
section, the operating time can be further reduced by using a more inverse characteristic.

10

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Operate time

TC

TC

Figure 2.1.2 Time-distance Characteristics of Inverse Time Protection

The inverse time overcurrent protection elements have the IDMT characteristics defined by
equation (1) in accordance with IEC 60255-151:

c
t (G ) TMS


I
1

Is

(1)

where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energising current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, ,, c = constants defining curve.
Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2.1.1. They are illustrated in Figure 2.1.3.
Any one curve can be selected for each IDMT element by scheme switch [MC].
Table 2.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves
Curve Type (IEC 60255-151)

Curve Description

tr

IEC Normal Inverse (NI)

0.14

0.02

IEC Very Inverse (VI)

13.5

IEC Extremely Inverse (EI)

80

UK Long Time Inverse (LTI)

120

IEEE Moderately Inverse (MI)

0.0515

0.02

0.114

4.85

IEEE Very Inverse (VI)

19.61

0.491

21.6

IEEE Extremely Inverse (EI)

28.2

0.1217

29.1

US CO8 Inverse

5.95

0.18

5.95

US CO2 Short Time Inverse

0.02394

0.02

0.01694

2.261

Note: tr and are used to define the reset characteristic. Refer to equation (2).

In addition to above nine curve types, GRD140 can provide a user configurable IDMT curve. If
required, set the scheme switch [MC] to CON and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.

11

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The following table shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.
Curve defining constants

Range

Step

0.000 30.000

0.001

0.00 5.00

0.01

0.000 5.000

0.001

tr

0.000 30.000

0.001

0.00 5.00

0.01

IEC/UK Inverse Curves


(Time Multiplier = 1)

IEEE/US Inverse Curves


(Time Multiplier = 1)

1000

100

100

Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)

10

10
LTI
NI
1

MI
VI

VI

CO2
CO8

EI

EI
0.1

0.1
1

10

100

10

100

Current (Multiple of Setting)

Current (Multiple of Setting)

Figure 2.1.3

IDMT Characteristics

Programmable Reset Characteristics


OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1, SEF2, NOC1 and NOC2 have a programmable reset feature:
instantaneous, definite time delayed, or dependent time delayed reset. (Refer to Appendix A for a
more detailed description.)
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme.
The inverse reset characteristic is particularly useful for providing correct coordination with an
upstream induction disc type overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of
intermittent (pecking or flashing) fault conditions.

12

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the IEC/IEEE/US operating characteristics.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Dependent time reset
The dependent time resetting characteristic is complied with IEC 60255-151 depending time reset
characteristic, and is defined by the following equation:

tr

t (G ) RTMS

I
1 I S

(2)

where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energising current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
tr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energising current is zero
(see Table 2.1.1),
RTMS = reset time multiplier setting.
= constants defining curve.
Figure 2.1.4 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.

13

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

IEEE Reset Curves


(Time Multiplier = 1)
1000.00

Time (s)

100.00

EI
VI
10.00
CO8
MI
CO2

1.00
0.1
1
Current (Multiple of Setting)

Figure 2.1.4

Dependent Time Reset Characteristics

2.1.1.2 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection


In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal in relation to the position of the
fault, that is, the impedance between the relay and the power source is large, the advantages of the
IDMT characteristics are not fully utilised. In this case, definite time overcurrent protection is
applied. The operating time can be constant irrespective of the magnitude of the fault current.
The definite time overcurrent protection consists of instantaneous overcurrent measuring elements
and delayed pick-up timers started by the elements, and provides selective protection with graded
setting of the delayed pick-up timers. Thus, the constant time coordination with the downstream
section can be maintained as shown in Figure 2.1.5. As is clear in the figure, the nearer to the
power source a section is, the greater the delay in the tripping time of the section. This is
undesirable particularly where there are many sections in the series.
Operate time

TC
TC

Figure 2.1.5 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

14

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.1.3 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
In conjunction with inverse time overcurrent protection, additional overcurrent elements provide
instantaneous or definite time overcurrent protection.
OC1 to OC4 and EF1 to EF4 are phase fault and earth fault protection elements, respectively. Each
element is programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation. (In case of
instantaneous operation, the delayed pick-up timer is set to 0.00.) The phase fault elements operate
on a phase segregated basis, although tripping is for three phase only.
Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
When applied to radial networks with several feeder sections where ZL (impedance of the
protected line) is large enough compared with ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power
source), and the magnitude of the fault current for a local end fault is much greater (3 times or
more, or (ZL+ZS)/ZS3, for example) than that for a remote end fault under the condition that ZS
is maximum, the pick-up current can be set sufficiently high so that the operating zone of the
elements do not reach the remote end of the feeder, and thus instantaneous and selective protection
can be applied.
This high-set overcurrent protection is applicable and effective particularly for feeders near the
power source where the setting is feasible, but the longest tripping times would otherwise have to
be accepted.
As long as the associated inverse time overcurrent protection is correctly coordinated, the
instantaneous protection does not require setting coordination with the downstream section.
Figure 2.1.6 shows operating times for instantaneous overcurrent protection in conjunction with
inverse time overcurrent protection. The shaded area shows the reduction in operating time by
applying the instantaneous overcurrent protection. The instantaneous protection zone decreases as
ZS increases.
Operate time

TC

TC

Figure 2.1.6 Conjunction of Inverse and Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

The current setting is set 1.3 to 1.5 times higher than the probable maximum fault current in the
event of a fault at the remote end. The maximum fault current for elements OC1 to OC4 is
obtained in case of three-phase faults, while the maximum fault current for elements EF1 to EF4 is
obtained in the event of single phase earth faults.
2.1.1.4 Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
When applying inverse time overcurrent protection for a feeder system as shown in Figure 2.1.7,
well coordinated protection with the fuses in branch circuit faults and high-speed protection for
the feeder faults can be provided by adding staged definite time overcurrent protection with
time-graded OC2 and OC3 or EF2 and EF3 elements.

15

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Fuse

GRD140

Figure 2.1.7

Feeder Protection Coordinated with Fuses

Configuring the inverse time element OC1 (and EF1) and time graded elements OC2 and OC3 (or
EF2 and EF3) as shown in Figure 2.1.8, the characteristic of overcurrent protection can be
improved to coordinate with the fuse characteristic.
Time (s)

OC1
OC2

OC3

Fuse

Current (amps)

Figure 2.1.8

Staged Definite Time Protection

16

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.2

Directional Overcurrent Protection


In a system including parallel feeder circuits, ring main circuits or sources at both line terminals,
the fault current at the relay location can flow in either direction. In such a case, directional control
should be added to overcurrent elements.
GRD140 provides directional control for phase fault and earth fault overcurrent elements OC1 to
OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1 to SEF4, NOC1 and NOC2 which can be enabled or disabled by scheme
switch setting. The directional characteristic can be selected to Forward or Reverse or Non
by scheme switch setting [-DIR]. The OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1, SEF2, NOC1 and NOC2
elements have selective inverse time and definite time characteristics.

2.1.2.1 Application of Directional Overcurrent Protection


Parallel Feeder Circuits
If non-directional protection were applied to the circuit shown in Figure 2.1.9, then a fault at F
would result in both feeders being tripped at points A and B, and total loss of supply to the load.
Directional relays can be applied to look back into the feeder, thereby ensuring that only the faulty
feeder is disconnected. The relays at A and B would normally be set to operate at 50% of the full
load current of the circuit, via their inverse time elements OC1 and EF1, with a directional
characteristic looking in the direction shown by the arrows.
The various overcurrent elements of GRD140 are independently programmable for directional
operation. Therefore, elements OC2 and EF2 could be set for non-directional operation to provide
time-delayed back-up protection for the load.
A

GRD140

Load

GRD140

Non-directional

Directional
B

GRD140

GRD140

Non-directional

Figure 2.1.9

Directional

Application of GRD140 to Parallel Feeders

Ring Main Circuits


A ring main circuit is commonly protected by directional overcurrent relays, since current may
flow in either direction past the relaying points. The normal grading procedure is applied
separately in both the clockwise and anti-clockwise directions. Conventionally, two directional
relays would be required at each load connection point, one for each direction.
A simple system is illustrated in Figure 2.1.10 showing definite time grading, although inverse
time can also be applied. Non-directional relays are applied at the in-feeds to the ring. All other
protections are directional relays. It can be seen that a fault at F is cleared by tripping at A in 1.0s
and at B in 0.4s.
Alternatively, since GRD140 provides multiple, independent bi-directional overcurrent stages, a
scheme could be implemented in which a single relay can perform the necessary protection
functions in both directions at each load connection point. Each GRD140 overcurrent element can
be programmed with different settings for forward and reverse direction, thus allowing correct
grading to be achieved in both the clockwise and anti-clockwise directions.

17

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

0.4s

GRD140

1.0s

GRD140

GRD140

GRD140

0.1s

0.7s

GRD140
1.3s
Non-directional

GRD140

0.4s

GRD140

1.0s

GRD140

GRD140

0.1s

GRD140

1.3s
Non-directional

Figure 2.1.10

0.7s

Protection of a Ring Main Circuit

Power Systems with Sources at both Line Terminals


In power systems with sources at both line terminals as shown in Figure 2.1.11, the fault current
flows in from both terminals.

G1

G2
F2

Figure 2.1.11

F1

Protection of a power system with sources at both line terminals

The protection is performed by setting the directional element at points 1, 2 and 3 to operate only
when the fault current (F1: solid lines) flows in from source G1 and at points a, b and c to operate only
when the fault current (F2: dotted lines) flows in from source G2, with grading provided by time
delays.

18

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.2.2 Directional Characteristics
Figure 2.1.12 illustrates the directional characteristic, with the forward operate zone shaded. The
reverse zone is simply a mirror image of the forward zone. The forward operate zone or reverse
operate zone is selectable by the scheme switch [OC-DIR], [EF-DIR], [SE-DIR] and [NC-DIR].
As shown in Figure 2.1.13, each directional characteristic is composed of a forward directional
characteristic, reverse directional characteristic and overcurrent thresholds.
Boundary of Operation
(leading)

CA + 90

Boundary of Operation
CA + 90

+87.5(leading)

CA + 60

CA + 60

CA + 30

CA + 30

10 x Is

10 x Is
5 x Is

5 x Is

CA - 180

CA - 180

CA

Reverse
Operate
Zone

Forward
Operate
Zone

CA

Reverse
Operate
Zone

CA - 30

Forward
Operate
Zone

CA - 60

CA - 60
CA - 90

CA - 90

Boundary of Operation
(lagging)

Boundary of Operation
- 87.5(lagging)

CA: Characteristic angle

CA: Characteristic angle

(a) Characteristic of OC, EF and NOC

Figure 2.1.12

Reverse

CA - 30

(b) Characteristic of SEF

Directional Operate Characteristic

Directional (Forward)

Stage
4
3
2
1

&

1-4
Forward

&

1-4
Reverse

+: lead angle
0

: lag angle

Vpol

Directional (Reverse)

Overcurrent (1-4 stage)


Forward
I

(Note) NOC provides stage 1 and 2 only.

: Characteristic angle

Figure 2.1.13

Directional element

Polarising signals for directional elements are shown in Figure 2.1.14. Polarisation for directional
phase overcurrent element OC is achieved by the 90 quadrature method, whereby the phase angle
of each current is compared with the phase to phase voltage between the other two phases. Since
the voltage inputs to the relay will normally be connected phase to neutral, the polarising phase to
phase voltages are derived internally. The polarizing negative sequence voltage is also derived
internally. The polarizing zero sequence voltage is derived from a residual voltage or internally
depending on the model. Direction is determined in each case by measuring the phase angle of the
current with respect to a suitable polarising quantity. Table 2.1.2 summarises the current inputs
and their respective polarising signals. For details of the relationship between directional earth
fault protection and power system earthing, see Appendix B.

19

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Ve

V2

Vbc90
Va

Va

Va

Ie
Ia

Vc

Vbc

Vb

I2

Vc

Vc

Vb

Vb

aVc

a Vb
Ve

V2

Figure 2.1.14

Relationship between Current Input and Polarising signal

Table 2.1.2

Directional polarising signals

Directional element

Current Input

Polarising Signal

Comment

OC-A

Ia

Vbc90 (*)

Refer to Fig. 2.1.14 (a)

OC-B

Ib

Vca90 (*)

OC-C

Ic

Vab90 (*)

EF

Ie

-Ve

SEF

Ise

-Ve

NOC

I2

-V2

Refer to Fig. 2.1.14 (c)


Refer to Fig. 2.1.14 (b)

Note (*): The quadrature voltages used for polarization of the phase fault elements are automatically
phase-shifted by +90, such that they are in phase with the faulted phase voltage under
normal conditions. Therefore the faulted phase current will normally lag its polarizing
voltage under fault conditions and should be set with a negative characteristic angle. Refer to
section 2.1.3.3 for guidance on choice of settings.

In the event of a close up three phase fault, all three polarising signals will collapse below the
minimum threshold. Voltage memory provides a temporary polarising signal in these
circumstances. GRD140 maintains the polarising signal for a short period by reconstructing the
pre-fault voltages and judges the fault direction. After the voltage memory has disappeared, the
direction judgement is effective while the fault current flows as shown in Figure 2.1.15.
Phase difference calculation
|V||I|cos() 0

Amplitude calculation
|l|OCset

&

1
F/F
1

Output of
directional element

&

Amplitude calculation
|Vpol|Vset
(Note) OCset: Current setting
Vset : Voltage setting. In the case of OC and NOC, Vset = 1V fixed.

Figure 2.1.15

Direction Judgement after Disappearance of Voltage Memory

To cover applications where a 2:1:1 current distribution(*) may be experienced, it is possible to

20

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
programme the directional phase fault protection such that a trip output will only be given if two or
more phases detect fault current in the same operate zone.
Note (*): Only one-phase is in heavy load condition.

2.1.3

Scheme Logic

2.1.3.1 Phase overcurrent protection


Figures 2.1.16 to 2.1.19 show the scheme logic of the non-directional and directional phase
overcurrent protection OC1 to OC4.
Note:

For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix L.

The directional control characteristic can be selected to Forward (FWD) or Reverse (REV) or
Non-directional (Non) by scheme switch setting [OC-DIR] (not shown in Figures 2.1.16 to
2.1.19). If instantaneous tripping is required, signal OC_INST_TP is assigned using the PLC
function.
OC1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure
2.1.16. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] to DT and trip signal OC1
TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOC1. The inverse time protection is selected by
setting [MOC1] to any one of IEC, IEEE, US or CON and then setting [MOC1C]
according to the required IDMT characteristic, and trip signal OC1_TRIP is given.
The OC2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.17. The scheme logic of OC2 is the same as that of the OC1.
Figure 2.1.18 and Figure 2.1.19 show the scheme logic of the definite time phase overcurrent
protection OC3 and OC4. The OC3 and OC4 give trip and alarm signals OC3_TRIP and
OC4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOC3 and TOC4 respectively.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the OC1 to OC4 protection with the scheme switches
[OC1-2F] to [OC4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.1.8.1.
The trip mode of OC1 TRIP to OC4 ALARM can be selected by setting [OCTP] to 3POR(any
one of 3 phases) or 2OUTOF3(2 out of 3 phases) gate. With 2OUTOF3 selected, the trip
signal is not issued during a single-phase fault. The switch [OCTP] is common for OC1 to OC4
protection.
The OC1 to OC4 protection provide the delayed trip control function (instantaneous trip or
delayed trip) according to the trip shot number for a fault such as a reclose-on-to-fault in
multi-shot reclosing (see Section 2.5.). If a permanent fault occurs, the following tripping (Trip)
and reclose initiating (ARC) is executed:
Trip (1st) ARC (1st) Trip (2nd) ARC (2nd) Trip (3rd) ARC (3rd) Trip (4th)
ARC (4th) Trip (5th) ARC (5th) Trip (6th)
Each tripping is selected by setting [OC-TP] to any one of Inst(instantaneous trip),
Set(delayed trip by TOC and [MOC1] setting) or Off(blocked).
The OC1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.1.3.6.
GRD140 incorporates a VT failure supervision function (VTFS). (See Section 3.3.4.) When the
VTFS detects a VT failure, it can alarm and block the OC1 to OC4 protection by the scheme
switch [VTF-OC1BLK] to [VTF-OC4BLK] respectively.
The OC1 to OC4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OC1EN] to [OC4EN] or the
PLC signals OC1_BLOCK to OC4_BLOCK respectively.

21

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TOC1

101

102

OC1 B

103

C
[OC1-2F]

&

&

&

&

&

&

262

263

1
264

OC1-A TRIP
OC1-B TRIP
OC1-C TRIP
261

0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&

OC1 TRIP

ICD

104

&

&

105

OC1
B
(INST)
C

&

&

&

106

[OCTP]

&

OC1-INST

1696 OC1_INST_TP

&

&

&

&

"3POR"

3POR
2OUTOF3

"2OUTOF3"

&

[MOC1]
+

"IEC"

[OC1-EN]
+ "ON"

"IEEE"

Delayed trip control:


SHOT NUM1

OC1 ON

"US"

From Figure
2.5.1.

"CON"

1536 OC1_BLOCK

[OC1-TP1]
+

&

Non VTF
[VTF OC1-BLK]
+ "OFF"

SHOT NUM6

"DT"

OC1HS B

119
120
121

[OC1-TP6]
+

OC1-A HS

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

&

OC1-INST

&

OC1 OFF

&

&

OC1-B HS
OC1-C HS

Figure 2.1.16

OC1 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection

22

OC1 ON

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TOC2

107

108

OC2 B

109

C
[OC2-2F]

&

&

&

&

&

&

266

OC2-A TRIP

267

OC2-B TRIP

1
268

OC2-C TRIP

265

0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&

OC2 TRIP

ICD

110

&

A
OC2
B
(INST)
C

&

1697 OC2_INST_TP

"3POR"

[OCTP]

&
1

&

&

&

OC2-INST

3POR
2OUTOF3

"2OUTOF3"

&

[MOC2]

Delayed trip control:

"IEC"

[OC2-EN]
+ "ON"

"IEEE"

SHOT NUM1

From Figure
2.5.1.

OC2 ON

"US"

&

[OC2-TP1]
+

"DT"
1537 OC2_BLOCK

[OC2-TP6]
+

Figure 2.1.17

115

&

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

&
&

[OC3-2F]

&

270

271

1
272

OC3-A TRIP
OC3-B TRIP
OC3-C TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

269

"Block" &

[OC3-EN]
+ "ON"
OC3 ON
1538 OC3_BLOCK

&

OC3 TRIP

&
&

&

[OCTP]

&
1

1698 OC3_INST_TP

SHOT NUM1

SHOT NUM6

[OC3-TP1]
+

[OC3-TP6]
+

Figure 2.1.18

&

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"3POR"

3POR

"2OUTOF3"

Delayed trip control:

From Figure
2.5.1.

&

&

OC3-INST

OC2 ON

TOC3

&

OC3 B

OC2 OFF

OC2 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection

113

A
114

&

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

OC2-INST

SHOT NUM6

"CON"

ICD

&

112

&

111

&

&

&

OC3-INST

&

OC3 OFF

&

&

OC3 Definite Time Phase Overcurrent Protection

23

2OUTOF3

OC3 ON

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TOC4

116

&

OC4 B

117

118

&
&

[OC4-2F]
+

ICD

274

275

1
276

OC4-A_ALARM
OC4-B_ALARM
OC4-C_ALARM

0.00 - 300.00s

273

"Block" &

[OC4-EN]
+ "ON"
OC4 ON
1539 OC4_BLOCK

&

&
&

&

[OCTP]

&
1

1699 OC4_INST_TP

SHOT NUM1

SHOT NUM6

[OC4-TP1]
+

[OC4-TP6]
+

Figure 2.1.19

&

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"3POR"

3POR

"2OUTOF3"

Delayed trip control:

From Figure
2.5.1.

&

&

OC4-INST

OC4_ALARM

&

OC4-INST

&

2OUTOF3

OC4 OFF

&

OC4 ON

&

OC4 Definite Time Phase Overcurrent Protection

2.1.3.2 Earth fault protection


Figure 2.1.20 to Figure 2.1.23 show the scheme logic for the non-directional and directional earth
fault protection EF1 to EF4.
The directional control characteristic can be selected to FWD or REV or Non by scheme
switch setting [EF-DIR] (not shown in Figures 2.1.20 to 2.1.23). If instantaneous tripping is
required, the signal EF_INST_TP is assigned using the PLC function.
The EF1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.20. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MEF1] to DT, and the trip
signal EF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TEF1. The inverse time protection is
selected by setting [MEF1] to any one of IEC, IEEE, US or CON and then setting
[MEF1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic, and the trip signal EF1_TRIP is given.
The EF2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.21. The scheme logic of EF2 is the same as that of the EF1.
Figure 2.1.22 and Figure 2.1.23 show the scheme logic of the definite time earth fault protection
EF3 and EF4. The EF3 and EF4 give trip and alarm signals EF3_TRIP and EF4_ALARM through
the delayed pick-up timers TEF3 and TEF4 respectively.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the EF1 to EF4 protection by the scheme switches
[EF1-2F] to [EF4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.1.8.1.
The EF1 to EF4 protection provide the delayed trip control function (instantaneous trip or delayed
trip) according to the trip shot number for a fault such as a reclose-on-to-fault in multi-shot
reclosing (see Section 2.5). If a permanent fault occurs, the following tripping (Trip) and reclose
initiating (ARC) is executed:

24

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Trip (1st) ARC (1st) Trip (2nd) ARC (2nd) Trip (3rd) ARC (3rd) Trip (4th)
ARC (4th) Trip (5th) ARC (5th) Trip (6th)
Each tripping is selected by setting [EF-TP] to any one of Inst(instantaneous trip),
Set(delayed trip by TEF and [MEF1] setting) or Off(blocked).
EF1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.1.3.6.
GRD140 incorporates a VT failure supervision function (VTFS) and a CT failure supervision
function (CTFS). When the VTFS or CTFS detects a VT failure or a CT failure, it can alarm and
block the EF1 to EF4 protection by the scheme switch [VTF-EF1BLK] to [VTF-EF4BLK] or
[CTF-EF1BLK] to [CTF-EF4BLK] respectively.
The EF1 to EF4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [EF1EN] to [EF4EN] or the
PLC signals EF1_BLOCK to EF4_BLOCK respectively.
EF1

EF1-REV

131

[EF1-2F]

&

&

CURREV-EF1

TEF1

285

EF1_CARRIER

&

281

&

EF1_TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&

ICD

EF1
(INST)

132

&
&

EF1-INST
1700 EF1_INST_TP

1548 EF1_PERMIT

[EF1-EN]
+ "OFF"

"IEC"
"IEEE"

1
Delayed trip control:

EF1 ON

"US"

SHOT NUM1

From Figure
2.5.1.

"CON"
"DT"

SHOT NUM6

1544 EF1_BLOCK

Non VTF
[VTF-EF1BLK]
+ "OFF"

&

[EF1-TP1]
+

Non CTF
[CTF-EF1BLK]
+ "OFF"

EF1HS

[EF1-EN]
+ "ON"

[MEF1]

138

[EF1-TP6]
+

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

&

&

EF1 OFF

&

&

EF1 HS

Figure 2.1.20

EF1 Earth Fault Protection

25

EF1-INST

EF1 ON

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
EF2-REV

133

EF2

[EF2-2F]

&

&

CURREV-EF2

TEF2

286

EF2_CARRIER

&

282

&

EF2_TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&

ICD

EF2
(INST)

134

&
&

EF2-INST
1701 EF2_INST_TP

1549 EF2_PERMIT

[EF2-EN]
+ "OFF"

"IEC"
"IEEE"

1
Delayed trip control:

EF2 ON

"US"

SHOT NUM1

From Figure
2.5.1.

"CON"
"DT"

&

&

Non VTF
[VTF-EF2BLK]
+ "OFF"

[EF2-TP1]
+

Figure 2.1.21

[EF3-2F]

&

CURREV-EF3

TEF3

&

EF2 ON

EF2 Earth Fault Protection

EF3-REV

135

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

[EF2-TP6]
+

EF2 OFF

&

Non CTF
[CTF-EF2BLK]
+ "OFF"

&

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

EF2-INST

SHOT NUM6

1545 EF2_BLOCK

EF3

[EF2-EN]
+ "ON"

[MEF2]

287

&

EF3_CARRIER
283

&

EF3_TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&

ICD

&
[EF3-EN]
+ "OFF"

1550 EF3_PERMIT

EF3 ON
EF3-INST

Delayed trip control:

1702 EF3_INST_TP
1546 EF3_BLOCK

SHOT NUM1

Non VTF
[VTF-EF3BLK]
+ "OFF"

&

From Figure
2.5.1.

SHOT NUM6

1
[EF3-TP1]
+

Non CTF
[CTF-EF3BLK]
+ "OFF"

[EF3-EN]
+ "ON"

[EF3-TP6]
+

Figure 2.1.22

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

&

EF3-INST

&

EF3 OFF

&

&

EF3 Definite Time Earth Fault Protection

26

EF3 ON

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
EF4-REV

135

EF4

&

[EF4-2F]

CURREV-EF4

TEF4

288

&

EF4_CARRIER
284

&

EF4_ALARM

0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&

ICD

&
[EF4-EN]
+ "OFF"

1551 EF4_PERMIT

EF4 ON
EF4-INST

Delayed trip control:

1703 EF4_INST_TP
1547 EF4_BLOCK

[EF4-EN]
+ "ON"

SHOT NUM1

&

Non VTF

From Figure
2.5.1.

&

SHOT NUM6

[VTF-EF4BLK]
+ "OFF"

[EF4-TP1]
+

Non CTF
[CTF-EF4BLK]
+ "OFF"

Figure 2.1.23

EF4 ON

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

[EF4-TP6]
+

EF4 OFF

&

&

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

EF4-INST

&

EF4 Definite Time Earth Fault Protection

Earth fault command protection


GRD140 can provide command protection. These protections require two stage EF elements, one
is for tripping and the other is for blocking or for current reverse detection.
Current reverse detection logic is provided with all stages EF1 to EF4 for command protection as
shown in Figure 2.1.24. In response to power system faults on parallel lines, sequential opening of
the circuit breaker may cause a fault current reversal on healthy lines. This logic is provided to
prevent false operation in the worst case. When EF reverse zone operates and EF-REV outputs
for 20ms or more, then even if the EF forward zone subsequently operates, CURREV-EF
becomes 0 to block tripping of the local terminal relay or transmission of the trip permission
signal, for a time set by the TREBK setting.
The stage used for current reverse detection should be selected by the scheme switch [CURREV].
The selected stage should have scheme switch [EF-DIR] set to REV.
TREBK

EF1-REV

&

&

EF2-REV
EF3-REV
EF4-REV

&

&

&

&

&

&

0.02 s

[EF1-DIR] "REV"
+

[EF1-DIR] "FWD"
+

[EF2-DIR]
"REV"
+

[EF2-DIR] "FWD"
+

[EF3-DIR] "REV"
+
[EF4-DIR]
"REV"
+
CURREV
+

137

0.00 - 10.00s

&

CURREV-EF1

&

CURREV-EF2

&

CURREV-EF3

&

CURREV-EF4

[EF3-DIR] "FWD"
+

"1"
"2"
"3"
"4"

[EF4-DIR]
"FWD"
+

Figure 2.1.24

Current Reverse Detection

2.1.3.3 Setting for OC and EF protection


The table shows the setting elements necessary for the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection

27

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
and their setting ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

OC

95 95

45

OC characteristic angle

OC1

0.1 25.0 A
(0.02 5.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

5.0 A
(1.00 A)

OC1 threshold setting

TOC1

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

OC1 definite time setting. Required if


[MOC1] = DT.

TOC1M

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

OC1 time multiplier setting. Required if


[MOC1] = IEC, IEEE or US.

TOC1R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

OC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if


[OC1R] = DEF.

TOC1RM

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

OC1 dependent time delayed reset time


multiplier. Required if [OC1R] = DEP.

OC2

0.1 25.0 A
(0.02 5.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

25.0 A
(5.00 A)

OC2 threshold setting

TOC2

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

OC2 definite time setting. Required if


[MOC2] = DT.

TOC2M

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

OC2 time multiplier setting. Required if


[MOC2] = IEC, IEEE or US.

TOC2R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

OC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if


[OC2R] = DEF.

TOC2RM

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

OC1 dependent time delayed reset time


multiplier. Required if [OC2R] = DEP.

OC3

0.1 250.0 A
(0.02 50.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

50.0 A
(10.00 A)

OC3 threshold setting

TOC3

0.00 300.0 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

OC3 definite time setting

OC4

0.1 250.0 A
(0.02 50.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

100.0 A
(20.00 A)

OC4 threshold setting

TOC4

0.0 300.0 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

OC4 definite time setting

EF

95 95

45

EF characteristic angle

EFV

0.5 100.0 V

0.1 V

3.0 V

EF ZPS voltage level

EF1

0.1 25.0 A
(0.02 5.00 A)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

1.5 A
(0.30 A)

EF1 threshold setting

TEF1

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

EF1 definite time setting. Required if [MEF1]


= DT.

TEF1M

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

EF1 time multiplier setting. Required if


[MEF1] = IEC, IEEE or US.

TEF1R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

EF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if


[EF1R] = DEF.

TEF1RM

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

EF1 dependent time delayed reset time


multiplier. Required if [EF1R] = DEP.

EF2

0.1 25.0 A
(0.02 5.00 A)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

15.0 A
(3.00 A)

EF2 threshold setting

TEF2

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

EF2 definite time setting. Required if [MEF2]


= DT.

TEF2M

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

EF2 time multiplier setting. Required if


[MEF2] = IEC, IEEE or US.

28

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

TEF2R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

EF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if


[EF2R] = DEF.

TEF2RM

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

EF2 dependent time delayed reset time


multiplier. Required if [EF2R] = DEP.

EF3

0.1 250.0 A
(0.02 50.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

25.0 A
(5.00 A)

EF3 threshold setting

TEF3

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

EF3 definite time setting

EF4

0.1 250.0 A
(0.02 50.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

50.0 A
(10.00 A)

EF4 threshold setting

TEF4

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

EF4 definite time setting

TREBK

0.00 10.00 s

0.01 s

0.10

Current reverse blocking time

[OC1EN]

Off / On

On

OC1 Enable

[OC1-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

OC1 directional characteristic

[MOC1]

DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON

DT

OC1 time characteristic

[MOC1C]
MOC1C-IEC
MOC1C-IEEE
MOC1C-US

OC1 inverse curve type.


NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8

NI
MI
CO2

Required if [MOC1] = IEC.


Required if [MOC1] = IEEE.
Required if [MOC1] = US.

[OC1R]

DEF / DEP

DEF

OC1 reset characteristic. Required if


[MOC1] = IEEE or US.

[VTF-OC1BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[OC2EN]

Off / On

Off

OC2 Enable

[OC2-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

OC2 directional characteristic

[MOC2]

DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON

DT

OC2 time characteristic

[MOC2C]
MOC2C-IEC
MOC2C-IEEE
MOC2C-US

OC2 inverse curve type.


NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8

NI
MI
CO2

Required if [MOC2] = IEC.


Required if [MOC2] = IEEE.
Required if [MOC2] = US.

[OC2R]

DEF / DEP

DEF

OC2 reset characteristic. Required if


[MOC2] = IEEE or US.

[VTF-OC2BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[OC3EN]

Off / On

Off

OC3 Enable

[OC3-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

OC3 directional characteristic

[VTF-OC3BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[OC4EN]

Off / On

Off

OC4 Enable

[OC4-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

OC4 directional characteristic

[VTF-OC4BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[OCTP]

3POR / 2OUTOF3

3POR

OC trip mode

[EF1EN]

Off / On / POP

On

EF1 Enable

[EF1-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

EF1 directional characteristic

[MEF1]

DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON

DT

EF1 time characteristic

[MEF1C]
MEF1C-IEC
MEF1C-IEEE
MEF1C-US

EF1 inverse curve type.


NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8

NI
MI
CO2

29

Required if [MEF1] = IEC.


Required if [MEF1] = IEEE.
Required if [MEF1] = US.

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Element

Range

[EF1R]

Step

Default

Remarks

DEF / DEP

DEF

EF1 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF1]


= IEEE or US.

[VTF-EF1BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[CTF-EF1BLK]

Off / On

Off

CTF block enable

[EF2EN]

Off / On / POP

Off

EF2 Enable

[EF2-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

EF2 directional characteristic

[MEF2]

DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON

DT

EF2 time characteristic

[MEF2C]

EF2 inverse curve type.

MEF2C-IEC
MEF2C-IEEE
MEF2C-US

NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8

NI
MI
CO2

Required if [MEF2] = IEC.


Required if [MEF2] = IEEE.
Required if [MEF2] = US.

[EF2R]

DEF / DEP

DEF

EF2 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF2]


= IEEE or US.

[VTF-EF2BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[CTF-EF2BLK]

Off / On

Off

CTF block enable

[EF3EN]

Off / On / POP

Off

EF3 Enable

[EF3-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

EF3 directional characteristic

[VTF-EF3BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[CTF-EF3BLK]

Off / On

Off

CTF block enable

[EF4EN]

Off / On / POP

Off

EF4 Enable

[EF4-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

EF4 directional characteristic

[VTF-EF4BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[CTF-EF4BLK]

Off / On

Off

CTF block enable

CURREV

Off / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4

Off

Current reverse detection

(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
the case of a 5 A rating.

[Setting Example of Command Protection]


The following shows a setting example of command protection when the EF1 is applied for
forward fault detection and the EF2 is applied for reverse fault detection.
(1) POP (Permissive overreach protection)
(a) Setting of EF element
EF1:

--- depends on power system condition

TEF1:

--- for time delayed trip

EF1EN:

POP

EF1-DIR:

FWR

EF2:

TEF2:

0.00s

EF2EN:

POP

EF2-DIR:

REV

--- depends on power system condition

CURREV: 2
(b) Setting of BO (Binary Output)

30

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The signal EF1-CR (No.285) is assigned to BOn. --- carrier signal send BO
(c) Setting of BI (Binary Input)
The EF1 protection permission is assigned to BIn. --- carrier signal receive BI
BIn SNS: Norm
(2) BOP (Blocking overreach protection)
(a) Setting of EF element
EF1:

--- depends on power system condition

TEF1:

--- for time delayed trip

EF1EN:

POP

EF1-DIR:

FWR

EF2:

TEF2:

0.30s (minimum) --- coordination time for blocking carrier signal receiving

EF2EN:

POP

EF2-DIR:

REV

--- depends on power system condition

CURREV: 2
(b) Setting of BO (Binary Output)
The signal EF2-CR (No.286) is assigned to BOn. --- carrier signal send BO
(c) Setting of BI (Binary Input)
The EF1 protection permission is assigned to BIn. --- carrier signal receive BI
BIn SNS: Inv
[Time Overcurrent Protection Setting]
(1) Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection
Current setting
In Figure 2.1.25, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in the
event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a fault
on the next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at
remote end F3.
To calculate the minimum fault current, phase-to-phase faults are assumed for the phase
overcurrent element, and phase to earth faults for the residual overcurrent element, assuming the
probable maximum source impedance. When considering the fault at F3, the remote end of the
next section is assumed to be open.
The higher the current setting, the more effective the inverse characteristic. On the other hand, the
lower the setting, the more dependable the operation. The setting is normally 1 to 1.5 times or less
of the minimum fault current.
For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is set to the lowest
value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not
operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the
current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines.

31

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
A

F1

Figure 2.1.25

F2

F3

Current Settings in Radial Feeder

Time setting
Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation to relays on adjacent feeders. Consider
the minimum source impedance when the current flowing through the relay reaches a maximum.
In Figure 2.1.25, in the event of a fault at F2, the operating time is set so that terminal A may
operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The current flowing in the relays may sometimes be
greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is open. At this time, time coordination must also
be kept.
The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches a maximum is that if time
coordination is obtained for a large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for
the small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each
terminal.
The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a
fault at point F2 in Figure 2.1.25.
T c = T1 + T2 + Tm
where,

T1: circuit breaker clearance time at B


T2: relay reset time at A
Tm: time margin

(2) Settings of Definite Time Overcurrent Protection


Current setting
The current setting is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at the remote
end of the protected feeder section. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a
fault in a next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current, in the event of a fault
at the remote end of the next feeder section.
Identical current values can be set for terminals, but graded settings are better than identical
settings, in order to provide a margin for current sensitivity. The farther from the power source the
terminal is located, the higher the sensitivity (i.e. the lower setting) that is required.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not
operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the
current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines. Taking the
selection of instantaneous operation into consideration, the settings must be high enough not to
operate for large motor starting currents or transformer inrush currents.
Time setting
When setting the delayed pick-up timers, the time grading margin Tc is obtained in the same way
as explained in Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection.

32

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
(3) Directional Characteristic Angle Setting
OC Characteristic Angle
The quadrature voltages used for polarization of the phase fault directional elements are
automatically phase-shifted in GRD140 by +90, such that they are in phase with the
corresponding phase voltages under normal conditions. Under fault conditions, the faulted phase
current will lag its phase voltage (and hence its polarising voltage) by an angle dependent on the
system X/R ratio. Therefore, it is necessary to apply a negative characteristic angle to the phase
fault directional elements in order to obtain maximum sensitivity.
The characteristic angle is determined by the [OC] setting. The actual value chosen will depend
on the application, but recommended settings for the majority of typical applications are as
follows:
-60, for protection of plain feeders, or applications with an earthing point behind the relay
location.
-45, for protection of transformer feeders, or applications with an earthing point in front of
the relay location.
EF Characteristic Angle
When determining the characteristic angle for directional earth fault protection, the method of
system earthing must be considered. In solidly earthed systems, the earth fault current tends to lag
the faulted phase voltage (and hence the inverted residual voltage used for polarising) by a
considerable angle, due to the reactance of the source. In resistance earthed systems the angle will
be much smaller.
Commonly applied settings are as follows:
-60, for protection of solidly earthed transmission systems.
-45, for protection of solidly earthed distribution systems.
0 or -15, for protection of resistance earthed systems.
Further guidance on application of directional earth fault protection is given in appendix B.
2.1.3.4 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
The sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is applied for distribution systems earthed through high
impedance, where very low levels of fault current are expected for earth faults. Furthermore, the
SEF elements of GRD140 are also applicable to the standby earth fault protection and the high
impedance restricted earth fault protection of transformers.
GRD140 provides directional earth fault protection with more sensitive settings for use in
applications where the fault current magnitude may be very low. A 4-stage directional overcurrent
function is provided, with the first stage programmable for inverse time or definite time operation.
The second, third and fourth stages provide definite time operation.
The sensitive earth fault element includes a digital filter which rejects all harmonics other than the
fundamental power system frequency.
The sensitive earth fault quantity is measured directly, using a dedicated core balance earth fault
CT.
This input can also be used in transformer restricted earth fault applications, by the use of external
metrosils (varistors) and setting resistors.
The directional sensitive earth fault elements can be configured for directional operation in the
same way as the standard earth fault pole, by polarising against the residual voltage. An additional

33

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
restraint on operation can be provided by a Residual Power element RP, for use in protection of
power systems which utilise resonant (Petersen coil) earthing methods.
The SEF elements provide 20 times more sensitive setting ranges (10 mA to 1 A in 5A rating) than
the regular earth fault protection.
Since very low levels of current setting may be applied, there is a danger of unwanted operation
due to harmonics of the power system frequency, which can appear as residual current. Therefore
the SEF elements operate only on the fundamental component, rejecting all higher harmonics.
The SEF protection is provided in Model 110 and 420 series which have a dedicated earth fault
input circuit.
The element SEF1 provides inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent
protection. Stage 2 of the two-stage overcurrent protection is used only for the standby earth fault
protection. The SEF2 to SEF4 provide definite time overcurrent protection.
When SEF employs IEEE or USA inverse time characteristics, two reset modes are available:
definite time or dependent time resetting. If the IEC inverse time characteristic is employed,
definite time resetting is provided. For other characteristics, refer to Section 2.1.1.1.
In applications of SEF protection, it must be ensured that any erroneous zero-phase current is
sufficiently low compared to the fault current, so that a highly sensitive setting is available.
The erroneous current may be caused with load current due to unbalanced configuration of the
distribution lines, or mutual coupling from adjacent lines. The value of the erroneous current
during normal conditions can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.
The earth fault current for SEF may be fed from a core balance CT, but if it is derived from three
phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error in phase faults. Transient
false functioning may be prevented by a relatively long time delay.
Standby earth fault protection
The SEF is energised from a CT connected in the power transformer low voltage neutral, and the
standby earth fault protection trips the transformer to backup the low voltage feeder protection,
and ensures that the neutral earthing resistor is not loaded beyond its rating. Stage 1 trips the
transformer low voltage circuit breaker, then stage 2 trips the high voltage circuit breaker(s) with a
time delay after stage 1 operates.
The time graded tripping is valid for transformers connected to a ring bus, banked transformers
and feeder transformers.
Restricted earth fault protection
The SEF elements can be applied in a high impedance restricted earth fault scheme (REF), for
protection of a star-connected transformer winding whose neutral is earthed directly or through
impedance.
As shown in Figure 2.1.26, the differential current between the residual current derived from the
three-phase feeder currents and the neutral current in the neutral conductor is introduced into the
SEF elements. Two external components, a stabilising resistor and a varistor, are connected as
shown in the figure. The former increases the overall impedance of the relay circuit and stabilises
the differential voltage, and the latter suppresses any overvoltage in the differential circuit.

34

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
F
Power
Transformer

Varistor

GRD140
SEF input

Stabilising
Resistor

Figure 2.1.26

High Impedance REF

Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.27 to 2.1.30 show the scheme logic for the directional sensitive earth fault protection.
The directional control characteristic can be selected to FWD or REV or Non by scheme
switch setting [SE-DIR].
Figure 2.1.27 shows the scheme logic of directional sensitive earth fault protection SEF1 with
inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. The definite time
protection is selected by setting [MSE1] to DT. The element SEF1 is enabled for sensitive earth
fault protection and stage 1 trip signal SEF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer
TSE1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] to either IEC, IEEE, US or
CON and then setting [MEF1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic. The element
SEF1 is enabled and stage 1 trip signal SEF1_TRIP is given.
Both protections provide stage 2 trip signal SEF1-S2 through a delayed pick-up timer TSE12.
When the standby earth fault protection is applied by introducing earth current from the
transformer low voltage neutral circuit, stage 1 trip signals are used to trip the transformer low
voltage circuit breaker. If SEF1 continues operating after stage 1 has operated, the stage 2 trip
signal can be used to trip the transformer high voltage circuit breaker(s).
SEF1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.1.3.6.
The SEF2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.1.28. The scheme logic of SEF2 is the same as that of SEF1 except for SEF1-S2_TRIP.
Figure 2.1.29 and Figure 2.1.30 show the scheme logic of the definite time sensitive earth fault
protection SEF3 and SEF4. SEF3 and SEF4 give trip and alarm signals SEF3_TRIP and
SEF4_ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TSE3 and TSE4 respectively.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the SEF1 to SEF4 protection by the scheme switches
[SE1-2F] to [SE4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.1.8.1.
The SEF1 to SEF4 protection provide the delayed trip control function (instantaneous trip or
delayed trip) according to the trip shot number for a fault such as a reclose-on-to-fault in
multi-shot reclosing (see Section 2.5). If a permanent fault occurs, the following tripping (Trip)
and reclose initiating (ARC) is executed:
Trip (1st) ARC (1st) Trip (2nd) ARC (2nd) Trip (3rd) ARC (3rd) Trip (4th)
ARC (4th) Trip (5th) ARC (5th) Trip (6th)

35

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Each tripping is selected by setting [SE-TP] to any one of Inst(instantaneous trip),
Set(delayed trip by TSE and [MSE1] setting) or Off(blocked).
The SEF1 to SEF4 protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [SE1EN] to [SE4EN] or
PLC signals SEF1_BLOCK to SEF4_BLOCK. The SEF1 stage 2 trip of standby earth fault
protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [SE1S2].
TSE1
0
t

141

SEF1

[SE1-2F]

&

&

& 0.00 - 300.00s

[SE1EN]
+
"ON"

+ "Block"
&

ICD

291

SEF1-S1
_TRIP

&

142

SEF1
INST

&

[SE1S2]
+

SEF1-INST

TSE12
t
0

&

"ON"

292

0.00 - 300.00s

SEF1-S2_
TRIP

1704 SEF1_INST_TP
[MSE1]
+

1552 SEF1_BLOCK

"IEC"

Non VTF
VTF_SE1BLK
+ "OFF"

"IEEE"
"US"

&
SEF1 ON

Delayed trip control:


SHOT NUM1

"CON"
"DT"

RPF

&

RPR
[RPEN]
+

&

1
1

"ON"

"FWD"
[SE1 DIR] "REV"
"NON"
+

SHOT NUM6

[SE1-TP1]
+

"OFF"

SEF1HS

From Figure
2.5.1.

&
&

[SE1-TP6]
+

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

&

&
&

SEF1-INST

SE1 OFF
1

&

SEF1 HS

Figure 2.1.27

SEF1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic

36

SEF1 ON

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TSE2
0
t

143

SEF2

[SE2-2F]

&

&

[SE2EN]
+
"ON"

+ "Block"
&

ICD

& 0.00 - 300.00s

293

SEF2_TRIP

&

144

SEF2
INST

&

SEF2-INST

1705 SEF2_INST_TP
[MSE2]
+

1553 SEF2_BLOCK

"IEC"

VTF_SE2BLK
+ "OFF"

"IEEE"
"US"

&

SEF2 ON

Delayed trip control:


SHOT NUM1

"CON"
"DT"

RPF

&

RPR

&

&

From Figure
2.5.1.

&

"OFF"

"FWD"
[SE2 DIR] "REV"
"NON"
+

&

TSE3
0
t

&

0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&

ICD

SEF3-INST

SEF2 ON

SEF2 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic

&

[SE3-2F]

&

145

SEF3

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

[SE2-TP6]
+

SE2 OFF

&

SEF2-INST

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

[SE2-TP1]
+

Figure 2.1.28

&

SHOT NUM6

"ON"

[RPEN]
+

Non VTF

[SE3EN]
+
"ON"

294

SEF3 TRIP

&

1706 SEF3_INST_TP

RPF

&

RPR
[RPEN]
+
[SE3 DIR]
+

&

1
1

1554 SEF3_BLOCK

&
&

"ON"

VTF_SE3BLK
+ "OFF"

Delayed trip control:

"FWD"

SHOT NUM1

From Figure
2.5.1.

SHOT NUM6

[SE3-TP1]
+

[SE3-TP6]
+

Figure 2.1.29

&

Non VTF

"OFF"
"REV"
"NON"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

SEF3 ON

&

&
&

SEF3-INST

SE3 OFF
1

&

SEF3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic

37

SEF3 ON

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TSE4
0
t

146

SEF4

&

&

0.00 - 300.00s

[SE4-2F]
+ "Block"
&

ICD

[SE4EN]
+
"ON"

SEF4-INST

295

SEF4_ALARM

&

1707 SEF4_INST_TP

RPF
RPR
[RPEN]
+
[SE4 DIR]
+

&

&

&

&

1555 SEF4_BLOCK

"ON"

VTF_SE4BLK
+ "OFF"

"OFF"

Delayed trip control:

"FWD"

SHOT NUM1

"REV"
"NON"

From Figure
2.5.1.

SHOT NUM6

[SE4-TP1]
+

[SE4-TP6]
+

Figure 2.1.30

&

Non VTF

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"

SEF4 ON

&

&
&

SEF4-INST

SE4 OFF
1

SEF4 ON

&

SEF4 Sensitive Definite Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic

Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection and
their setting ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

SE

95 95

SEF characteristic angle

SEV

0.5 100.0

0.1 V

3.0V

SEF ZPS voltage level

SE1

0.01 1.00 A
(0.002 0.200 A)(*)

0.01 A
(0.001 A)

0.05 A
(0.010 A)

SEF1 threshold setting

TSE1

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

SEF1 definite time setting. Required if


[MSE1] = DT.

TSE1M

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting.


Required if [MSE1] = IEC, IEEE or US.

TSE1R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required


if [MSE1] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.

TSE1RM

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

SEF1 dependent time delayed reset time


multiplier. Required if [SE1R] = DEP.

TSE12

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting

SE2

0.01 1.00 A
(0.002 0.200 A)(*)

0.01 A
(0.001 A)

0.05 A
(0.010 A)

SEF2 threshold setting

TSE2

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

SEF2 definite time setting. Required if


[MSE2] = DT.

TSE2M

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

SEF2 inverse time multiplier setting.


Required if [MSE2] = IEC, IEEE or US.

TSE2R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

SEF2 definite time delayed reset. Required


if [MSE2] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.

38

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

TSE2RM

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

SEF2 dependent time delayed reset time


multiplier. Required if [SE2R] = DEP.

SE3

0.01 1.00 A
(0.002 0.200 A)(*)

0.01 A
(0.001 A)

0.05 A
(0.010 A)

SEF3 threshold setting

TSE3

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

SEF3 definite time setting.

SE4

0.01 1.00 A
(0.002 0.200 A)(*)

0.01 A
(0.001 A)

0.05 A
(0.010 A)

SEF4 threshold setting

TSE4

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

SEF4 definite time setting.

RP

0.00 100.00 W
(0.00 20.00 W)(*)

0.01 W
(0.01 W)

0.00 W
(0.00 W)

Residual power sensitivity

[SE1EN]

Off / On

Off

SEF1 Enable

[SE1-DIR]

FWD / REV / NON

FWD

SEF1 directional characteristic

[MSE1]

DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON

DT

SEF1 characteristic

[MSE1C]
MSE1C-IEC
MSE1C-IEEE
MSE1C-US

SEF1 inverse curve type.


NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8

NI
MI
CO2

Required if [MSE1] = IEC.


Required if [MSE1] = IEEE.
Required if [MSE1] = US.

[SE1R]

DEF / DEP

DEF

SEF1 reset characteristic. Required if


[MSE1] = IEEE or US.

[SE1S2]

Off / On

Off

SEF1 stage 2 timer enable

[VTF-SE1BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[SE2EN]

Off / On

Off

SEF2 Enable

[SE2-DIR]

FWD / REV /NON

FWD

SEF2 directional characteristic

[MSE2]

DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON

DT

SEF2 characteristic

[MSE2C]
MSE2C-IEC
MSE2C-IEEE
MSE2C-US

SEF2 inverse curve type.


NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8

NI
MI
CO2

Required if [MSE2] = IEC.


Required if [MSE2] = IEEE.
Required if [MSE2] = US.

[SE2R]

DEF / DEP

DEF

SEF2 reset characteristic. Required if


[MSE2] = IEEE or US.

[VTF-SE2BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[SE3EN]

Off / On

Off

SEF3 Enable

[SE3-DIR]

FWD / REV / NON

FWD

SEF3 directional characteristic

[VTF-SE3BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[SE4EN]

Off / On

Off

SEF4 Enable

[SE4-DIR]

FWD / REV / NON

FWD

SEF4 directional characteristic

[VTF-SE4BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable

[RPEN]

Off / On

Off

Residual power block enable

(*) Current values shown in parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in the
case of a 5 A rating.

SEF
SEF is set lower than the available earth fault current and higher than the erroneous zero-phase
current. The erroneous zero-phase current exists under normal conditions due to the unbalanced
feeder configuration. The zero-phase current is normally fed from a core balance CT on the feeder,
but if it is derived from three phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error
during phase faults.

39

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The erroneous steady state zero-phase current can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay
front panel.
Directional SEF
Directional SEF protection is commonly applied to unearthed systems, and to systems earthed by
an inductance (Peterson Coil). Refer to appendix B for application guidance.
High impedance REF protection
CT saturation under through fault conditions results in voltage appearing across the relay circuit.
The voltage setting of the relay circuit must be arranged such that it is greater than the maximum
voltage that can occur under through fault conditions. The worst case is considered whereby one
CT of the balancing group becomes completely saturated, while the others maintain linear
operation. The excitation impedance of the saturated CT is considered to approximate a
short-circuit.
Saturated CT

Healthy CT
Transformer
Circuit
IF

Varistor

ZM0
RCT
VS

RS

Figure 2.1.31

Stabilising
Resistor

GRD140

RL

Maximum Voltage under Through Fault Condition

The voltage across the relay circuit under these conditions is given by the equation:
VS = IF(RCT + RL)
where:
VS = critical setting voltage (rms)
IF = maximum prospective secondary through fault current (rms)
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
RL = Lead resistance (total resistance of the loop from the saturated CT to the relaying
point)
A series stabilising resistor is used to raise the voltage setting of the relay circuit to VS. No safety
margin is needed since the extreme assumption of unbalanced CT saturation does not occur in
practice. The series resistor value, RS, is selected as follows:
RS = VS / IS
IS is the current setting (in secondary amps) applied to the GRD140 relay. However, the actual
fault setting of the scheme includes the total current flowing in all parallel paths. That is to say that
the actual primary current for operation, after being referred to the secondary circuit, is the sum of
the relay operating current, the current flowing in the varistor, and the excitation current of all the
parallel connected CTs at the setting voltage. In practice, the varistor current is normally small
enough that it can be neglected. Hence:
IS IP / N 4Imag
where:

40

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
IS = setting applied to GRD140 relay (secondary amps)
IP = minimum primary current for operation (earth fault sensitivity)
N = CT ratio
Imag = CT magnetising (excitation) current at voltage VS
More sensitive settings for IS allow for greater coverage of the transformer winding, but they also
require larger values of RS to ensure stability, and the increased impedance of the differential
circuit can result in high voltages being developed during internal faults. The peak voltage, Vpk,
developed may be approximated by the equation:
Vpk = 2 2 Vk I F R S Vk
where:
Vk = CT knee point voltage
IF = maximum prospective secondary current for an internal fault
When a Metrosil is used for the varistor, it should be selected with the following characteristics:
V = CI
where:
V = instantaneous voltage
I = instantaneous current
= constant, normally in the range 0.20 - 0.25
C = constant.
The C value defines the characteristics of the metrosil, and should be chosen according to the
following requirements:
1. The current through the metrosil at the relay voltage setting should be as low as possible,
preferably less than 30mA for a 1Amp CT and less than 100mA for a 5Amp CT.
2. The voltage at the maximum secondary current should be limited, preferably to 1500Vrms.
Restricted earth fault schemes should be applied with high accuracy CTs whose knee point voltage
Vk is chosen according to the equation:
Vk 2VS
where VS is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
2.1.3.5 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The negative sequence overcurrent protection (NOC) is used to detect asymmetrical faults
(phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults) with high sensitivity in conjunction with phase
overcurrent protection and residual overcurrent protection. It also used to detect load unbalance
conditions.
Phase overcurrent protection must be set to lower sensitivity when the load current is large but
NOC sensitivity is not affected by magnitude of the load current, except in the case of erroneous
negative sequence current due to the unbalanced configuration of the distribution lines.
For some earth faults, only a small zero sequence current is fed while the negative sequence
current is comparatively larger. This is probable when the fault occurs at the remote end with a
small reverse zero sequence impedance and most of the zero sequence current flows to the remote
end.

41

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
In these cases, NOC backs up the phase overcurrent and residual overcurrent protection. The NOC
also protects the rotor of a rotating machine from over heating by detecting a load unbalance.
Unbalanced voltage supply to a rotating machine due to a phase loss can lead to increases in the
negative sequence current and in machine heating.
GRD140 provides the directional negative sequence overcurrent protection with definite time
characteristics.
Two independent elements NOC1 and NOC2 are provided for tripping and alarming. These
elements can be directionalised by polarising against the negative sequence voltage.
The NOC protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and the scheme switch
[APPL-CT] is set to 3P.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.32 and 2.1.33 show the scheme logic of directional negative sequence overcurrent
protection NOC1 and NOC2. The directional control characteristic can be selected to Forward
or Reverse or Non by scheme switch setting [NC1-DIR] and [NC2-DIR] (not shown in
Figures 2.1.32 and 2.1.33).
Figure 2.1.32 shows the scheme logic of directional negative sequence overcurrent protection
NOC1 with inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. The definite
time protection is selected by setting [MNC1] to DT, and the trip signal NOC1 TRIP is given
through the delayed pick-up timer TEF1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting
[MNC1] to any one of IEC, IEEE, US or CON and then setting [MNC1C] according to
the required IDMT characteristic, and the trip signal NOC1_TRIP is given.
The NOC2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.1.33. The scheme logic of NOC2 is the same as that of the NOC1.
When the VTFS or CTFS detects a VT failure or a CT failure, it can alarm and block the NOC1
and NOC2 protection by the scheme switch [VTF-NC1BLK] and [VTF-NC2BLK] or
[CTF-NC1BLK] and [CTF- NC2BLK] respectively.
The NOC1 and NOC2 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [NC1EN], [NC2EN] and
[APPL-CT] or the PLC signals NOC1_BLOCK and NOC2_BLOCK respectively.
The scheme switch [APPL-CT] is available in which three-phase overcurrent protection can be
selected. The NOC protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and [APPL-CT]
is set to 3P.

42

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TNC1

169

NOC1

&

&

311

NOC1_TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

[NC1-2F
+ "Block"
&

ICD

NOC1
(INST)

170

&

[NOC1]
+

[NC1-EN]
+ "OFF"

"IEC"
"IEEE"

"US"
"CON"
"DT"
1560 NOC1_BLOCK

&

Non VTF
[VTF-NC1BLK]
+ "OFF"

Non CTF
[CTF-NC1BLK]
+ "OFF"

Figure 2.1.32

Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection NOC1 Scheme Logic


TNC2

171

NOC2

&

&

312

NOC2_ALARM

0.00 - 300.00s

[NC2-2F
+ "Block"
&

ICD

NOC2
(INST)

185

&

[NOC1]
+

"IEC"
"IEEE"

[NC2-EN]
+ "OFF"

"US"
"CON"
"DT"
1561 NOC2_BLOCK

Non VTF
[VTF-NC2BLK]
+ "OFF"

&

Non CTF
[CTF-NC2BLK]
+ "OFF"

Figure 2.1.33

Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection NOC2 Scheme Logic

Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the NOC protection and their setting
ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

NC

95 95

45

NOC characteristic angle

NCV

0.5 25.0 V

0.1 V

3.0 V

NOC NPS voltage level

NC1

0.5 10.0 A
(0.10 2.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

2.0 A
(0.40 A)

NOC1 threshold setting.

43

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

TNC1

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

NOC1 definite time setting. Required if [MNC1] = DT.

TNC1M

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

NOC1 time multiplier setting. Required if [MNC1] =


IEC, IEEE or US.

TNC1R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

NOC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if [NC1R]


= DEF.

TNC1RM

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

NC1 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.


Required if [NC1R] = DEP.

NC2

0.5 - 10.0 A
(0.10 2.00 A)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

1.0 A
(0.20 A)

NOC2 threshold setting.

TNC2

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

NOC2 definite time setting

TNC2M

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

NOC2 time multiplier setting. Required if [MNC2] =


IEC, IEEE or US.

TNC2R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

NOC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if [NC2R]


= DEF.

TNC2RM

0.010 1.500

0.001

1.000

NC2 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.


Required if [NC2R] = DEP.

[NC1EN]

Off / On

Off

NOC1 Enable

[NC1-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

NOC1 Directional Characteristic

[MNC1C]

NOC1 inverse curve type.

MNC1C-IEC
MNC1C-IEEE
MNC1C-US

NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8

NI
MI
CO2

Required if [MNC1] = IEC.


Required if [MNC1] = IEEE.
Required if [MNC1] = US.

[NC1R]

DEF / DEP

DEF

NOC1 reset characteristic. Required if [MNC1] = IEEE


or US.

[CTF-NC1BLK]

Off / On

Off

CTF block enable for NOC1

[VTF-NC1BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable for NOC1

[NC2EN]

Off / On

Off

NOC2 Enable

[NC2-DIR]

FWD/REV/NON

FWD

NOC2 Directional Characteristic

[MNC2C]

NOC2 inverse curve type.

MNC2C-IEC
MNC2C-IEEE
MNC2C-US

NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8

NI
MI
CO2

Required if [MNC2] = IEC.


Required if [MNC2] = IEEE.
Required if [MNC2] = US.

[NC2R]

DEF / DEP

DEF

NOC2 reset characteristic. Required if [MNC2] = IEEE


or US.

[CTF-NC2BLK]

Off / On

Off

CTF block enable for NOC2

[VTF-NC2BLK]

Off / On

Off

VTF block enable for NOC2

[APPL-CT]

3P / 2P / 1P

3P

Three-phase current input

(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current
values are in the case of a 5 A rating.

Sensitive setting of NOC1 and NOC2 thresholds is restricted by the negative phase sequence
current normally present on the system. The negative phase sequence current is measured in the
relay continuously and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel along with the
maximum value. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage and to set
NOC1 and NOC2 to 130 to 150% of the maximum value displayed.
The delay time setting TNC1 and TNC2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements
NOC1 and NOC2. The minimum operating time of the NOC elements is around 200ms.

44

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Under fault conditions, the negative sequence current lags the negative sequence voltage by an
angle dependent on the negative sequence source impedance of the system. This should be
accounted for by setting the NOC characteristic angle setting [NC] when the negative sequence
protection is used in directional mode. Typical settings are as follows:
60 for transmission systems
+45 for distribution systems
2.1.3.6 Application of Protection Inhibits
All GRD140 protection elements can be blocked by a binary input signal. This feature is useful in
a number of applications.
Blocked Overcurrent Protection
Conventional time-graded definite time overcurrent protection can lead to excessive fault
clearance times being experienced for faults closest to the source. The implementation of a
blocked overcurrent scheme can eliminate the need for grading margins and thereby greatly
reduce fault clearance times. Such schemes are suited to radial feeder circuits, particularly where
substations are close together and pilot cables can be economically run between switchboards.
Figure 2.1.34 shows the operation of the scheme.
Instantaneous phase fault and earth fault pick-up signals OC1HS, EF1HS and SEF1HS of OC1,
EF1 and SEF1 elements are allocated to any of the binary output relays and used as a blocking
signal. OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protections are set with a short delay time. (For pick-up signals, refer
to Figure 2.1.16, 2.1.20 and 2.1.27.)
For a fault at F as shown, each relay sends the blocking signal to its upstream neighbor. The signal
is input as a binary input signal OC2 BLOCK, EF2 BLOCK and SEF2 BLOCK at the receiving
end, and blocks the OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protection. Minimum protection delays of 50ms are
recommended for the OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protection, to ensure that the blocking signal has time
to arrive before protection operation.
Inverse time graded operation with elements OC1, EF1 and SEF1 are available with the scheme
switch [MOC1], [MEF1] and [MSE1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of a
failure of the blocked scheme.
F
Trip
GRD140

GRD140

GRD140
OC2/EF2/SEF2

OC2/EF2/SEF2
High
Speed
Block

OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS

Figure 2.1.34

OC2/EF2/SEF2
High
Speed
Block

OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS

Blocked Overcurrent Protection

45

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Blocked Busbar Protection
Non-directional overcurrent protection can be applied to provide a busbar zone scheme for a
simple radial system where a substation has only one source, as illustrated in Figure 2.1.35.
For a fault on an outgoing feeder F1, the feeder protection sends a hardwired blocking signal to
inhibit operation of the incomer, the signal OCHS, EFHS and SEFHS being generated by the
instantaneous phase fault, and earth fault pick-up outputs of OC1, EF1 and SEF1 allocated to any
of the binary output relays. Meanwhile, the feeder is tripped by the OC1, EF1 and SEF1 elements,
programmed with inverse time or definite time delays and set to grade with downstream
protections.
The incomer protection is programmed to trip via its instantaneous elements OC2, EF2 and SEF2
set with short definite time delay settings (minimum 50ms), thus providing rapid isolation for
faults in the busbar zone F2.
At the incomer, inverse time graded operation with elements OC1, EF1 and SEF1 are available
with the scheme switch [MOC1], [MEF1] and [MSE1] setting, thus providing back-up protection
in the event of failure of the blocked scheme.
GRD140 integrated circuit breaker failure protection can be used to provide additional back-trips
from the feeder protection to the incomer, and from the incomer to the HV side of the power
transformer, in the event of the first trip failing to clear the earth fault.
In the case of more complex systems where the substation has two incomers, or where power can
flow into the substation from the feeders, then directional protection must be applied.

GRD140

Delayed Back-up Trip

OC1/EF1/SEF1
High Speed Block to Incomer for Feeder Fault

OC2/ EF2/SEF2
Fast Trip

F2
Feeder Trip

Feeder Trip

Feeder Trip

GRD140

GRD140

GRD140

OC1/EF1/SEF1

OC1/EF1/SEF1

OC1/EF1/SEF1

OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS

OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS

OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS

F1

Figure 2.1.35

Blocked Busbar Protection Scheme 1

Figure 2.1.36 shows one half of a two-incomer station. A directional overcurrent relay protects the
incomer, with non-directional overcurrent units on the feeders.

46

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

GRD140
Directional
(IDMTL)
OC1/EF1/SEF1

Delayed Back-up Trip


Trip Bus Section and Bus Coupler

(50ms)
OC2/EF2/SEF2
(250ms)
OC3/EF3/SEF3

High Speed Block

Trip Incomer

Bus Section

Bus Coupler

Feeder Trip

GRD140
Non-directional

Feeder Trip

GRD140
Non-directional

OC1/EF1/SEF1

OC1/EF1/SEF1

OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS

OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS

Figure 2.1.36

Blocked Busbar Protection Scheme 2

For a fault on an outgoing feeder, the non-directional feeder protection sends a hardwired blocking
signal to inhibit operation of both incomers, the signal OCHS, EFHS and SEFHS being generated
by the instantaneous phase fault and earth fault pick-up outputs. Meanwhile, the feeder is tripped
by the OC1, EF1 and SEF1 elements, programmed with inverse time delays and set to grade with
downstream protections.
The incomer protection is programmed for directional operation such that it will only trip for
faults on the busbar side of its CTs. Hence, although a fault on the HV side may be back-fed from
the busbars, the relay does not trip.
For a fault in the busbar zone, the GRD140 is programmed to trip the bus section and bus coupler
circuit breakers via its instantaneous elements OC2, EF2 and SEF2 set with short definite time
delay settings (minimum 50ms). This first stage trip maintains operation of half the substation in
the event of a busbar fault or incomer fault in the other half.
If the first stage trip fails to clear the fault, a second stage trip is given to the local incomer circuit
breaker via instantaneous elements OC3, EF3 and SEF3 after a longer delay, thus isolating a fault
on the local busbar.
GRD140 integrated circuit breaker fail protection can be used to provide additional back-trips
from the feeder protection to the incomer, and from the incomer to the HV side of the power
transformer, in the event of the main trip failing to clear the fault.
A further development of this scheme might see directional relays being applied directly to the bus
section and bus coupler circuit breakers, to speed up operation of the scheme.
This scheme assumes that a busbar fault cannot be fed from the outgoing feeder circuits. In the
case of an interconnected system, where a remote power source may provide a back-feed into the
substation, directional relays must also be applied to protect the feeders.

47

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.4

Phase Undercurrent Protection


The phase undercurrent protection is used to detect a decrease in current caused by a loss of load,
typically motor load. Two stage undercurrent protection UC1 and UC2 are available.
The undercurrent element operates for current falling through the threshold level. But the
operation is blocked when the current falls below 4 % of CT secondary rating to discriminate the
loss of load from the feeder tripping by other protection. Figure 2.1.37 shows the undercurrent
element characteristic.
Setting value
Operating zone
0.04In
0

|I| UC1 setting

|I| UC2 setting

&

UC1

&

UC2

|I| 0.04In
In: rated current

Figure 2.1.37

Undercurrent Element Characteristic

Each phase has two independent undercurrent elements for tripping and alarming. The elements
are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The undercurrent element operates on a per phase basis, although tripping and alarming is threephase only.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.38 shows the scheme logic of the phase undercurrent protection.
The undercurrent elements UC1 and UC2 output UC1 TRIP and UC2 ALARM through delayed
pick-up timers TUC1 and TUC2.
This protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [UC1EN] and [UC2EN] or PLC signals UC1
BLOCK and UC2 BLOCK.
Further, this protection can be blocked when CT failure (CTF) is detected.

48

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

161

&

&

&

162

UC1 B

&

163

&

&

&

&

&

164

&

&

&

&

&

&

166

&

&

&

I
0.04In B
C

303

304

301

TUC2
0

306

307

308

0.00 - 300.00s

[UC2EN]

302

"ON"

165

UC2 B

TUC1
0

0.00 - 300.00s

[UC1EN]
+

305

UC1-A_TRIP
UC1-B_TRIP
UC1-C_TRIP
UC1_TRIP

UC2-A_ALARM
UC2-B_ALARM
UC2-C_ALARM
UC2_ALARM

"ON"

NON CTF
+

[CTF_UC1BLK]

&

&

1568 UC1_BLOCK

"OFF"

[CTF_UC2BLK]
"OFF"

In : Rated current

1569 UC2_BLOCK

Figure 2.1.38

Undercurrent Protection Scheme Logic

Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undercurrent protection and their
setting ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

UC1

0.5 10.0 A
(0.10 2.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

1.0 A
(0.20 A)

UC1 threshold setting

TUC1

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

UC1 definite time setting

UC2

0.5 10.0 A
(0.10 2.00 A)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

2.0 A
(0.40 A)

UC2 threshold setting

TUC2

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

UC2 definite time setting

[UC1EN]

Off / On

Off

UC1 Enable

[UC2EN]

Off / On

Off

UC2 Enable

[CTF-UC1BLK]

Off / On

Off

UC1 CTF block

[CTF-UC2BLK]

Off / On

Off

UC2 CTF block

(*) Current values shown in parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
the case of a 5 A rating.

49

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.5

Thermal Overload Protection


The temperature of electrical plant rises according to an I2t function and the thermal overload
protection in GRD140 provides a good protection against damage caused by sustained
overloading. The protection simulates the changing thermal state in the plant using a thermal
model.
The thermal state of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
=

t
I2
1 e 100%
2

I AOL

(1)

where:
= thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
= thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the
point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay
gives a trip output when = 100%.
The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates
according to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-8. (Refer to Appendix A for the
implementation of the thermal model for IEC60255-8.)
Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior to
the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from cold or from hot.
Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.
The characteristic of the thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for
cold and hot. The cold curve is a special case of the hot curve where prior load current Ip is
zero, catering for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.

I2
t =Ln 2 2
I I AOL

(2)

I2 I 2
t =Ln 2 2P
I I AOL

(3)

where:
t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)
I = overload current (largest phase current) (amps)
IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)
IP = previous load current (amps)
= thermal time constant (seconds)
Ln = natural logarithm
Figure 2.1.39 illustrates the IEC60255-8 curves for a range of time constant settings. The left-hand
chart shows the cold condition where an overload has been switched onto a previously un-loaded
system. The right-hand chart shows the hot condition where an overload is switched onto a

50

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity.
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve no prior load)

Thermal Curves (Hot Curve 90% prior load)

1000

1000

100

10

100
50

Operate Time (minutes)

Operate Time (minutes)

100

10

100

0.1

50

20

0.1

10

20
10
5
2
1

0.01

5
2

0.01

10

Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)

Figure 2.1.39

0.001
1

10

Overload Current (Multiple of


IAOL)

Thermal Curves

Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.40 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.
The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs
alarm signal THM_ALARM and trip signal THM_TRIP. The alarming threshold level is set as a
percentage of the tripping threshold.
The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAEN] and [THMEN]
respectively or PLC signals THMA_BLOCK and THM_BLOCK.
167

&

A
THM
T

309

&

168

&

310

&

THM_ALARM

THM_TRIP

[THMAEN]
+

"ON"
[THMEN]

"ON"

1573 THMA_BLOCK

1572 THM_BLOCK

Figure 2.1.40

Thermal Overload Protection Scheme Logic

51

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and their
setting ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

THM

2.0 10.0 A
(0.40 2.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

5.0 A
(1.00 A)

Thermal overload setting.


(THM = IAOL: allowable overload current)

THMIP

0.0 5.0 A
(0.00 1.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

0.0 A
(0.00 A)

Previous load current

TTHM

0.5 - 100.0 min

0.1 min

10.0 min

Thermal time constant

THMA

50 99 %

1%

80 %

Thermal alarm setting.


(Percentage of THM setting.)

[THMEN]

Off / On

Off

Thermal OL enable

[THMAEN]

Off / On

Off

Thermal alarm enable

(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current
values are in the case of a 5 A rating.

Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal
element, and is only active when testing ([THMRST] = ON).

52

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.6

Broken Conductor Protection


Series faults or open circuit faults which do not accompany any earth faults or phase faults are
caused by broken conductors, breaker contact failure, operation of fuses, or false operation of
single-phase switchgear.
Figure 2.1.41 shows the sequence network connection diagram in the case of a single-phase series
fault assuming that the positive, negative and zero sequence impedance of the left and right side
system of the fault location is in the ratio of k1 to (1 k1), k2 to (1 k2) and k0 to (1 k0).
Single-phase series fault

E1A

E1B

1 k1

k1
k1Z1

I1F

I1F

(1-k1)Z1

E1B

E
Positive phase sequence
k2Z2

I2F

I2F

(1-k2)Z2

I0F

(1-k0)Z0

Negative phase sequence


k0Z0

I0F

Zero phase sequence

I1F

k2Z2

(1-k2)Z2

K0Z0

(1-k0)Z0

k1Z1

I1F
(1-k1)Z1

E1A

E1B

I1F

Z2

Z1
Z0
E1A

E1B

Figure 2.1.41 Equivalent Circuit for a Single-phase Series Fault

Positive phase sequence current I1F, negative phase sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence

53

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
current I0F at the fault location for a single-phase series fault are given by:
I1F + I2F + I0F =0

(1)

Z2FI2F Z0FI0F = 0

(2)

E1A E1B = Z1FI1F Z2FI2F

(3)

where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From the equations (1), (2) and (3), the following equations are derived.
Z 2 + Z0
I1F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
Z0
I2F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
Z2
I0F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the overall system impedance, difference in phase
angle and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
Broken conductor protection element BCD detects series faults by measuring the ratio of negative
to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F). This ratio is given by the negative and zero sequence
impedance of the system:
Z0
I2F |I2F|
I1F = |I1F| = Z2 + Z0
The ratio is higher than 0.5 in a system when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. It will approach 1.0 in a high-impedance earthed or a one-end
earthed system.
The characteristic of the BCD element is shown in Figure 2.1.42 for stable operation.
I2
|I2|/|I1| BCD
setting
|I1| 0.04In
|I2| 0.01In
0.01In
0

I1

0.04In

Figure 2.1.42

In: rated current

BCD Element Characteristic

54

&

BCD

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.43 shows the scheme logic of the broken conductor protection. BCD element outputs
trip signals BCD TRIP through a delayed pick-up timer TBCD.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [BCDEN], [APPL] or PLC signal BCD
BLOCK. The scheme switch [APPL-CT] is available in Model 400 and 420 in which three-phase
or two-phase phase overcurrent protection can be selected. The broken conductor protection is
enabled when three-phase current is introduced and [APPL-CT] is set to 3P in those models.
TBCD
0
t

172

BCD

[BCD-2F]
+
&
ICD "Block"

&

313

BCD TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

[BCDEN]
+

"ON"
[APPL-CT]

"3P"

1574 BCD_BLOCK

Figure 2.1.43 Broken Conductor Protection Scheme Logic

Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the broken conductor protection and
their setting ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

BCD

0.10 1.00

0.01

0.20

I2 / I1

TBCD

0.00 300.00s

0.01s

0.00 s

BCD definite time setting

[BCDEN]

Off / On

Off

BCD Enable

[APPL-CT]

3P / 2P / 1P

3P

Three-phase current input. Only


required in Model 400 and 420.

Minimum setting of the BC threshold is restricted by the negative phase sequence current
normally present in the system. The ratio I2 / I1 of the system is measured in the relay continuously
and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel, along with the maximum value of
the last 15 minutes I21 max. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage.
The BCD setting should be 130 to 150% of I2 / I1 displayed.
Note: It must be noted that I2 / I1 is displayed only when the positive phase sequence current
(or load current ) in the secondary circuit is larger than 2 % of the rated secondary circuit
current.

TBCD should be set to more than 1 cycle to prevent unwanted operation caused by a transient
operation such as CB closing.

55

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.7

Breaker Failure Protection


When fault clearance fails due to a breaker failure, the breaker failure protection (BFP) clears the
fault by backtripping adjacent circuit breakers.
If the current continues to flow even after a trip command is output, the BFP judges it as a breaker
failure. The existence of the current is detected by an overcurrent element CBF provided for each
phase. For high-speed operation of the BFP, a high-speed reset overcurrent element (less than
20ms) is used. The CBF element resets when the current falls below 80% of the operating value as
shown in Figure 2.1.44.
Pick-up
Drop-off

Drop-off/Pick-up=0.8

Figure 2.1.44

CBF element Characteristic

In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and
thus tripping adjacent breakers, the BFP has the optional function of retripping the original
breaker. To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the original
breaker again before tripping the adjacent breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the adjacent
breakers following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use retripping
at all, or use retripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or retripping with trip
command plus overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.
An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also operate
correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.
Scheme logic
BFP initiation is performed on a per-phase basis. Figure 2.1.45 shows the scheme logic for the
BFP. The BFP is started by single phase reclose initiation signals CBF_INIT-A to CBF_INIT-C or
three-phase reclose initiation signal CBF_INIT. (These signals are assigned by the PLC default
setting). These signals must continuously exist as long as the fault is present.
The backtripping signal to the adjacent breakers CBF TRIP is output if the overcurrent element
CBF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBTC after initiation.
Tripping of adjacent breakers can be blocked with scheme switch [BTC].
There are two kinds of modes for the retrip signal to the original breaker CBF RETRIP, the mode
in which retrip is controlled by the overcurrent element CBF, and the direct trip mode in which
retrip is not controlled. The retrip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the
scheme switch [RTC]. In the scheme switch [RTC], DIR is the direct trip mode, and OC is the
trip mode controlled by the overcurrent element CBF.
Figure 2.1.46 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a retrip and backup trip are used. If the
circuit breaker trips normally, the CBF is reset before timer TRTC or TBTC is picked up and the
BFP is reset. As TRTC and TBTC start at the same time, the setting value of TBTC should include
that of TRTC.
If the CBF continues to operate, a retrip command is given to the original breaker after the setting
time of TRTC. Unless the breaker fails, the CBF is reset by retrip. TBTC does not time-out and the
BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated by mistake and

56

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
unnecessary tripping of the original breaker is unavoidable.
If the original breaker fails, retrip has no effect and the CBF continues operating and the TBTC
finally picks up. A trip command CBF TRIP is given to the adjacent breakers and the BFP is
completed.
The BFP protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [BTC] and [RTC] or the PLC signal
CBF BLOCK.
[BTC]
+

A
CBF B
C

"ON"

173

CBF_OP-A

&

174

&

322

319

320

321

CBF_OP-B

175

&

&

323

CBF_OP-C

&

&

324

318

CBF TRIP

TBTC

0.00 - 300.00s

314

CBF TRIP-A
CBF TRIP-B
CBF TRIP-C
CBF RETRIP

TRTC

&

&

315

316

317

0.00 - 300.00s

1660 CBF_INIT-A
1661 CBF_INIT-B
1662 CBF_INIT-C
Default setting
GEN._TRIP

&

1663 CBF_INIT

&

&

&

[RTC]
+

"OC"
"DIR"
[APPL-CT]

+
1570 CBF_BLOCK

"3P"

&

Figure 2.1.45

Breaker Failure Protection Scheme Logic

57

CBF RETRIP-A
CBF RETRIP-B
CBF RETRIP-C

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Fault

Start CBFP

Trip

Adjacent
breakers Closed

Open

TRIP
Retrip

Normal trip
Original
breakers Closed

Open

Open

Tcb
OCBF

Tcb
Toc
TBF1

Toc

TRTC
CBF
RETRIP
TBF2
TBTC

CBF
TRIP

Figure 2.1.46

Sequence Diagram

Setting
The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

CBF

0.5 10.0 A

0.1 A

2.5 A

Overcurrent setting

(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*)

(0.01 A)

(0.50 A)

TRTC

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

0.40 s

Retrip time setting

TBTC

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

0.50 s

Back trip time setting

[RTC]

Off / DIR / OC

Off

Retrip control

[BTC]

Off / On

Off

Back trip control

(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other
current values are in the case of 5 A rating.

The overcurrent element CBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has
disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200% of
the rated current.
The settings of TRTC and TBTC are determined by the opening time of the original circuit breaker
(Tcb in Figure 2.1.46) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2.1.46). The
timer setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.
Setting of TRTC = Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBTC = TCBF1 + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
CBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBTC can be the same as the setting of the TRTC.

58

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.8

Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush


GRD140 provides the following two schemes to prevent incorrect operation from a magnetising
inrush current during transformer energisation.
-

Protection block by inrush current detector

Cold load protection

2.1.8.1 Inrush Current Detector


Inrush current detector ICD detects second harmonic inrush current during transformer
energisation and blocks the following protections:
-

OC1 to OC4
EF1 to EF4
SEF1 to SEF4
NOC1 and NOC2
BCD

Blocking can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switches [OC-2F], [EF-2F],
[SEF-2F], [NOC-2F] and [BCD-2F].
The ICD detects the ratio ICD-2f between the second harmonic current I2f and fundamental
current I1f in each phase current, and operates if its ratio is larger than the setting value. Figure
2.1.47 shows the characteristic of the ICD element and Figure 2.1.48 shows the ICD block
scheme. When ICD operates, OC, EF, SEF, NOC and BCD elements are blocked independently.
The scheme logic of each element is shown in the previous sections.
I2f

ICD2f(%) = tan100

|I 1f |ICDOC

I 1f

ICDOC

Figure 2.1.47

A
ICD

|I 2f |/|I1f|ICD-2f(%)

B
C

ICD Element Characteristic

150

151
152

Figure 2.1.48

ICD Block Scheme

59

ICD

&

ICD

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the ICD and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

ICD-2f

10 50%

1%

15%

Second harmonic detection

ICDOC

0.5 25.0 A
(0.10 - 5.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

0.5 A
(0.10 A)

ICD threshold setting

(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values
are in the case of a 5 A rating.

2.1.8.2 Cold Load Protection


GRD140 provides cold load protection to prevent incorrect operation from a magnetising inrush
current during transformer energisation.
In normal operation, the load current on the distribution line is smaller than the sum of the rated
loads connected to the line. But it amounts to several times the maximum load current for a
moment when all of the loads are energised at once after a long interruption, and decreases to 1.5
times normal peak load after three or four seconds.
To protect those lines with an overcurrent element, it is necessary to use settings to discriminate
the inrush current in cold load restoration and the fault current.
This function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after closing on to the type
of load that takes a high level of load on energisation. This is achieved by a Cold Load Setting, in
which the user can program an alternative setting. Normally the user will choose higher current
settings within this setting.
A state transition diagram and its scheme logic are shown in Figure 2.1.49 and Figure 2.1.50 for
the cold load protection. Note that the scheme requires the use of two binary inputs assigned by
PLC function, one each for CB OPEN and CB CLOSED.
Under normal conditions, where the circuit breaker has been closed for some time, the scheme is in
STATE 0, and the normal default setting is applied to the overcurrent protection.
If the circuit breaker opens then the scheme moves to STATE 1 and runs the Cold Load Enable
timer TCLE. If the breaker closes again while the timer is running, then STATE 0 is re-entered.
Alternatively, if TCLE expires then the load is considered cold and the scheme moves to STATE
2, and stays there until the breaker closes, upon which it goes to STATE 3.
In STATE 2 and STATE 3, the Cold Load Setting is applied.
In STATE 3 the Cold Load Reset timer TCLR runs. If the circuit breaker re-opens while the timer
is running then the scheme returns to STATE 2. Alternatively, if TCLR expires then it goes to
STATE 0, the load is considered warm and normal settings can again be applied.
Accelerated reset of the cold load protection is also possible. In STATE 3, the phase currents are
monitored by overcurrent element ICLDO and if all phase currents drop below the ICLDO
threshold for longer than the cold load drop off time (TCLDO) then the scheme automatically
reverts to STATE 0. The accelerated reset function can be enabled with the scheme switch
[CLDOEN] setting.
Cold load protection can be disabled by setting [CLEN] to Off.
To test the cold load protection function, the switch [CLPTST] is provided to set the STATE 0 or
STATE 3 condition forcibly.

60

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

STATE 0
CB status: Closed
Settings Group: Normal
Monitor CB status

CB opens

CB closes
within
T CLE time

STATE 1
CB status: Open
Settings Group: Normal
Run T CLE timer
Monitor CB status

T CLE timer
expires

STATE 3

CB closes

STATE 2

CB status: Closed
Settings Group: Cold Load

CB status: Open
Settings Group: Cold Load
Monitor CB status

Figure 2.1.49

IL<ICLDO for
T CLDO time

T CLR timer
expires

CB opens within
CLR time

Run T CLR timer


Monitor CB status
Monitor load current IL

State Transition Diagram for Cold Load Protection

376

STATE 0

Change to
STATE 1

&
TCLE

377

STATE 1

&

Change to
STATE 2

Change to
STATE 0

0.0 - 10000.0s

&
378

STATE 2

379

STATE 3

&
TCLR

[CLEN]
+

"OFF"

&

1633 CB_N/O_CONT

CONSTANT 1

1634 CB_N/C_CONT

389

177

178

CB_CLOSE

1
1

390

CB_OPEN
TCLDO

176

ICLDO B

0.0 - 10000.0s

Default setting
BI2 COMMAND

Change to
STATE 3

&

&

0.00 - 100.00s

[CLDOEN]
+

"ON"

Figure 2.1.50

Scheme Logic for Cold Load Protection

61

[CLPTST] "S0"
+

"S3"

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the cold load protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

ICLDO

0.5 10.0 A
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

2.5 A
(0.50 A)

Cold load drop-off threshold setting

TCLE

0-10000 s

1s

100 s

Cold load enable timer

TCLR

0-10000 s

1s

100 s

Cold load reset timer

TCLDO

0.00-100.00 s

0.01 s

0.00 s

Cold load drop-off timer

[CLEN]

Off / On

Off

Cold load protection enable

[CLDOEN]

Off / On

Off

Cold load drop-off enable

(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values
are in the case of a 5 A rating.

Further, relay element settings (OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1 to SEF4, NOC1, NOC2 and
BCD) are required for the cold load protection (CLP) as follows:
Element
CLP-

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

OC1

0.1 25.0 A
(0.02 5.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

10.0 A
(2.00 A)

OC1 threshold setting in CLP mode

OC2

0.1 25.0 A
(0.02 5.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

25.0 A
(5.00 A)

OC2 threshold setting in CLP mode

OC3

0.1 250.0 A
(0.02 50.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

100.0 A
(20.00 A)

OC3 threshold setting in CLP mode

OC4

0.1 250.0 A
(0.02 50.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

200.0 A
(40.00 A)

OC4 threshold setting in CLP mode

EF1

0.1 25.0 A
(0.02 5.00 A)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

10.0 A
(2.00 A)

EF1 threshold setting in CLP mode

EF2

0.1 25.0 A
(0.02 5.00 A)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

25.0 A
(5.00 A)

EF2 threshold setting in CLP mode

EF3

0.1 250.0 A
(0.02 50.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

100.0 A
(20.00 A)

EF3 threshold setting in CLP mode

EF4

0.1 250.0 A
(0.02 50.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

200.0 A
(40.00 A)

EF4 threshold setting in CLP mode

SE1

0.01 1.00 A
(0.002 0.200 A)(*)

0.01 A
(0.001 A)

0.10 A
(0.020 A)

SEF1 threshold setting in CLP mode

SE2

0.01 1.00 A
(0.002 0.200 A)(*)

0.01 A
(0.001 A)

0.10 A
(0.020 A)

SEF2 threshold setting in CLP mode

SE3

0.01 1.00 A
(0.002 0.200 A)(*)

0.01 A
(0.001 A)

0.10 A
(0.020 A)

SEF3 threshold setting in CLP mode

SE4

0.01 1.00 A
(0.002 0.200 A)(*)

0.01 A
(0.001 A)

0.10 A
(0.020 A)

SEF4 threshold setting in CLP mode

NC1

0.5 10.0 A
(0.10 2.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

4.0 A
(0.80 A)

NOC1 threshold setting in CLP mode

NC2

0.5 10.0 A
(0.10 2.00 A)(*)

0.1 A
(0.01 A)

2.0 A
(0.40 A)

NOC2 threshold setting in CLP mode

BCD

0.10 1.00

0.01

0.40

BCD threshold setting in CLP mode

62

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.1.9

CT Requirements

2.1.9.1 Phase Fault and Earth Fault Protection


Protection class current transformers are normally specified in the form shown below. The CT
transforms primary current within the specified accuracy limit, for primary current up to the
overcurrent factor, when connected to a secondary circuit of the given burden.

5 P 20 : 10VA
Accuracy
Limit (%)

Overcurrent
Factor

Maximum Burden
(at rated current)

Accuracy limit : Typically 5 or 10%. In applications where current grading is to be applied and
small grading steps are desirable, then a 5% CT can assist in achieving the necessary accuracy. In
less onerous applications, a limit of 10% may be acceptable.
Overcurrent factor : The multiple of the CT rating up to which the accuracy limit is claimed,
typically 10 or 20 times. A value of 20 should be specified where maximum fault current is high
and accurate inverse time grading is required. In applications where fault current is relatively low,
or where inverse time grading is not used, then an overcurrent factor of 10 may be adequate.
Maximum burden : The total burden calculated at rated secondary current of all equipment
connected to the CT secondary, including relay input burden, lead burden, and taking the CTs
own secondary resistance into account. GRD140 has an extremely low AC current burden,
typically less than 0.1VA for a 1A phase input, allowing relatively low burden CTs to be applied.
Relay burden does not vary with settings.
If a burden lower than the maximum specified is connected, then the practical overcurrent factor
may be scaled accordingly. For the example given above, at a rated current of 1A, the maximum
value of CT secondary resistance plus secondary circuit resistance (RCT + R2) should be 10. If
a lower value of, say, (RCT + R2) = 5 is applied, then the practical overcurrent factor may be
increased by a factor of two, that is, to 40A.
In summary, the example given of a 5P20 CT of suitable rated burden will meet most applications
of high fault current and tight grading margins. Many less severe applications may be served by
5P10 or 10P10 transformers.
2.1.9.2

Minimum Knee Point Voltage

An alternative method of specifying a CT is to calculate the minimum knee point voltage,


according to the secondary current which will flow during fault conditions:
Vk If (RCT + R2)
where:
Vk = knee point voltage
If = maximum secondary fault current
RCT = resistance of CT secondary winding
R2 = secondary circuit resistance, including lead resistance.
When using this method, it should be noted that it is often not necessary to transform the
maximum fault current accurately. The knee point should be chosen with consideration of the
settings to be applied and the likely effect of any saturation on protection performance. Further,

63

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
care should be taken when determining R2, as this is dependent on the method used to connect the
CTs (E.g. residual connection, core balanced CT connection, etc).
2.1.9.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
A core balance CT should be applied, with a minimum knee point calculated as described above.
2.1.9.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
High accuracy CTs should be selected with a knee point voltage Vk chosen according to the
equation:
Vk 2 Vs
where Vs is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.

64

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

2.2

Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection


2.2.1

Phase Overvoltage Protection


GRD140 provides four independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable
dropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or
definite time (DT) operation. OV3 and OV4 have definite time characteristic only.
Figure 2.2.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.

Pickup
Dropoff

Figure 2.2.1

Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements

The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined by
equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

c
t (G ) TMS
a

V
1

Vs

(1)

where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.2.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.2.2, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [OVEN] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
curves are defined in Table 2.2.1.
Table 2.2.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves
Curve Description

IDMT

C (User Configurable)

0.000 30.000
by 0.001 step

0.00 5.00
by 0.01 step

0.000 5.000
by 0.001 step

The OV3 and OV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.

65

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.
Overvoltage Inverse Time
Curves
1000.000

Operating Time (secs)

100.000

10.000

TMS = 10
TMS = 5

TMS = 2
1.000

TMS = 1

0.100
1

1.5

2.5

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Figure 2.2.2

IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic
Figures 2.2.3 to 2.2.6 show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV4.
The OV1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.2.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to DT, and trip signal
OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time protection is
enabled by setting [OV1EN] to IDMT, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.
The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.2.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.

66

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Figure 2.2.5 and Figure 2.2.6 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection
OV3 and OV4. The OV3 and OV4 give trip and alarm signals OV3_TRIP and OV4_ALARM
through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3 and TOV4 respectively.
The OV1 to OV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV4EN] or the
PLC signals OV1_BLOCK to OV4_BLOCK respectively.

OV1 B

192

193

A
OV1 B
INST
C

TOV1

191

194

&

&

&

&

&

&

195

0.00 - 300.00s

332

333

1
334

OV1-A_TRIP
OV1-B_TRIP
OV1-C_TRIP

196

&

[OV1EN] "DT"

331

OV1_TRIP

1
&

+
"IDMT"
1584 OV1_BLOCK

&

Figure 2.2.3

OV2 B

198

199

A
OV2 B
INST
C

TOV2

197

OV1 Overvoltage Protection

512

&

&

&

&

&

&

513

0.00 - 300.00s

336

337

1
338

OV2-A_TRIP
OV2-B_TRIP

OV2-C_TRIP

514

&

[OV2EN] "DT"

335

OV2_TRIP

1
&

+
"IDMT"
1585 OV2_BLOCK

&

Figure 2.2.4

TOV3

515

OV3 B

515

515

OV2 Overvoltage Protection

[OV3EN]
+

&

&

432

&

&

433

&

&

434

0.00 - 300.00s
1586 OV3_BLOCK

Figure 2.2.5

OV3 Overvoltage Protection

67

OV3-A_TRIP
OV3-B_TRIP

OV3-C_TRIP

431

OV3_TRIP

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

TOV4

518

OV4 B

519

520

[OV4EN]
+

&

436

&

&

437

&

&

438

&

0.00 - 300.00s
1587 OV4_BLOCK

Figure 2.2.6

OV4-A_ALARM
OV4-B_ALARM

OV4-C_ALARM

435

OV4_ALARM

OV4 Overvoltage Protection

Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

OV1

10.0 200.0 V

0.1 V

120.0 V

OV1 threshold setting

TOV1M

0.05 100.00

0.01

1.00

OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.

TOV1

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.

TOV1R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

OV1 definite time delayed reset.

OV1DPR

10 98 %

1%

95 %

OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV2

10.0 200.0 V

0.1 V

140.0 V

OV2 threshold setting

TOV2M

0.05 100.00

0.01

1.00

OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.

TOV2

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.

TOV2R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

OV2 definite time delayed reset.

OV2DPR

10 98 %

1%

95 %

OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV3

10.0 200.0 V

0.1 V

140.0 V

OV3 threshold setting.

TOV3

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

OV3 definite time setting.

OV3DPR

10 - 98 %

1%

95 %

OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV4

10.0 200.0 V

0.1 V

140.0 V

OV4 threshold setting.

TOV4

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

OV4 definite time setting.

OV4DPR

10 - 98 %

1%

95 %

OV4 DO/PU ratio setting.

[OV1EN]

Off/DT/IDMT/C

Off

OV1 Enable

[OV2EN]

Off/DT/IDMT/C

Off

OV2 Enable

[OV3EN]

Off / On

Off

OV3 Enable

[OV4EN]

Off / On

Off

OV4 Enable

68

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.2.2

Phase Undervoltage Protection


GRD140 provides four independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are
programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 and UV4 have
definite time characteristic only.
Figure 2.2.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.

Figure 2.2.7

Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements

The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2)
following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

t (G ) TMS
1 V
Vs

(2)

where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = undervoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.2.8. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.2.8, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [UVEN] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
curves are defined in Table 2.2.1.
The UV3 and UV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without
causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising
voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has
travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

69

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Undervoltage Inverse Time


Curves
1000.000

Operating Time (secs)

100.000

TMS = 10
10.000
TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1
1.000
0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Figure 2.2.8

IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic
Figures 2.2.9 to 2.2.12 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV4.
The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.2.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to DT, and trip signal
UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is
enabled by setting [UV1EN] to IDMT, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.
The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.2.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.
Figure 2.2.11 and Figure 2.2.12 show the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage
protection UV3 and UV4. The UV3 and UV4 give trip and alarm signals UV3_TRIP and
UV4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3 and TUV4 respectively.
The UV1 to UV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV4EN] or the
PLC signals UV1_BLOCK to UV4_BLOCK respectively.
In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages
drop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV4 are prevented from operating. This function can be
blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to OFF (not used)
when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to ON (used) when used for load
shedding.
Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.

Further, these protection can be blocked when VT failure (VTF) is detected.

70

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
A
UV1

&

&

TUV1
0

&

&

&

&

201
202

203

204

UV1 B
INST
C

205

342

343

1
344

0.00 - 300.00s

UV1-A_TRIP
UV1-B_TRIP
UV1-C_TRIP

206

566

UVBLK B

567

568

UVBLK

217

&

&

NON
UVBLK

341

UV1_TRI
P

&

[VBLKEN]
+
"ON"
[UVTST]
+
"OFF"

&

[UV1EN]

"DT"

+
"IDMT"
NON VTF

[VTF UV1-BLK]
+

&

"OFF"
1

1588 UV1_BLOCK

Figure 2.2.9

A
UV2

UV1 Undervoltage Protection

&

&

TUV2
0

&

&

&

&

207
208

209

522

UV2 B
INST
C

523

NON
UVBLK

524

"DT"

[UV2EN]

347

1
348

0.00 - 300.00s

&
"IDMT"

NON VTF

[VTF UV2-BLK]
+

&

&

&

"OFF"

1589 UV2_BLOCK

Figure 2.2.10

TUV3

526

UV3 B

527

C
[UV3EN]
+

"ON"

&

&

440

&

&

441

&

&

442

0.00 - 300.00s

NON BLK
NON VTF

[VTF_UV3-BLK]
+

UV2 Undervoltage Protection

525

UV3-A_TRIP
UV3-B_TRIP

UV3-C_TRIP

439

UV3_TRIP

&

"OFF"

1590 UV3_BLOCK

Figure 2.2.11

UV3 Undervoltage Protection

71

346

345

UV2-A_TRIP
UV2-B_TRIP
UV2-C_TRIP

UV2_TRI
P

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TUV4

528

529

UV4 B

530

C
[UV4EN]
+

"ON"

&

&

444

&

&

445

&

&

446

0.00 - 300.00s

NON BLK
NON VTF

[VTF_UV4-BLK]
+

443

UV4-A_ALARM
UV4-B_ALARM

UV4-C_ALARM
UV4_ALARM

&

"OFF"

1591 UV4_BLOCK

Figure 2.2.12

UV4 Undervoltage Protection

Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

UV1

5.0 130.0 V

0.1 V

60.0 V

UV1 threshold setting

TUV1M

0.05 100.00

0.01

1.00

UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.

TUV1

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.

TUV1R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV2

5.0 130.0 V

0.1 V

40.0 V

UV1 threshold setting

TUV2M

0.05 100.00

0.01

1.00

UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.

TUV2

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.

TUV2R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV3

5.0 130.0 V

0.1 V

40.0 V

UV3 threshold setting.

TUV3

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

UV3 definite time setting.

UV4

5.0 130.0 V

0.1 V

40.0 V

UV4 threshold setting.

TUV4

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

UV4 definite time setting.

VBLK

5.0 - 20.0 V

0.1 V

10.0 V

Undervoltage block threshold setting.

[UV1EN]

Off/ DT/ IDMT/


C

DT

UV1 Enable

[VTF UV1BLK]

Off / On

Off

UV1 VTF block

[VBLKEN]

Off / On

Off

UV block Enable

[UV2EN]

Off/ DT/ IDMT/


C

DT

UV2 Enable

[VTF UV2BLK]

Off / On

Off

UV2 VTF block

[UV3EN]

Off / On

Off

UV3 Enable

[VTF UV3BLK]

Off / On

Off

UV3 VTF block

[UV4EN]

Off / On

Off

UV4 Enable

[VTF UV4BLK]

Off / On

Off

UV4 VTF block

72

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.2.3

Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection


The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZOV) is applied to earth fault detection on
unearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.
The ZOV is available for the following models and their [APPLVES] settings:
Model

110

[APPLVES] setting

Off

Ve

Vs

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

ZOV

400, 420

Note: (1); V0 is measured directly in the form of the system residual voltage.
(2); V0 is calculated from the three measured phase voltages.

The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZOV element susceptible to any 3rd
harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3rd harmonic
filter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.
For the earth fault detection, following two methods are in general use.
Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by VT residual connection (broken-delta
connection) as shown in Figure 2.2.13.
Measuring the residual voltage across the earthing transformers as shown in Figure 2.2.14.
A

GRD140
V0

Figure 2.2.13
A

Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System

V0

GRD140

Resistor

Figure 2.2.14

Earth Fault Detection on Generator

Two independent elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 are provided. These elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

73

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC
60255-127:

c
t (G ) TMS
a

V

1

Vs

(3)

where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),
V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.2.15. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.2.15, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN].
If required, set the scheme switch [ZOVEN] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
These curves are defined in Table 2.2.1.

ZOV Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000.000

Operating Time (secs)

100.000

10.000

1.000
T MS = 10
T MS = 5

T MS = 2

0.100
T MS = 1

0.010
0

10

15

20

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Figure 2.2.15

IDMT Characteristic for ZOV

74

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Definite time reset
A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is
identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.2.16 and 2.2.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage
protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 with independent
thresholds output trip signals ZOV1 TRIP and ZOV2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers
TZOV1 and TZOV2.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN] or PLC signals
ZOV1 BLOCK and ZOV2 BLOCK.
Further, this protection can be blocked when VT failure (VTF) is detected.
TZOV1

211

ZOV1

&

&

212

ZOV1
INST

351

ZOV1 TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"

[ZOV1EN]

1
&

+
"IDMT"

1592 ZOV1_BLOCK
NON VTF

[VTF_ZV1-BLK]
+

&

"OFF"

Figure 2.2.16

ZOV1 Overvoltage Protection


TZOV2

213

ZOV2

&

&

223

ZOV2
INST

0.00 - 300.00s

[ZOV2EN]

"DT"

1
&

+
"IDMT"
1593 ZOV2_BLOCK
NON VTF
[VTF_ZV2-BLK]
+

&
1

"OFF"

Figure 2.2.17

ZOV2 Overvoltage Protection

75

352

ZOV2_ALARM

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

ZOV1

1.0 - 130.0 V

0.1V

20.0 V

ZOV1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping.

TZOV1P

0.05 100.00

0.01

1.00

ZOV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZOV1EN]=IDMT.

TZOV1D

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

ZOV1 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV1EN]=DT.

TZOV1R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

ZOV1 definite time delayed reset.

ZOV2

1.0 - 130.0 V

0.1V

40.0 V

ZOV2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming.

TZOV2P

0.05 100.00

0.01

1.00

ZOV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZOV2EN]=IDMT.

TZOV2D

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

ZOV2 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV2EN]=DT.

TZOV2R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

ZOV2 definite time delayed reset.

[ZOV1EN]

Off /DT/ IDMT/


C

DT

ZOV1 Enable

[VTF ZV1BLK]

Off / On

Off

ZOV1 VTF block

[ZOV2EN]

Off / On

Off

ZOV2 Enable

[VTF ZV2BLK]

Off / On

Off

ZOV2 VTF block

76

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.2.4

Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection


The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection is used to detect voltage unbalance
conditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.
The NOV protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be
caused by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss can
lead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.
The NOV protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, if
the phase sequence is reversed.
Two independent elements NOV1 and NOV2 are provided. The elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC
60255-127.

c
t (G ) TMS
a

V
1

Vs

(4)

where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),
V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.2.18. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.2.18, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN].
If required, set the scheme switch [NOVEN] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
These curves are defined in Table 2.2.1.

77

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

NOV Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000.000

Operating Time (secs)

100.000

10.000

1.000

TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2

0.100
TMS = 1

0.010
0

10

15

20

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Figure 2.2.18

IDMT Characteristic for NOV

Definite time reset


A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NOV1 element when the inverse time delay is
used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.2.19 and 2.2.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection.
Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NOV1 and NOV2 with independent thresholds
output trip signals NOV1 TRIP and NOV2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNOV1 and
TNOV2.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN] or PLC signals
NOV1 BLOCK and NOV2 BLOCK.
Further, this protection can be blocked when VT failure (VTF) is detected.

78

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TNOV1

214

NOV1

&

&

353

215

NOV1
INST

NOV1 TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

[NOV1EN]

"DT"

1
&

+
"IDMT"

1596 NOV1_BLOCK
NON VTF

[VTF_NV1-BLK]
+

&

"OFF"

Figure 2.2.19

NOV1 Overvoltage Protection


TNOV2

216

NOV2

&

&

224

NOV2
INST

354

NOV2_ALARM

0.00 - 300.00s

[NOV2EN]

"DT"

1
&

+
"IDMT"
1597 NOV2_BLOCK

NON VTF

[VTF_NV2-BLK]
+

&

"OFF"

Figure 2.2.20

NOV2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
The delay time setting TNOV1 and TNOV2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring
elements NOV1 and NOV2. The minimum operating time of the NOV elements is around 200ms.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

NOV1

1.0 - 130.0 V

0.1V

20.0 V

NOV1 threshold setting for tripping.

TNOV1P

0.05 100.00

0.01

1.00

NOV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NOV1EN]=IDMT.

TNOV1D

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

NOV1 definite time setting. Required if [NOV1EN]=DT.

TNOV1R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

NOV1 definite time delayed reset.

NOV2

1.0 - 130.0 V

0.1V

40.0 V

NOV2 threshold setting for alarming.

TNOV2P

0.05 100.00

0.01

1.00

NOV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NOV2EN]=IDMT.

TNOV2D

0.00 300.00 s

0.01 s

1.00 s

NOV2 definite time setting. Required if [NOV2EN]=DT.

TNOV2R

0.0 300.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

NOV2 definite time delayed reset.

[NOV1EN]

Off /DT/ IDMT/ C

Off

NOV1 Enable

[NOV2EN]

Off / On

Off

NOV2 Enable

79

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

2.3

Frequency Protection
For a four-stage frequency protection, GRD140 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring
elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency,
overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.
Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generation
capability and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load
shedding.
Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damage
due to overfrequency conditions.

Frequency rate of change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly
when the frequency change is very rapid.
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.

2.3.1

Frequency element
Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting
value.
Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the setting
value.
These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5
ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive
times.
The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element
(FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.
Figure 2.3.1 shows characteristics of UF and OF elements.
Hz

OF

OF setting
UF setting

UF

0
FVBLK setting

Figure 2.3.1

Underfrequency and Overfrequency Element

Scheme Logic
Figure 2.3.2 shows the scheme logic for the frequency protection in stage 1. The frequency
element FRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the system voltage is higher
than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1). The FRQ1 element is
programmable for underfrequency or overfrequency operation by the scheme switch [FRQ1EN].
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [FRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal FRQ1
BLOCK.
The stage 2 (FRQ2) to stage 4 (FRQ4) are the same logic of FRQ1

80

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
TFRQ1

FRQ1

218

OF

&

&

&
FRQ2

&

&

&

&

FRQ4

&

359

&

FRQ4_TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

UF

FRQ3_TRIP

TFRQ4

221

&

358

0.00 - 300.00s

&
OF

&

UF

FRQ2_TRIP

TFRQ3

220

OF

357

0.00 - 300.00s

&
FRQ3

&

UF

FRQ1_TRIP

TFRQ2

219

OF

356

0.00 - 300.00s

UF

&

&
FRQBLK
[FRQ1EN]
+
[FRQ2EN]
+
[FRQ3EN]
+
[FRQ4EN]
+

222

NON FRQBLK

"OF"
"UF"

"OF"
"UF"

"OF"
"UF"

"OF"
"UF"

1600 FRQ1_BLOCK

1601 FRQ2_BLOCK

1602 FRQ3_BLOCK

1603 FRQ4_BLOCK

Figure 2.3.2

Scheme Logic for Frequency Protection

Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
FRQ1
TFRQ1
FRQ2
TFRQ2
FRQ3
TFRQ3
FRQ4
TFRQ4
FRQBLK
FRQ1EN
FRQ2EN
FRQ3EN
FRQ4EN

Range
-10.00 +10.00 Hz
0.00 300.00 s
-10.00 +10.00 Hz
0.00 300.00 s
-10.00 +10.00 Hz
0.00 300.00 s
-10.00 +10.00 Hz
0.00 300.00 s
40.0 100.0 V
Off / OF / UF
Off / OF / UF
Off / OF / UF
Off / OF / UF

Step
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.1 V

Default
-1.00 Hz
1.00 s
-1.00 Hz
1.00 s
-1.00 Hz
1.00 s
-1.00 Hz
1.00 s
40.0 V
Off
Off
Off
Off

81

Remarks
FRQ1 frequency element setting
Timer setting of FRQ1
FRQ2 frequency element setting
Timer setting of FRQ2
FRQ3 frequency element setting
Timer setting of FRQ3
FRQ4 frequency element setting
Timer setting of FRQ4
UV block setting
FRQ1 Enable
FRQ2 Enable
FRQ3 Enable
FRQ4 Enable

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.3.2

Frequency rate-of-change element


The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt). Each of
the two frequency stages in GRD140 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay
rate element (D) and a frequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in
frequency (f) over a time interval (t=100ms), as shown Figure 2.3.3 and calculate the f/t
every 5 ms. They operate when the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive
times.
Both D and R elements output is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation
during undervoltage condition.

Hz
f

t
sec

Figure 2.3.3

Frequency Rate-of-Change Element

Scheme Logic
Figure 2.3.4 shows the scheme logic of frequency rate-of-change protection in stage 1. The
frequency rate-of-change element DFRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the
system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1).
The DFRQ1 element is programmable for frequency decay rate or frequency rise rate operation by
the scheme switch [DFRQ1EN].
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [DFRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal DFRQ1
BLOCK.
The stage 2 (DFRQ2) to stage 4 (DFRQ4) are the same logic of DFRQ1.
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
DFRQ1
DFRQ2
DFRQ3
DFRQ4
FRQBLK
DFRQ1EN
DFRQ2EN
DFRQ3EN
DFRQ4EN

Range
0.1 15.0 Hz/s
0.1 15.0 Hz/s
0.1 15.0 Hz/s
0.1 15.0 Hz/s
40.0 100.0 V
Off / R / D
Off / R / D
Off / R / D
Off / R / D

Step
0.1 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
0.1 V

Default
0.5 Hz/s
0.5 Hz/s
0.5 Hz/s
0.5 Hz/s
40.0 V
Off
Off
Off
Off

82

Remarks
DFRQ1 element setting
DFRQ2 element setting
DFRQ3 element setting
DFRQ4 element setting
UV block setting
DFRQ1 Enable
DFRQ2 Enable
DFRQ3 Enable
DFRQ4 Enable

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

DFRQ1

225

&

360

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

DFRQ1_TRIP

&
DFRQ2

226

&

361

DFRQ2_TRIP

&

DFRQ3

227

&

362

DFRQ3_TRIP

DFRQ4

&
228

&

363

DFRQ4_TRIP

&
222

FRQBLK
[DFRQ1EN]
+
[DFRQ2EN]
+
[DFRQ3EN]
+
[DFRQ4EN]
+

NON FRQBLK

"R"
"D"

"R"
"D"

"R"
"D"

"R"
"D"

1576 DFRQ1_BLOCK

1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK

1578 DFRQ3_BLOCK

1579 DFRQ4_BLOCK

Figure 2.3.4

2.3.3

Scheme Logic of Frequency Rate-of-change Protection

Trip Circuit
The trip circuit of the frequency protection is configured with the combination of FRQ trip and
DFRQ trip. The trip circuit is configured by the PLC function as shown in Figure 2.3.5.
FRQ1 TRIP

1680 FRQ_S1_TRIP

DFRQ1 TRIP
FRQ2 TRIP
DFRQ2 TRIP
FRQ3 TRIP
DFRQ3 TRIP
FRQ4 TRIP
DFRQ4 TRIP

1681 FRQ_S2_TRIP

1682 FRQ_S3_TRIP

1683 FRQ_S4_TRIP

By PLC

2.3.5 Frequency Protection Trip circuit

83

355

FRQ_TRIP

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

2.4

Trip and Alarm Signal Output


GRD140 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip
and alarm for each protection. Figures 2.4.1 shows gathered trip and alarm signals for each
protection.
GRD140 provides 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.7. These
auxiliary relays can be assigned to any protection outputs by PLC function.
After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can
be programmed by PLC function. The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input by PLC signal. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by
monitoring the` status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker
tripping coil current.
OC1 TRIP
OC2 TRIP
OC3 TRIP

EF1 TRIP

EF2 TRIP
EF3 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
SEF2 TRIP

SEF3 TRIP
NOC1 TRIP
UC1 TRIP
THM TRIP

BCD TRIP
OV1 TRIP
OV2 TRIP
OV3 TRIP

UV1 TRIP
UV2 TRIP
UV3 TRIP
ZOV1 TRIP
NOV1 TRIP

2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs

84

371

GEN_TRIP

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
OC1-A TRIP
OC2-A TRIP

1
1

OC3-A TRIP

372

GEN_TRIP-A

UC1-A TRIP
OV1-A TRIP
OV2-A TRIP
OV3-A TRIP

UV1-A TRIP
UV2-A TRIP
UV3-A TRIP
OC1-B TRIP
OC2-B TRIP

1
1

OC3-B TRIP

373

GEN_TRIP-B

UC1-B TRIP
OV1-B TRIP
OV2-B TRIP
OV3-B TRIP

UV1-B TRIP
UV2-B TRIP
UV3-B TRIP
OC1-C TRIP
OC2-C TRIP

1
1

OC3-C TRIP

374

GEN_TRIP-C

UC1-C TRIP
OV1-C TRIP
OV2-C TRIP
OV3-C TRIP

UV1-C TRIP
UV2-C TRIP
UV3-C TRIP
EF1 TRIP
EF2 TRIP

EF3 TRIP
SEF1-S1_TRIP
SEF2_TRIP

375

SEF3_TRIP
ZOV1_TRIP

2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont'd)

85

GEN. TRIP-N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

FRQ1 TRIP

1680 FRQ_S1_TRIP

DFRQ1 TRIP
FRQ2 TRIP
DFRQ2 TRIP
FRQ3 TRIP
DFRQ3 TRIP
FRQ4 TRIP
DFRQ4 TRIP

1681 FRQ_S2_TRIP

1682 FRQ_S3_TRIP

1683 FRQ_S4_TRIP

355

FRQ_TRIP

By PLC

OC4 ALARM

EF4 ALARM

380

SEF4 ALARM

GEN_ALARM

NOC2 ALARM
UC2 ALARM

THM ALARM
OV4 ALARM

UV2 ALARM
ZOV2 ALARM
NOV2 ALARM

OC4-A ALARM

OV4-A ALARM
UV4-A ALARM

EF4 ALARM
SEF4 ALARM

UC2-C ALARM

UV4-C ALARM

GEN_ALARM-A

GEN_ALARM-B

OC4-C ALARM

OV4-C ALARM

382

UC2-B ALARM

UV4-B ALARM

OC4-B ALARM

OV4-B ALARM

381

UC2-A ALARM

383

GEN_ALARM-C

384

ZOV2 ALARM

2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (contd)

86

GEN_ALARM-N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

2.5

Autoreclose
The GRD140 provides a multi-shot (five shots) autoreclosing scheme applied for one-circuit
breaker:
Three phase autoreclosing scheme for all shots
Integrated synchronism check function for autoreclosing
Autoreclosing counter
The autoreclosing (ARC) can be initialized by OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1-S1 to SEF4 trip
signals or external trip signals via PLC signals EXT_, as determined by scheme switches
[-INIT]. Trip signals are selected to be used or not used for ARC, by setting [-INIT] to
On or NA respectively. If a trip signal is used to block ARC, then [-INIT] is set to
BLK. ARC can also be blocked by the PLC signal ARC_BLOCK.
Three-phase autoreclosing is provided for all shots, regardless of whether the fault is single-phase
or multi-phase. Autoreclosing can be programmed to provide any number of shots, from one to
five. In each case, if the first shot fails, then all subsequent shots apply three-phase tripping and
reclosing.
To disable autoreclosing, scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "Off".
The GRD140 also provides a manual close function. The manual close can be performed by
setting the PLC signal MANUAL_CLOSE.

2.5.1

Scheme Logic
Figure 2.5.1 shows the simplified scheme logic for the autoreclose. Autoreclose becomes ready
when the circuit breaker is closed and ready for autoreclose (CB READY=1), the on-delay timer
TRDY is picked up, and the [ARCEN] is set to "ON". TRDY is used to determine the reclaim time.
If the autoreclose is ready, then reclosing can be activated by the PLC signal ARC_INIT,
EXT_TRIP-A, EXT_TRIP-B, EXT_TRIP-C or EXT_TRIP, etc.
Auto-reclose condition such as voltage and synchronism check VCHK, etc., can be offered by
PLC signals ARC-S_COND.
Once autoreclose is activated, it is maintained by a flip-flop circuit until one reclosing cycle is
completed.
Autoreclose success (ARC SUCCESS) or fail (ARC FAIL) can be displayed as an event record
message by the event record setting.
Multi-shot autoreclose
Regardless of the tripping mode, three-phase reclose is performed. If the [ARCEN] is set to "On",
the dead time counter TD1 for three-phase reclosing is started. After the dead time has elapsed,
reclosing command ARC-SHOT is initiated.
Multi-shot autoreclose can be executed up to four times after the first-shot autoreclose fails. The
multi-shot mode, one to five shots, is set with the scheme switch [ARC-NUM].
During multi-shot reclosing, the dead time counter TD2 for the second shot is activated if the first
shot autoreclose is performed, but tripping occurs again. Second shot autoreclose is performed
after the period of time set on TD2 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1 =
1, SP2 = 0, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
Autoreclose is completed at this step if the two shots mode is selected for the multi-shot mode. In
this case, tripping following a "reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).

87

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
If three shot mode is selected for the multi-shot mode, autoreclose is further retried after the above
tripping occurs. At this time, the TD3 is started. The third shot autoreclose is performed after the
period of time set on the TD3 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1 = 0,
SP2 = 1, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
The three shot mode of autoreclose is then completed, and tripping following a
"reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
When four or five shot autoreclose is selected, autoreclose is further retried once again for tripping
that occurs after "reclose-onto-a-fault". This functions in the same manner as the three shot
autoreclose.
If a fault occurs under the following conditions, the final trip is performed and autoreclose is
blocked.
Reclosing block signal is applied.
During the reclaim time
Auto-reclose condition by PLC signals ARC-S_COND is not completed.
In the OC, EF and SE protections, each tripping is selected by setting [OC-TP], [EF-TP]
or [SE-TP] to any one of Inst(instantaneous trip), Set(delayed trip by T and [M]
setting) or Off(blocked). (See Section 2.3.)
PLC default setting
BI3 COMMAND

401

TRDY
t
0

1605 ARC_READY

&

&

0.0-600.0s

[ARCEN]
+
"ON"

ARC INIT (Trip command)

TP1

S
F/F
R
VCHK

402

ARC IN-PROG
&

ARC-S1
ARC-SHOT1

S
F/F
R

1648 ARC-S1_COND

TD1
t
0
0.01-300.00s

TR1
t
0

EXT TRIP

404
&

Coordination
ARC-FT

0.01-310.00s

Autoreclose initiation
&

ARC-S2
ARC-SHOT2
VCHK

S
F/F
R

TD2
t
0
0.01-300.00s

405
&
ARC-SHOT1

1649 ARC-S2_COND

TR2
t
0

ARC-SHOT2
ARC-SHOT3 1

ARC-FT

0.01-310.00s

&

ARC-S3
ARC-SHOT3
VCHK

S
F/F
R

1650 ARC-S3_COND

TD3
t
0
0.01-300.00s

TR3
t
0

ARC-SHOT4
406 ARC-SHOT5
&

ARC-FT

0.01-310.00s

&

ARC-S4
ARC-SHOT1

1
ARC-SUCCESS

VCHK

ARC FAIL

S
F/F
R

1651 ARC-S4_COND

TD4
t
0
0.01-300.00s

TR4
t
0

ARC-FT

407
&

ARC-FT

0.01-310.00s

Reset

TRSET
t
0

CB CLOSE

See Fig. 2.1.50.

TARCP
t
0

&

0.01-300.00s

&

ARC-S5
ARC-SHOT5

&
VCHK

S
F/F
R

1652 ARC-S5_COND

TD5
t
0
0.01-300.00s

0.1-600.0s

TR5
t
0

TRCOV
0
t

0.01-310.00s

0.1-600.0s

STEP COUNTER
SHOT NUM1
SP0
ARC-S1
CLK SP1
SHOT NUM2
1
ARC-S2
SHOT NUM3
SP2
ARC-S3
SHOT NUM4
SP3
ARC-S4
SHOT NUM5
SP4
ARC-S5
SP5
SHOT NUM6

408
&

ARC-FT

&

1607 MANUAL_CLOSE

Figure 2.5.1 Autoreclose Scheme Logic

88

TW
1

403
ARC-SHOT

0.01-10.00s

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Autoreclose initiation
PLC signal input ARC-READY(CB& 63condition: default setting) is alive and Reclaim time
TRDY has elapsed and Scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "On," then autoreclose initiation is
ready. The reclaim time is selected by setting [TRDY] to 0.0-600.0s.
Autoreclose initiation can consist of the following trips. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or
not is selected by setting [-INIT].
- OC1 to OC4 trip
- EF1 to EF4 trip
- SEF1 to SEF4 trip
Setting [-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
EXT_TRIP-(External autoreclose initiation) or ARC_INIT is autoreclose initiation by PLC
signal input. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or not is selected by setting [EXT-INIT].
Setting [EXT-INIT] = NA / On / Block
PLC default setting
BI3 COMMAND

1605 ARC_READY
[ARCEN]
+
"ON"
1628 EXT_TRIP-A
1629 EXT_TRIP-B
1630 EXT_TRIP-C

TRDY
t
0
0.0-600.0s

401
&

&

&

&

&

1631 EXT_TRIP

&

ARC initiation

TP1
1 cycle

-INIT = ON

1606 ARC_INIT
1608 ARC_NO_ACT

RS-ARCBLK
400
&

ARC_BLK_OR

&
[EXT-INIT]
+
BI4 COMMAND

1604 ARC_BLOCK

ON
BLK

&
-INIT = BLK

Figure 2.5.2 Autoreclose Initiation

Autoreclose shot output (ARC-SHOT)


The maximum number of autoreclosing shots is selected by setting [ARC-NUM].
Setting [ARC-NUM] = S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
The command output condition is passage of TD time and PLC signals ARC-S_COND. The
default setting of PLC signals ARC-S_COND is assigned to VCHK.
The passage of TD time(Dead timer) is selected on each shot number by setting [TD] to
0.01-300.00s.
The command output pulse(One shot) time is selected by setting [TW] to 0.01-10.00s.

89

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

&

TD1
t
0

F/F

ARCS1

0.01-300.00s

PLC default setting

ARC-SHOT1
&

ARC-SHOT1
&

VCHK

1648 ARC-S1_COND

TD2
t
0

ARC-SHOT5

VCHK

TD3
t
0

F/F

S3

1649 ARC-S2_COND
&

0.01-300.00s

TD4
t
0

ARC-SHOT3
&

1650 ARC-S3_COND

VCHK

&

F/F
0.01-300.00s

S4

ARC-SHOT
0.01-10.00s

0.01-300.00s

ARC-SHOT2
&

ARC-SHOT4

TW
1

&

F/F

S2

ARC-SHOT2 1
ARC-SHOT3

ARC-SHOT4

1651 ARC-S4_COND

VCHK

TD5
&

&

F/F
0.01-300.00s

S5

VCHK

ARC-SHOT5

1652 ARC-S5_COND

Figure 2.5.3 Autoreclosing requirement

Autoreclose success judgement (ARC-SUCCESS)


If a re-trip is not executed within a period of time after the output of the autoreclosing shot, it is
judged that the autoreclose was successful - Autoreclose success(ARC-SUCCESS).
The period of time is selected by setting [TSUC] to 0.1-600.0s.
Final trip judgement (ARC-FT)
The following cases are judged ARC-FT(Final Trip) and autoreclose is reset without autoreclose
output.
Autoreclose initiation when autoreclose initiation is not ready
Autoreclose initiation after the final shot output of the setting for the multi-shot mode
Autoreclose block signal
- Autoreclose block signal by PLC input
- OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1 to SEF 4 trip and external trip of setting autoreclose block
are active.
Setting [-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
PLC signal ARC-S_COND is not completed. FT is performed after Timer [TR*].
Reset
If CB CLOSE(CB close condition) signal is alive and the CB is closed within a period of time after
autoreclose initiation, autoreclose is forcibly reset.
The period of time is selected by setting [TRSET] to 0.01-300.00s.
It is assumed that the CB is not open(=CBF), in spite of the trip output(=autoreclose initiation).

90

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
RS-ARCBLK

&

CB CLOSE

TRSET
t
0

&

ARC_RESET

0.01-300.00s

ARC_IN-PROG

Figure 2.5.4 Reset

Manual close function (MANUAL CLOSE)


MANUAL CLOSE is able to close the CB via a PLC signal input.
Autoreclose initiation is not active within a period of time after the manual close command output.
The period of time is selected by setting [TARCP] to 0.1-600.0s.
In the case of a final trip judgement, the manual close command output is blocked within a period
of time. The period of time is selected by setting [TRCOV] to 0.1-600.0s.
ARC-FT
TARCP
t
0
0.1-600.0s

TRCOV
0
t

ARC_SHOT

&

0.1-600.0s

1579 MANUAL_CLOSE

Figure 2.5.5 Manual input function

2.5.2

Voltage and synchronism check


There are four voltage modes, as shown below when all three phases of the circuit breaker are
open. The voltage and synchronism check is applicable to voltage modes 1 to 3 and controls the
energising process of the lines and busbars in the three-phase autoreclose mode.
Voltage Mode

Busbar voltage (VB)

live

live

dead

dead

Line voltage (VL)

live

dead

live

dead

The synchronism check is performed for voltage mode 1 while the voltage check is performed for
voltage modes 2 and 3.
The mode 4 is used for manual closing.

91

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
[VCHK]

"OFF"
"LD"
"DL"
"DD"

OVB

&

UVB

536

OVL

533

SYN

532

414

VCHK_LBDL

&
1

415

VCHK_DBLL

&

416

VCHK_DBDL

&

413

VCHK_SYN

0.01 - 10.00S
TDBDL

&
535

0.01 - 10.00S
TDBLL

&

UVL

" S"

TLBDL

534

412

VCHK

0.01 - 10.00S

TSYN
t

0.01 10.00S

Figure 2.5.6 Energising Control Scheme

Figure 2.5.6 shows the energising control scheme. The voltage and synchronism check output
signal VCHK is generated when the following conditions have been established;
Synchronism check element SYN operates and on-delay timer TSYN is picked up.
Busbar overvoltage detector OVB and line undervoltage detector UVL operate, and
on-delay timer TLBDL is picked up. (This detects live bus and dead line condition.)
Busbar undervoltage detector UVB and line overvoltage detector OVL operate, and
on-delay timer TDBLL is picked up. (This detects dead bus and live line condition.)
Using the scheme switch [VCHK], the energising direction can be selected.
Setting of [VCHK]

Energising control

LD

Reclosed under "live bus and dead line" condition or with synchronism check

DL

Reclosed under "dead bus and live line" condition or with synchronism check

DD

Reclosed under "dead bus and dead line" condition

SY

Reclosed with synchronism check only.

OFF

Reclosed without voltage and synchronism check.

When [VCHK] is set to "LD", the line is energised in the direction from the busbar to line under
"live bus and dead line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to "DL", the line is energised in the
direction from the line to busbar under "dead bus and live line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to
"DD", the line is under "dead bus and dead line" condition.
When a synchronism check output exists, autoreclose is executed regardless of the scheme switch
position.
When [VCHK] is set to "S", a three-phase autoreclose is performed with the synchronism check
only.
When [VCHK] is set to "OFF", three-phase autoreclose is performed without voltage and
synchronism check.

92

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The voltage and synchronism check requires a single-phase voltage from the busbar and the line.
Additionally, it is not necessary to fix the phase of the reference voltage.
To match the busbar voltage and line voltage for the voltage and synchronism check option
mentioned above, the GRD140 has the following three switches and VT ratio settings as shown in
Figure 2.5.7.
[VTPHSEL]: This switch is used to match the voltage phases. If the A-phase voltage or
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used as a reference voltage, "A" is selected.
[VT-RATE]: This switch is used to match the magnitude and phase angle. "PH-G" is
selected when the reference voltage is a single-phase voltage while "PH-PH" is
selected when it is a phase-to-phase voltage.
[3PH-VT]:

"Bus"; - The three phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are Busbar voltage (VB).
- The reference voltage (Ves) is Line voltage(VL).
"Line"; - The three phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are Line voltage (VL).
- The reference voltage (Ves) is Busbar voltage(VB).

Three phase
voltages

Reference
voltage

Va
Vb

Voltage check
&
Synchronism check

Vc
Ves
[VTPHSEL]
+
+
+

"A"
"B"
"C"
[VT - RATE]

+
+

"PH-PH"
"PH-G"
[3PH - VT]

+
+

"Bus"
"Line"

Figure 2.5.7 Matching of Busbar Voltage and Line Voltage

Characteristics of OVL, UVL, OVB, UVB, and SYN


The voltage check and synchronism check elements are used for autoreclose.
The output of the voltage check element is used to check whether the line voltage (VL) and busbar
voltage (VB) are dead or live. The voltage check element has undervoltage detectors UVL and
UVB, and overvoltage detectors OVL and OVB for the line voltage and busbar voltage check. The
under voltage detector checks that the line or busbar is dead while the overvoltage detector checks
that it is live. These detectors function in the same manner as other level detectors described later.
Figure 2.5.8 shows the voltage and synchronism check zone.

93

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
VLLine voltage
(Incoming voltage)
Dead bus and
live line

Live bus and


live line

OVL

A, C, D: Voltage check
B: Synchronism check
Dead bus and
dead line

Live bus and


dead line

UVL

C
0V

D
UVB

VB Busbar voltage
(Runningvoltage)

OVB

Figure 2.5.8 Voltage and Synchronism Check Zone

The synchronism check element SYN is composed of the following check functions:
-

SYN(SYN): checks the phase angle difference between the line voltage (incoming
voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)

SYNUV/OV: check the line voltage and the busbar voltage

SYNV(SYNDV): checks the voltage difference between the line voltage (incoming
voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)

SYNf(SYNDf): checks the frequency difference between the line voltage (incoming
voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)

The SYN is configured by these detectors as shown in Figure 2.5.9. The SYNf can be disabled by
the scheme switch [DfEN].
SYN

&
SYNUV/OV

&

SYN
OUTPUT

SYNV
SYNf

+ "Off"

[DfEN]

"On"

Figure 2.5.9 Block diagram of SYN1

Figure 2.5.10 shows the characteristics of the synchronism check element used for the autoreclose
if the line and busbar are live.
The synchronism check element operates if both the voltage difference and phase angle difference
are within their setting values.

94

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

S = SYN setting
VL
s

VB

SYNOV
SYNUV

Figure 2.5.10 Synchronism Check

For the element SYN, the voltage difference is checked by the following equations.
SYNOV VB SYNUV
SYNOV VL SYNUV
V = |VL VB| Vs
where,
Vs = Voltage difference setting
VB = busbar voltage
VL = line voltage
SYNOV = lower voltage setting
SYNUV = upper voltage setting
V = Voltage difference
The frequency difference is checked by the following equations.
f = |fVL1 fVB| fs
where,
fVB = frequency of VB
fVL = frequency of VL
f = frequency difference
fs= frequency difference setting
The phase difference is checked by the following equations.
VB VL cos 0
VB VL sin (SYNS) VB VL sin
where,
= phase difference between VB and VL
SYNs = phase difference setting
Note:

The relay can directly detect a slip cycle (frequency difference f) if f is not used.
When the phase difference setting SYNs and the synchronism check time setting
TSYN are given a detected maximum slip cycle is determined using the following
equation:
f=

SYNs
180TSYN

95

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
where,
f = slip cycle
SYNs = phase difference setting (degree)
TSYN = setting of synchronism check timer TSYN (second)

2.5.3

Sequence Coordination
When two or more relays protect the same feeder their sequences (trip shot number) must be
coordinated. Considering the diagram as shown in Figure 2.5.11, relays A and B protect the same
feeder and both are programmed for 2 instantaneous and 2 IDMT trips. Both relays A and B see
the permanent fault at Fault F, and relays operate with instantaneous protection for 1st trip (at
SHOT NUM1) and 2nd trip (at SHOT NUM2).
3rd trip (at SHOT NUM3) is delayed, and the relays have different IDMT settings, so that relay B
only operates. Relay A does not trip and autoreclose, and judges the autoreclose succeeded. It
reclaims and returns to the beginning of its autoreclose cycle (= SHOT NUM1). Next, though the
relay B will attempt the delayed 4th trip (at SHOT NUM4), then mal-instantaneous trip will be
done by the relay A. In this case, the sequence co-ordination function is applied and the trip shot
number is coordinated as shown in Figure 2.5.12. The trip shot number is coordinated by the
operation of OC, EF or SEF element. The sensitivity (OC, EF or SEF) and the scheme switch
([COORD-OC], [COORD-EF] or [COORD-SE]) are set (See Section 2.5.4).
A

A:GRD140

B:GRD140

Figure 2.5.11

Fault F

Relay Location

Co-ordination disabled:
1st trip 2nd trip
(Inst)
(Inst)

No trip & judged ARC succeed


1st trip (Inst): mal-operate

Relay A

1st trip 2nd trip 3rd trip


(Inst)
(Inst)
(IDMT)

No trip

Relay B

Co-ordination enabled:

1st trip 2nd trip


(Inst)
(Inst)

No trip

No trip

Relay A

1st trip 2nd trip 3rd trip


(IDMT)
(Inst)
(Inst)

4th trip
(IDMT)

Relay B

Figure 2.5.12

Sequence Coordination Function

96

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2.5.4

Setting
The setting elements necessary for the autoreclose and their setting ranges are shown in the table
below.

Element
ARC
TRDY
TD1
TR1
TD2
TR2
TD3
TR3
TD4
TR4
TD5
TR5
TW
TSUC
TRCOV
TARCP
TRSET
OVB
UVB
OVL
UVL
SYNUV
SYNOV
SYNDV
SYN
SYNDf
TSYN
TLBDL
TDBLL
TDBDL
[ARCEN]
[ARC-NUM]
[VCHK]
[DfEN]
[VTPHSEL]
[VT-RATE]
[3PH-VT]
[OC1-INIT]
[OC1-TP1]
[OC1-TP2]
[OC1-TP3]
[OC1-TP4]
[OC1-TP5]
[OC1-TP6]
[OC2-INIT]
[OC2-TP1]

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

0.0 600.0 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 10.00 s
0.1 600.0 s
0.1 600.0 s
0.1 600.0 s
0.01 300.00 s
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
0 - 150 V
5 - 75
0.01 2.00 Hz
0.01 - 10.00 s
0.01 - 10.00 s
0.01 - 10.00 s
0.01 - 10.00 s
Off/On
S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
Off/LD/DL/DD/S
Off/On
A/B/C
PH-G / PH-PH
Bus / Line
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET

0.1 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.01 s
1V
1V
1V
1V
1V
1V
1V
1
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s

60.0 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
2.00 s
3.0 s
10.0 s
10.0 s
3.00 s
51 V
13 V
51 V
13 V
83 V
51 V
150 V
30
1.00 Hz
1.00 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
On
S1
Off
Off
A
PH-G
Line
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET

Reclaim time
1st shot dead time
1st shot reset time
2nd shot dead time
2nd shot reset time
3rd shot dead time
3rd shot reset time
4th shot dead time
4th shot reset time
5th shot dead time
5th shot reset time
Output pulse time
Autoreclose succeed judgement time
Autoreclose recovery time after final trip
Autoreclose pause time after manually closing
Autoreclose reset time
Live bus check
Dead bus check
Live line check
Dead line check
UV element of synchronism check
OV element of synchronism check
Voltage difference for SYN
Synchronism check (phase angle difference)
Frequency difference check for SYN
Synchronism check time (Live-bus & Live-line)
Voltage check time (Live-bus & Dead-line)
Voltage check time (dead-bus & Live-line)
Voltage check time (Dead-bus & Dead-line)
Autoreclose enable
Autoreclosing shot number
Autoreclosing voltage check
Frequency difference checking enable
VT phase selection
VT rating
3-phase VT location
Autoreclose initiation by OC1
OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
OC1 trip mode of 5th trip
OC1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC2
OC2 trip mode of 1st trip

97

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Element
[OC2-TP2]
[OC2-TP3]
[OC2-TP4]
[OC2-TP5]
[OC2-TP6]
[OC3-INIT]
[OC3-TP1]
[OC3-TP2]
[OC3-TP3]
[OC3-TP4]
[OC3-TP5]
[OC3-TP6]
[OC4-INIT]
[OC4-TP1]
[OC4-TP2]
[OC4-TP3]
[OC4-TP4]
[OC4-TP5]
[OC4-TP6]
[EF1-INIT]
[EF1-TP1]
[EF1-TP2]
[EF1-TP3]
[EF1-TP4]
[EF1-TP5]
[EF1-TP6]
[EF2-INIT]
[EF2-TP1]
[EF2-TP2]
[EF2-TP3]
[EF2-TP4]
[EF2-TP5]
[EF2-TP6]
[EF3-INIT]
[EF3-TP1]
[EF3-TP2]
[EF3-TP3]
[EF3-TP4]
[EF3-TP5]
[EF3-TP6]
[EF4-INIT]
[EF4-TP1]
[EF4-TP2]
[EF4-TP3]
[EF4-TP4]
[EF4-TP5]
[EF4-TP6]
[SE1-INIT]
[SE1-TP1]
[SE1-TP2]
[SE1-TP3]

Range
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET

Step

Default
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET

98

Remarks
OC2 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC2 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC2 trip mode of 4th trip
OC2 trip mode of 5th trip
OC2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC3
OC3 trip mode of 1st trip
OC3 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC3 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC3 trip mode of 4th trip
OC3 trip mode of 5th trip
OC3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC4
OC4 trip mode of 1st trip
OC4 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC4 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC4 trip mode of 4th trip
OC4 trip mode of 5th trip
OC4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF1
EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
EF1 trip mode of 5th trip
EF1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF2
EF2 trip mode of 1st trip
EF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF2 trip mode of 4th trip
EF2 trip mode of 5th trip
EF2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF3
EF3 trip mode of 1st trip
EF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF3 trip mode of 4th trip
EF3 trip mode of 5th trip
EF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF4
EF4 trip mode of 1st trip
EF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF4 trip mode of 4th trip
EF4 trip mode of 5th trip
EF4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE1
SE1 trip mode of 1st trip
SE1 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE1 trip mode of 3rd trip

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Element
[SE1-TP4]
[SE1-TP5]
[SE1-TP6]
[SE2-INIT]
[SE2-TP1]
[SE2-TP2]
[SE2-TP3]
[SE2-TP4]
[SE2-TP5]
[SE2-TP6]
[SE3-INIT]
[SE3-TP1]
[SE3-TP2]
[SE3-TP3]
[SE3-TP4]
[SE3-TP5]
[SE3-TP6]
[SE4-INIT]
[SE4-TP1]
[SE4-TP2]
[SE4-TP3]
[SE4-TP4]
[SE4-TP5]
[SE4-TP6]
[EXT-INIT]
[COORD-OC]
[COORD-EF]
[COORD-SE]
OC-CO

Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE1 trip mode of 4th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE1 trip mode of 5th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE1 trip mode of 6th trip
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
Autoreclose initiation by SE2
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE2 trip mode of 1st trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE2 trip mode of 2nd trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE2 trip mode of 3rd trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE2 trip mode of 4th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE2 trip mode of 5th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE2 trip mode of 6th trip
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
Autoreclose initiation by SE3
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE3 trip mode of 1st trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE3 trip mode of 2nd trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE3 trip mode of 3rd trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE3 trip mode of 4th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE3 trip mode of 5th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE3 trip mode of 6th trip
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
Autoreclose initiation by SE4
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE4 trip mode of 1st trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE4 trip mode of 2nd trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE4 trip mode of 3rd trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE4 trip mode of 4th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE4 trip mode of 5th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE4 trip mode of 6th trip
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
Autoreclose initiation by external trip command
Off/On
Off
OC-CO relay for Co-ordination
Off/On
Off
EF-CO relay for Co-ordination
Off/On
Off
SEF-CO relay for Co-ordination
0.1 A
5.0 A
OC-CO for co-ordination
0.1 250.0 A
(0.01 A)
(1.00 A)
(0.02 50.00 A) (*)
EF-CO
0.1
A
1.5 A
EF-CO for co-ordination
0.1 250.0 A
(0.01 A)
(0.30 A)
(0.02 50.00 A)
SEF-CO
0.01 A
0.050 A
SEF-CO for co-ordination
0.01 1.00 A
(0.01 A)
(0.010 A)
(0.002 0.200 A)
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
the case of a 5 A rating.

To determine the dead time, it is essential to find an optimal value while taking factors,
de-ionization time and power system stability, into consideration which normally contradict each
other.
Normally, a longer de-ionization time is required as for a higher line voltage or larger fault current.
For three-phase autoreclose, the dead time is generally 15 to 30 cycles.

99

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

3. Technical Description
3.1

Hardware Description
3.1.1

Outline of Hardware Modules


The case outline of GRD140 is shown in Appendix F.
The hardware structure of GRD140 is shown in Figure 3.1.1.
The GRD140 relay unit consists of the following hardware modules. These modules are fixed in a
frame and cannot be taken off individually. The human machine interface module is provided with
the front panel.
Power module (POWD)
Signal processing module (SPMD)
Human machine interface module (HMI)
The hardware block diagram of GRD140 is shown in Figure 3.1.2.

SPMD

POWD
HMI
IN SERVI CE
TR IP
ALARM

VIEW

RESET

Handle for relay


withdrawal

0V CAN
CEL ENTER
END

Figure 3.1.1 Hardware Structure without Case

100

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

DC
supply
Binary
input

AC input
I, V

POWD

ETH
Ethernet LAN I/F
1 or 2

SPMD2

DC/DC
Converter
Photo-coupler
5 or 8

CT 4
(Max)
VT x 4
(Max)

Analogue
filter

Multiplexer

A/D
converter

MPU

RAM

ROM

Remote PC

RS485 or
Optical fibre
port 1

Remote PC

Auxiliary relay
8

Binary output
(Trip
command etc.)

IRIG-B port

External
clock

Human machine
Interface (HMI)
Liquid crystal display
16 characters 2 lines
Operation keys

LEDs
Local
personal
computer

Monitoring
jacks

RS232C
I/F

(a) Models 110D, 400D and 420D

DC
supply
Binary
input

AC input

POWD

ETH
Ethernet LAN I/F
1

SPMD3

DC/DC
Converter
Photo-coupler
8

CT 4
(Max)
VT x 4

Analogue
filter

Multiplexer

A/D
converter

MPU

Remote PC

RS485 or
Optical fibre
port 1

Remote PC

Auxiliary relay
11

Binary output
(Trip
command etc.)

(Max)
RAM

ROM

IRIG-B port

Human machine
Interface (HMI)
Liquid crystal display
16 characters 2 lines
LEDs
Local
personal
computer

RS232C
I/F

Operation keys
Monitoring
jacks

(b) Models 401D and 421D

Figure 3.1.2 Hardware Block Diagram

101

External
clock

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
POWD Module
The POWD module insulates between the internal and external circuits through an auxiliary
transformer and transforms the magnitude of AC input signals to suit the electronic circuits. The
AC input signals may be one to three phase currents and a residual current depending on the relay
model.
This module incorporates max. 4 auxiliary CTs and max. 4 VTs, DC/DC converter and 5 or 8
photo-coupler circuits for binary input signals.
The available input voltage ratings of the DC/DC converter are, 48V, 110V/125V or 220/250V.
The normal range of input voltage is 20% to 20%.
SPMD Module (SPMD2 or SPMD3)
The SPMD module consists of analogue filter, multiplexer, analogue to digital (A/D) converter,
main processing unit (MPU), random access memory (RAM) and read only memory (ROM) and
executes all kinds of processing such as protection, measurement, recording and display.
The analogue filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current signals.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 12 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies of
2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).
RS485, fibre optic and/or Ethernet LAN serial ports are provided for communication to a remote
PC, and IRIG-B port also can be provided for external clock. Ethernet LAN ports are mounted on
ETH sub-module.
Auxiliary relays for binary output signals are provided.
The SPMD2 module is used for models 110D, 400D and 420D, and incorporates 8 auxiliary relays
(BO1-BO7 and FAIL) for binary output signals. Auxiliary relays BO1 to BO6 are user
configurable output signals and have one normally open and one normally closed contact. BO7 is
also a user-configurable output signal and has one normally open contact. (Refer to Appendix G.)
The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally open and one normally closed contacts, and operates
when a relay failure or abnormality in the DC circuit is detected.
The SPMD3 module is used for models 401D and 421D, and incorporates 7 auxiliary relays
(BO1-BO6 and FAIL) and 4 high-speed auxiliary relays (HBO1- HBO4) for binary output signals.
BO1 to BO6 and HBO1 to HBO4 are user configurable output signals and have one normally open
contact. (Refer to Appendix G.) The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally open and one
normally closed contacts, and operates when a relay failure or abnormality in the DC circuit is
detected.
Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module
The operator can access the GRD140 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown
in Figure 3.1.3, the HMI panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),
view and reset keys, operation keys, monitoring jacks and an RS232C connector on the front
panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 2 rows with a back-light and displays recording, status and
setting data.
There are a total of 9 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

102

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Label

Color

Remarks

IN SERVICE

Green

Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in Test menu.

TRIP

Red

Lit when a trip command is issued.

ALARM

Red

Lit when a failure is detected.

(LED1)

Yellow

(LED2)

Yellow

(LED3)

Yellow

(LED4)

Yellow

(LED5)

Yellow

(LED6)

Yellow

LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed
for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses
of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as Virtual LEDs. For the setting, see Section
4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.
The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by user, either
by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
Remote Reset operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by an output of alarm element
such as OC4 ALARM, EF4 ALARM, etc..
The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The RESET key
clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the
settings or change the settings.
The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the
test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by
selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and setting it in the window and the
signals can be transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For the "Signal List", see
Appendix C.)
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection. This
connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.

103

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Screw for cover

Liquid crystal
display
IN SERVICE
TRIP
ALARM

Light emitting
diodes (LED)

VIEW

RESET

Operation keys
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Monitoring Jacks

RS232C connector

0V CAN
CEL ENTER
END

Screw for handle

To a local PC
Screw for cover

Figure 3.1.3 Front Panel

104

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

3.2

Input and Output Signals


3.2.1

AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRD140 model and their respective
input terminal numbers. Model 40 and 42 depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals
[APPLCT] setting

Term. No.

TB1
1-2
TB1
3-4
TB1
5-6
TB1
7-8

VT setting

3P

2P

1P (Model 110)

[APPLVT]=On
setting

[APPLVES]
=Ve setting

[APPLVES]
=Vs setting

A phase
current Ia

A phase
current Ia

---

---

---

---

B phase
current Ib

C phase
current Ic

---

---

---

---

---

C phase
current Ic

Residual
current Ie

Residual current
Ie

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Zero sequence
Residual
current Ise(*1)
current Ie
or
Zero sequence
current Ise(*1)

Model 110

Zero sequence
current Ise(*1)

TB2
A1-B2
TB2
B1-B2
TB2
A2-B2

---

---

---

A phase voltage
Va

---

---

---

---

---

B phase voltage
Vb

---

---

---

---

---

C phase voltage
Vc

---

---

TB2
A3-B3

---

---

---

---

Residual
voltage Ve

Reference
voltage Vs for
synchronism
check (*2)

Residual
voltage Ve

(*1):

Ise required for SEF elements. In the model 42 and [APPL-CT]=3P, the residual current is
calculated by Ia , Ib and Ic.
(*2): Residual voltage Ve or Reference voltage Vs for synchronism check can be applied.

3.2.2

Binary Input Signals


The GRD140 provides eight programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is
programmable by PLC function, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion.
The binary input circuit of the GRD140 is provided with a logic level inversion function and a
pick-up and drop-off delay timer function as shown in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary
switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows the
inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving contact
meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to Norm (normal). If not, then Inv
(inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s
respectively.

105

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Logic level inversion function, and pick-up and drop-off delay timer settings are as follow:
Element

Contents

Range

Step

Default

BI1SNS - BI8SNS

Binary switch

Norm/ Inv

BI1PUD - BI8PUD

Delayed pick-up timer

0.00 - 300.00s

0.01s

0.00

BI1DOD - BI8DOD

Delayed drop-off timer

0.00 - 300.00s

0.01s

0.00

Norm

The operating voltage of binary input signal is typical 74V DC at 110V/125V DC rating and 138V
DC at 220/250V DC. The minimum operating voltage is 70V DC at 110/125V DC rating and
125V DC at 220/250V DC.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between eight settings groups. Change of
active setting group is performed by PLC (Signal No. 2640 to 2647).
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16
characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI8 by setting.
Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
These alarm output signals are signal Nos. 2560 to 2563.
GRD140

(+) ()
BI1

1284

BI1PUD

BI1DOD

BI1

[BI1SNS]
"Norm"
"Inv"

BI2

1285

BI2PUD

BI2DOD

BI2

[BI2SNS]

769

"Norm"
"Inv"

BI8

768

1291

BI8PUD

BI8DOD

[BI8SNS]
775

BI8

"Norm"
"Inv"

0V

Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion

3.2.3

Binary Output Signals


The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix F. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
GRD140-110D, -400D and -420D provide 8 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary
relay FAIL for relay fail output and seven programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO7. BO1 to
BO7 can be programmed.
GRD140-401D and 421D provide 4 high-speed auxiliary relays HBO1 to HBO4 and provides 6
auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for relay fail output and seven
programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO6. HBO1 to HBO4 and BO1 to BO6 can be

106

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
programmed.
The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The
setting is respective for each output relay.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relays BOs and
HBOs individually or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND
circuit or OR circuit with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.2. The output circuit can be
configured according to the setting menu. Appendix H shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO (HBO) has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous
drop-off Inst, for delayed drop-off Dl, for dwell operation Dw or for latching operation
Latch by the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off Dl or dwell operation
Dw can be set by TBO. When Dw selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input
signal does not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues more, the BO output is
continuous for the input signal time.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit
is detected.
Signal List
&
Appendix B

Auxiliary relay

6 GATES

or
1

1
6 GATES
&
TBO
&

[RESET]

"Dw"

0.00 10.00s

"Dl"

&

"Lat"

S
F/F
R

Reset button

By PLC
768
1639 IND.RESET
BI1_COMMAND

Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output

Settings

The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
[RESET]

Range
Inst Dl / Dw /Lat

Step

Default
See Appendix C

TBO

0.00 10.00s

0.01s

See Appendix C

107

Remarks
Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3.2.4

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function


GRD140 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logic on binary
signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc. can be
produced by using the PC software PLC tool and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs and the initiation trigger of fault records and disturbance records are
programmed using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or for
using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For PLC tool, refer to the PLC
tool instruction manual.

Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen for PLC Tool

108

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

3.3

Automatic Supervision
3.3.1

Basic Concept of Supervision


Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it waits for a
power system fault to occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal
operation, plays an important role. The GRD140 implements an automatic supervision function,
based on the following concepts:
The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
When a failure occurs, it is recorded as Alarm record, the user should be able to easily identify
the location of the failure.

3.3.2

Relay Monitoring
The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health
of the AC input circuit is verified.
CT circuit current monitoring for [APPL-CT] = 3P setting

Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) 4 Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) k0


where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 20% of rated current
Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL-VT]= ON setting

|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3 6.35 (V)


Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL-VT]= ON setting

|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3 6.35 (V)


where, a = Phase shifter of 120, a2 = Phase shifter of 240
The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred
in the AC input circuit. This monitoring can be disabled by the scheme switch [CTSVEN].
The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detection
of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits. These monitoring can be disabled by the
scheme switches [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] respectively.
The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the
voltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connected
with the incorrect phase sequence.
A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)


converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and

109

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring

Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are performed to
verify that memory circuits are healthy:
Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
Setting value monitoring:

Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in


duplicate.

Watchdog Timer

A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the
software is running normally.
DC Supply Monitoring

The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored, and is checked to see
that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.

3.3.3

CT Failure Supervision
This function is available for [APPL-CT] = 3P setting only.
Figure 3.3.1 shows the scheme logic of the CT failure supervision (CTFS). If the residual
overcurrent element EFF(EFCF) operates and the residual overvoltage element ZOVF(ZOVCF)
does not operate, CT failure (CTF) is detected. When the CTFS detects a CTF, it can alarm and
block various protections as EF, NOC and UC protections etc.
The CTF signal is reset 100 ms after the CT failure condition has reset. When the CTF continues
for 10s or more, Err: CTF is displayed in LCD message.
If the PLC signal CTF_BLOCK is received, this function is blocked. If the PLC signal EXT_CTF
is received, the CT failure (CTF) is output independently of this CTF function.
This function can be enabled or disabled by the scheme switch [CTFEN] and has a programmable
reset characteristic. For latching operation, set to ON, and for automatic reset after recovery, set
to OPT-ON.
231

EFCF

&

ZOVCF

232

&
&

&

0.015s

0.1s

1
"OPT-ON"

A.M.F. ON
1616 CTF_BLOCK

1
t

10s

CB CLOSE

CB NON BLK

0.2s

1620 EXT_CTF

Figure 3.3.1

CT Failure Supervision

110

385

[CTFEN] "ON"

&

CTF
NON CTF
CTF_ALM

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3.3.4

VT Failure Supervision
This function is available for [APPL-VT] = ON settings.
When a fault occurs in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer (VT), the voltage
dependent measuring elements may operate incorrectly. GRD140 incorporates a VT failure
supervision function (VTFS) as a measure against such incorrect operation. When the VTFS
detects a VT failure, it can alarm and block the following voltage dependent protections by a
binary input.
Directional overcurrent protection
Directional earth fault protection
Directional sensitive earth fault protection
Directional negative overcurrent protection
Undervoltage protection
Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection
Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection

A binary input signal (external VTF) to indicate a miniature circuit breaker trip in the VT circuits
is also available for the VTFS.
Scheme logic

Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic for the VTFS. VT failure is detected by the following two
schemes.
VTF1: The residual overcurrent element EFF(EFVF) does not operate (EFF=0), the residual
overvoltage element ZOVF(ZOVVF) operates (ZOVF=1) and the phase current
change detection element OCDF(OCDVF) does not operate (OCDF=0).
VTF2: The phase undervoltage element UVF(UVVF) operates (UVF=1) when the three
phases of the circuit breaker are closed (CB CLOSE=1) and the phase current change
detection element OCDF(OCDVF) does not operate (OCDF=0).
In order to prevent detection of false VT failures due to unequal pole closing of the circuit breaker,
the VTFS is blocked for 200 ms after line energization.
The VTF signal is reset 100 ms after the VT failure condition has reset. When the VTF continues
for 10s or more, Err: VTF1 or Err: VTF2 is displayed in LCD message.
If the PLC signal VTF_BLOCK is received, this function is blocked. If the PLC signal EXT_VTF
is received, the VT failure (VTF) is output independently of this VTF function.
This function can be enabled or disabled by the scheme switch [VTF1EN] or [VTF2EN] and has a
programmable reset characteristic. For latching operation, set to ON, and for automatic reset
after recovery, set to OPT-ON.

111

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
t

A
UVF

234

235

A
OCDF B
C

239

VTF1 ALM

10s

236

&

387

&

237
238

[VTF1EN]

233

240

0.1s

S
F/F
R

&

"ON"
"OPT-ON"

0.015s

&

&
1

1
1

&
1

EFVF

&

&

0.015s

[VTF2EN]

&

"ON"

388

&

386

VTF
NON VTF

VTF2 ALM

10s

241
242

NON VTF1

0.1s

CB CLOSE
ZOVVF

VTF1

VTF2
NON VTF2

0.1s

"OPT-ON"

CB NON BLK
A.M.F. ON
1617 VTF_BLOCK

1634 EXT_VTF

Figure 3.3.2

3.3.5

VT Failure Supervision

Trip Circuit Supervision


The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by a binary input. Figure 3.3.3 shows
a typical scheme. A binary input BIn is assigned to No.1632:TC_FAIL signal by PLC. When the
trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the binary input and the trip circuit. Then
logic signal of the binary input circuit BIn is "1".
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets and
the BIn output is "0". A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is output when the BIn output is "0".
If the trip circuit failure is detected, then ALARM LED is lit and Err: TC is displayed in LCD
message.
The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON". When
"OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB is closed.
(+)

Trip circuit supervision


BIn

Trip
output

1632 TC_FAIL
CB CLOSE
[TCSPEN]

CB trip coil

Figure 3.3.3

"OPT-ON"

1
&

&
0.4s
1

"ON"

Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme Logic

112

1270

TCSV

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3.3.6

Circuit Breaker Monitoring


The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of circuit breaker (CB). If two
binary inputs are programmed to the functions CB_N/O_CONT and CB_N/C_CONT, then the
CB state monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances these inputs are in opposite
states. Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state during five seconds, then
a CB state alarm CBSV operates and Err:CB and CB err are displayed in LCD message and
event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
1633 CB_N/O_CONT

=1

&

1271

CBSV

5.0s
1634 CB_N/C_CONT
[CBSMEN]

"ON"

Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic

Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and
BIn respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are assigned to CB_N/O_CONT and
CB_N/C_CONT by PLC.
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

Periodic maintenance of CB is required for checking of the trip circuit, the operation mechanism
and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of
fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for
maintenance of CB:
Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism. The trip
counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and
informs user of time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].

The counter can be initiated by PLC signals TP_COUNT and TP_COUNT-. The default
setting is the TP_COUNT is assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.
Sum of the broken current quantity Iy is counted for monitoring the interrupting capability of
CB. The Iy counter increments the value of current to the power y, recorded at the time of
issue of the tripping signal, on a phase by phase basis. For oil circuit breakers, the dielectric
withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of I2t, and maintenance such as oil
changes, etc., may be required. I is the fault current broken by CB. t is the arcing time
within the interrupter tank and it cannot be determined accurately. Therefore, y is normally
set to 2 to monitor the broken current squared. For other circuit breaker types, especially those
for HV systems, y may be set lower, typically 1.0. An alarm is issued when the count for any
phase exceeds a user-defined setting IyALM. This feature is not available in GRD140-110.
The Iy count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [IyAEN].

The counter can be initiated by PLC signals SGM_IY_A to SGM_IY_C. The default setting is
the SGM_IY_A to SGM_IY_C are assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.

113

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks CB
operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is informed if the CB operation is
slow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the
phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase
exceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified
interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the
scheme switch [OPTAEN].

The CB operating time monitoring can be initiated by PLC signals OT_ALARM_A to


OT_ALARM_C. The default setting is the OT_ALARM_A to OT_ALARM_C are assigned to
the GEN_TRIP signal.
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturers instructions.

3.3.7

PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring


If there is a failure in PLC data or IEC61850 mapping data, the function may be prevented.
Therefore, PLC data and IEC61850 mapping data are monitored and the respective alarms "PLC
stop" and "MAP stop" are issued if a failure is detected.

3.3.8

IEC61850 Communication Monitoring


The sending and receiving functions on the Ethernet LAN communication are monitored. The
receiving function is executed by checking GOOSE message receiving status, and the sending
function is executed by checking a Ping response to the other party. If a failure is detected, an
alarm of "GOOSE stop" or "Ping err" is issued.
These functions are disabled by setting the scheme switches [GSECHK] and [PINGCHK].

3.3.9

Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and
alarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the VIEW key. The event record messages
are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.

The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.


The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The AC
input imbalance monitoring alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switches
[CTSVEN], [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] to "OFF". The setting is used to block unnecessary alarms
during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.

114

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms


Supervision Item

LCD Message

LED
"IN
SERVICE"

LED
"ALARM"

External
alarm

Alarm record Message

AC input imbalance
monitoring

Err:CT, Err:V0,
Err:V2 (1)

On/Off (2)

On

(4)

CT err, V0 err, V2 err,


Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)

A/D accuracy check

Err:A/D

Off

On

(4)

Relay fail

Memory monitoring

Err:SUM, Err:RAM,
Err:BRAM, Err:EEP

Off

On

(4)

Relay fail

----

Off

On

(4)

----

DC supply monitoring

Err:DC

Off

(3)

Off

Relay fail-A

Trip circuit supervision

Err:TC

On

On

Off

TC err, Relay fail-A

CB state monitoring

Err:CB

On

On

Off

CB err, Relay fail-A

ALM:TP COUNT

On

On

Off

TP COUNT ALM,
Relay fail-A

ALM: OP time

On

On

Off

OP time ALM, Relay fail-A

Iy count alarm

ALM:IY

On

On

Off

IY-A ALM, IY-B ALM or


IY-C ALM, Relay fail-A

CT failure supervision

Err:CTF

On

On

Off

CTF err, Relay fail-A

VT failure supervision

Err:VTF1, Err:VTF2

On

On

Off

VTF1 err, VTF2 err,


Relay fail-A

PLC data or IEC61850


mapping data monitoring

Err: PLC, Err: MAP

On

On

(4)

Relay fail-A

GOOSE message check

Err: GOOSE

On

On

(4)

Relay fail-A

Err: Ping

On

On

(4)

Relay fail-A

Watchdog Timer

CB condition monitoring
Trip count alarm
Operating time alarm

Ping response check

(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [CTSVEN], [V0SVEN] or [V2SVEN] is set to "ALM"
and off when set to "ALM & BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is
recorded when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.

The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is
shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.

3.3.8

Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long
as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
A/D accuracy check
Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer

When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switches [CTSVEN],
[V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an
alarm is output, or if only an alarm is output.

115

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3.3.9

Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the
table below.
Element
CTF supervision
EFF

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

0.1 - 25.0 A
( 0.02 - 5.00 A
5.0 130.0 V

0.1 A
0.01 A
0.1 V

1.0 A
0.20 A) (*)
20.0 V

Residual overcurrent threshold setting

0.1 V

51.0 V

Undervoltage threshold setting


Phase current change detection

[CTFEN]
[VTF1EN]
[VTF2EN]
[CTSVEN]
[V0SVEN]
[V2SVEN]
[TCSPEN]
[CBSMEN]

5.0 130.0 V
0.5 A (Fixed)
( 0.1 A (Fixed) )
Off/On/OPT-On
Off/On/OPT-On
Off/On/OPT-On
Off/ALM&BLK/ALM
Off/ALM&BLK/ALM
Off/ALM&BLK/ALM
Off/On/OPT-On
Off/On

Off
Off
Off
ALM
ALM
ALM
Off
Off

CTF supervision
VTF1 supervision
VTF2 supervision
AC input imbalance monitoring (current)
AC input imbalance monitoring (Vo)
AC input imbalance monitoring (V2)
Trip circuit supervision
CB condition supervision

[TCAEN]

OFF/ON

OFF

Trip count alarm

[IyAEN]

OFF/ON

OFF

Iy count alarm

[OPTAEN]

OFF/ON

OFF

Operate time alarm

TCALM

1 - 10000

10000

Trip count alarm threshold setting

IyALM

10 10000 E6

E6

10000

Iy alarm threshold setting

YVALUE

1.0 2.0

0.1

2.0

y value setting

OPTALM

100 5000 ms

10 ms

1000 ms

Operate time alarm threshold setting

ZOVF
VTF supervision
UVF
OCDF

Residual overvoltage threshold setting

(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other current values are in
the case of 5 A rating.

When setting the ZOVF and EFF, the maximum detection sensitivity of each element should be
set with a margin of 15 to 20% taking account of variations in the system voltage, the asymmetry
of the primary system and CT and VT error.

116

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

3.4

Recording Function
The GRD140 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
Counters
These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on the local or remote
PC.

3.4.1

Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRD140 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Operating phase
Fault location
Relevant events
Power system quantities
User configurable initiation
User can configure four fault record triggers (Signal No.:2624 to 2627) by PLC. Any of input
signals as shown in Appendix B is assigned to these fault record trigger signals.
Up to the 8 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence

This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using
the relay internal clock.
Trip mode

This shows the protection scheme such as OC1, EF1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.
Operating phase

This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.


Fault location

The distance to the fault point calculated by the fault locator is recorded.
The distance is expressed in km and as a percentage (%) of the line length.
Relevant events

Such events as autoreclose, re-tripping following the reclose-on-to-a fault or autoreclose are
recorded with time-tags.
Power system quantities

The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded.
-

Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)

117

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

3.4.2

Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)

Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)

Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of
the system residual voltage or of reference voltage for synchronism check (Ves)

Magnitude and phase angle of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)

Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component current (I1, I2, I0)

Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from residual circuit (Ie)

Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from core balance CT (Ise) for model 110
and 420 series

Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%) only recorded at post-fault

Frequency (f)

Event Recording
The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. Up to
1024 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 1024 records have been stored, the
oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
The user can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event
items can be assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to On
(only recording On transitions) or On/Off(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by
setting. The On/Off mode events are specified by Bi-trigger events setting. If the Bi-trigger
events is set to 100, No.1 to 100 events are On/Off mode and No.101 to 128 events are On
mode.
The name of an event can be set by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters can be set, but the LCD
displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11 characters are set. The
set name can be viewed on the Set.(view) screen.
The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.
The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix G.

3.4.3

Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

BITRN

0 - 128

100

Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events

EV1 EV128

0 - 3071

Assign the signal number

Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when the overcurrent starter element operates or a tripping
command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is started when a start command by the PLC
is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers (Signal No.:2632 to 2635) by
PLC.
The records include maximum 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals and
the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix C can be
assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.

118

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording


Model

Model 110

APPL setting
APPLCT = 1P
CT

APPLCT = 2P

Ie(I0), Ise(I0)

APPLCT = 3P

VT

APPLVT = ON,
APPLVES = Off

Model 400

Model 420

I0

Ie(I0), Ise(I0)

Ia, Ic, Ie(I0)

Ia, Ic, Ie(I0), Ise(I0)

Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie(I0)

Ia, Ib, Ic, Ise(I0)

Va, Vb, Vc

Va, Vb, Vc

Va, Vb, Vc, Ves

Va, Vb, Vc, Ves

Ve(V0)

APPLVT = On,
APPLVES = Ve or Vs

The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1
and 5.0s.
The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate
relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in
Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time

0.1s

1.0s

2.0s

3.0s

3.5s

4.0s

4.5s

5.0s

50Hz

40

14

60Hz

38

11

119

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Settings

The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

Time

0.1-5.0 s

0.1 s

2.0

Post-fault recording time

OC

0.1-250.0 A

0.1 A

10.0 A

Overcurrent detection

(0.02-50.00 A

0.01 A

2.00 A) (*)

0.1-125.0 A

0.1 A

3.0 A

(0.02-25.00 A

0.01 A

0.60A)

0.01-1.00 A

0.01 A

1.00 A

(0.002-0.200 A

0.001 A

0.200 A)

0.5-10.0 A

0.1 A

2.0 A

(0.10-2.00 A

0.01 A

0.40 A)

OV

10.0-200.0 V

0.1 V

120.0 V

Overvoltage detection

UV

1.0-130.0 V

0.1 V

60.0 V

Undervoltage detection

ZOV

1.0-130.0 V

0.1 V

20.0 V

Zero sequence overvoltage detection

NOV

1.0-130.0 V

0.1 V

20.0 V

Negative sequence overvoltage detection

EF
SEF
NOC

Earth fault detection


Sensitive earth fault detection
Negative sequence overcurrent detection

(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are for the case of a 1A rating. Other current values are
for the case of a 5A rating.

Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.
Element

Range

[Trip]

Step

Default

Remarks

OFF/ON

ON

Start by tripping command

[OC]

OFF/ON

ON

Start by OC operation

[EF]

OFF/ON

ON

Start by EF operation

[SEF]

OFF/ON

ON

Start by SEF operation

[NC]

OFF/ON

ON

Start by NC operation

[OV]

OFF/ON

ON

Start by OV operation

[UV]

OFF/ON

ON

Start by UV operation

[ZOV]

OFF/ON

ON

Start by ZOV operation

[NOV]

OFF/ON

ON

Start by NOV operation

120

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

3.5

Metering Function
The GRD140 measures current and demand values of phase currents, phase and phase-to-phase
voltages, residual current, residual voltage, symmetrical component currents and voltages,
frequency, power factor, active and reactive power, and apparent power. The measurement data
shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
Current: The following quantities are measured and updated every second.
-

Magnitude and phase angle of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)

Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from residual circuit (Ie)

Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from core balance CT (Ise) for model 110
and 42 series
Magnitude of positive, negative and zero sequence currents (I1, I2, I0)

The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)

Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)

Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)

Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of
the system residual voltage, or of reference voltage for synchronism check (Ves)

Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)

Active power (P)


Reactive power (Q)
Apparent power (S)
Power factor (PF)
Frequency (f)
Frequency rate of change(df(df/dt))
Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
Direction of each current (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie, Ise, I2)

Demand
-

Maximum and minimum of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc: max, min)

Maximum and minimum of zero sequence voltage (V0: max, min)

Maximum and minimum of the system residual voltage or the reference voltage for
synchronism check (Ves: max, min)

Maximum of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic: max.)

Maximum of zero sequence current from residual circuit (Ie: max)

Maximum of zero sequence current from core balance CT (Ise: max) for model 110 and 42 series
Maximum of negative sequence current (I2: max.)

Maximum of the ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1(I21): max)

Maximum of active power (P: max.)


Maximum of reactive power (Q: max.)
Maximum of apparent power (S: max.)
Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)

The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well.

121

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7.
In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averaged
over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average values
are shown on the display screen.
The displayed quantities depend on [APPLCT] and [APPLVT] settings and relay model as shown
in Table 3.5.1. Input current and voltage greater than 0.01In(rated current) and 0.06V at the
secondary side are required for the measurement.
Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle,
where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).
The signing of active and reactive power flow direction can be set positive for either power
sending or power receiving. The signing of reactive power can be also set positive for either
lagging phase or leading phase.
Table 3.5.1
Model
APPL
Setting
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ie
Ise
I1
I2
I0
I2/I1
THM
Va
Vb
Vc
Ves
Vab
Vbc
Vca
V1
V2
V0
f
df
PF
P
Q
S

110

Displayed Quantity

400, 401
1P
---

APPLCT
2P

3P

------

----

-----

420, 421
APPLVT
On
Off

---
-------------

1P
---

------

-----

APPLCT
2P

----

3P

APPLVT
On
Off

(Note) : Measured
--: Not measured (The item is indicated, but the quantity value is indicated as 0.)
Blank Space: The item is not indicated.

122

---
-------------

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

3.6

Fault locator
3.6.1

Application
The fault locator incorporated in the GRD140 measures the distance to fault on the protected line
using local voltages and currents. The measurement result is expressed as a percentage (%) of the
line length and the distance (km) and is displayed on the LCD on the relay front panel. It is also
output to a local PC or RSM (relay setting and monitoring) system.
To measure the distance to fault, the fault locator requires minimum 3 cycles as fault duration
time.
In distance to fault calculations, the change in the current before and after the fault has occurred is
used as a reference current, alleviating influences of the load current and arc voltage. As a result,
the location error is a maximum of 2.5 km for faults at a distance of up to 100 km, and a
maximum of 2.5% for faults at a distance between 100 km and 250 km.
The fault locator is available for [APPLCT]= "3P" and [APPLVT]= "ON" setting.
The fault locator cannot correctly measure the distance to fault during a power swing.

3.6.2

Distance to Fault Calculation


The distance to fault x1 is calculated from equation (1) and (2) using the voltage and current of the
fault phase and a current change before and after the fault occurrence. The current change before
and after the fault occurrence represented by I" and I" is used as the reference current. The
impedance imbalance compensation factor is used to maintain high measuring accuracy even
when the impedance of each phase has great variations.
Distance calculation for phase fault (in the case of BC-phase fault)

Im(Vbc I") L
x 1 = {I (R I I") + R (X I I")} K
m 1 bc
e 1 bc
bc

(1)

where,
Vbc = fault voltage between faulted phases = Vb Vc
Ibc = fault current between faulted phases = Ib Ic
I" = change of fault current before and after fault occurrence = (Ib-Ic) (ILb-ILc)
ILb, ILc = load current
R1 = resistance component of line positive sequence impedance
X1 = reactance component of line positive sequence impedance
Kbc = impedance imbalance compensation factor
Im( ) = imaginary part in parentheses
Re( ) = real part in parentheses
L = line length (km)

123

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Distance calculation for earth fault (in the case of A-phase earth fault)
x1=

Im(Va I") L

{Im(R1 I I" + R0 I0S I") + Re(X1 I I" + X0 I0S I")} Ka

(2)

where,
Va = fault voltage
I = fault current = (2Ia Ib Ic)/3
I" = change of fault current before and after fault occurrence
=

2Ia Ib Ic 2ILa ILb ILc

3
3

Ia, Ib, Ic = fault current


ILa, ILb, ILc = load current
I0s = zero sequence current
R1 = resistance component of line positive sequence impedance
X1 = reactance component of line positive sequence impedance
R0 = resistance component of line zero sequence impedance
X0 = reactance component of line zero sequence impedance
Ka = impedance imbalance compensation factor
Im( ) = imaginary part in parentheses
Re( ) = real part in parentheses
L = line length (km)
Equations (1) and (2) are general expressions when lines are treated as having lumped constants
and these expressions are sufficient for lines within 100 km. For lines exceeding 100 km,
influences of the distributed capacitance must be considered. For this fault locator, the following
equation is used irrespective of line length to find the compensated distance x2 with respect to
distance x1 which was obtained in equation (1) or (2).
x1
x2 = x1 k2 3

(3)

where,
k = propagation constant of the protected line = 0.001km-1 (fixed)

3.6.3

Starting Calculation
Calculation of the fault location is initiated by the operation of OC element. It is initiated only
when the direction of fault is forward (FWD).

3.6.4

Displaying Location
The measurement result is stored in the "Fault record" and displayed on the LCD of the relay front
panel or on the local or remote PC. For displaying on the LCD, see Section 4.2.3.1.

124

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3.6.5

Setting
The setting items necessary for the fault location and their setting ranges are shown in the table
below. The reactance and resistance values are input in expressions on the secondary side.
When there are great variations in the impedance of each phase, equation (4) is used to find the
positive sequence impedance, zero sequence impedance and zero sequence mutual impedance,
while equation (5) is used to find imbalance compensation factors Kab to Ka.
When variations in impedance of each phase can be ignored, the imbalance compensation factor is
set to 100%.
Z1 = {(Zaa + Zbb + Zcc) (Zab + Zbc + Zca)}/3
Z0 = {(Zaa + Zbb + Zcc) + 2(Zab + Zbc + Zca)}/3

(4)

Kab = {(Zaa + Zbb)/2 Zab}/Z1


Kbc = {(Zbb + Zcc)/2 Zbc}/Z1
Kca = {(Zcc + Zaa)/2 Zca}/Z1

(5)

Ka = {Zaa (Zab + Zca)/2}/Z1


Kb = {Zbb (Zbc + Zab)/2}/Z1
Kc = {Zcc (Zca + Zab)/2}/Z1

Item

Range

Step

Default

R1

0.0 - 199.99

0.01

0.20

(0.0 - 999.9

0.1

1.0) (*)

0.0 - 199.99

0.01

2.00

(0.0 - 999.9

0.1

10.0)

0.0 - 999.99

0.01

0.70

(0.0 - 999.9

0.1

3.5)

0.0 - 199.99

0.01

6.80

(0.0 - 999.9

0.1

34.0)

Kab

80 - 120%

1%

100%

Kbc

80 - 120%

1%

100%

Kca

80 - 120%

1%

100%

Ka

80 - 120%

1%

100%

Kb

80 - 120%

1%

100%

Kc

80 - 120%

1%

100%

Line

0 - 399.9 km

0.1 km

50.0km

X1
R0
X0

Remarks

(*) Ohmic values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other ohmic values are
in the case of 5A rating.

125

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

4. User Interface
4.1

Outline of User Interface


The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an
RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and
Monitoring), IEC61850 communication or IEC60870-5-103 communication via Ethernet LAN
port or RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree of
the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).

4.1.1

Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and RS-232C connector.
LCD

The LCD screen, provided with a 2-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than VIEW
and RESET will display the menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the RESET key or END key. If any display is left for 5
minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.
LED

There are 9 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label

Color

Remarks

IN SERVICE

Green

Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in Test menu.

TRIP
ALARM
(LED1)
(LED2)
(LED3)
(LED4)
(LED5)
(LED6)

Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow

Lit when a trip command is issued.


Lit when a failure is detected.
Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.

LED1 to LED6 are configurable. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.

126

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Operation keys

The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:

: Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical


values and text strings.

CANCEL :

Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.

END :

Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the
display.

ENTER :

Used to store or establish entries.

VIEW and RESET keys

Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision", "Alarm display" and "Indication".
Pressing RESET key turns off the display.
Monitoring jacks

The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is
selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and
setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or transmitted to an
oscilloscope via a monitoring jack.
RS232C connector

The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local
personal computer.

127

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
4.1.2

Communication Ports
The following two interfaces are mounted as communication ports:
RS232C port
RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port for serial communication
IRIG-B port
RS232C port

This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and is
mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting
operation and display functions can be performed. (See Figure 3.1.3.)
RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port

The RS485 port or the fibre optic port is connected to the IEC60870-5-103 communication via
BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit / Remote Terminal Unit) to connect between relays and to construct
a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.) The RS485 port is a screw
terminal and the fibre optic port is the ST connector.
Ethernet LAN port is connected to the substation automation system via Ethernet communication
networks using IEC 61850 protocol. This port can also be connected to the RSM. 100Base-TX
(T1: RJ-45 connector) or 100Base-FX (F1: SC connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided on the
back of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
IRIG-B port

The IRIG-B port collects serial IRIG-B format data from the external clock to synchronize the
relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler.
This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
RS485 connection
terminal
TB3

TB1

Fibre Optic
(ST)
IRIG-B

OPT
T
TB1

TB2

R
TB3

IRIG-B

TB2
T1

F1
R
T

E
Rear view
(a) RS485 + 100BASE-TX

Rear view
(b) Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX

Figure 4.1.1 Location of Communication Port

128

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

4.2

Operation of the User Interface


The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples of typical model.

4.2.1

LCD and LED Displays


Displays during normal operation

When the GRD140 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Indication",
"Metering1", "Metering2", "Metering3", "Metering4", "Metering5", ., "Metering10", "Latest
fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The
following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 ]
0 0 0 0 ]

Metering 1
I a

. k A

Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P


setting in models 40 and 42.

I b

. k A

Not available for model 110, and APPL=1P and 2P


settings in models 40 and 42.

I c

. k A

Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P


setting in models 40 and 42.

I e

. k A

Metering 2

Metering 3

Metering 4

Metering 5
I s e

. k A

Not available for model 40.

V a

. k V
.

Available for APPL=3PN and 3PV settings in


models 40 and 42.

V b

. k V
.

Available for APPL=3PN and 3PV settings in


models 40 and 42.

V c

. k V
.

Available for APPL=3PN and 3PV settings in


models 40 and 42.

Metering 6

Metering 7

Metering 8

Metering 9

129

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
. k V
.

V e s

Metering 10
. H z

ff

To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault), press RESET key for 3
seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication

This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.


I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 ]
0 0 0 0 ]

Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
Displays in tripping

Latest fault
P h a s e
O C 1

A B C E

: Faulted phases. Not displayed for model 110


: Tripping element

If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and
other configurable LED if signals assigned to trigger by tripping
Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of messages.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of
tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off
the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.
2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning
off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.
3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the

RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other
digest screens. LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active
state.

130

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation


LED lighting status
Operation
Step 1

"TRIP" LED

Press the RESET key more than 3s on


the "Latest fault" screen
continue to lit

Step 2

Configurable LED
(LED1 LED6)

turn off

Then, press the RESET key in short


period on the "Latest fault" screen
turn off

When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function.
To return from menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.

Auto-supervision
E r r : R OM , A / D

If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the
"ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,
the "ALARM" LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an
alarm, press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.
2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET key
again to reset remained LED in the above manner.
3) LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.

While any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To

131

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.
Alarm Display

Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)



: A L M 1

The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by user. (For setting,
see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. The clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.

4.2.2

Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRD140. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix E.

132

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Menu

Record

F. record
E. record
D. record
Counter

Status

Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast

Set. (view)

Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED

Set. (change)

Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED

Test

Switch
Binary O/P

Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu

133

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Record

In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count.
Status

The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI, RSM, IEC60870-5-103 or
SNTP), clock adjustment and LCD contrast.
Set. (view)

The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name and the current settings of relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)

The "Set. (change)" menu is used to set or change the settings of password, plant name, relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to set or change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Test

The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
The "Test" menu also has password security protection.
When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top
"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.

R
S
S
S
T

e
t
e
e
e

M
c
a
t
t
s

E N U
o r d
t u s
.
( v i e w )
.
( c h a n g e )
t

To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to turn
off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.
The last item is not displayed for all the screens. " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that
lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
window, use the
and
keys.
/ 5
T r i p
s w
S c h e m e
P r o t . e l e m e n t

134

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
E, press the END key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.

4.2.3

Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count, Iy count and reclose count.

4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:


Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/

1
F
E
D
C

.
.
.
o

R
r
r
r
u

e
e
e
e
n

c
c
c
c
t

o
o
o
o
e

r
r
r
r
r

d
d
d
d

Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.


/ 2
F . r e c o r d
D i s p l a y
C l e a r

Select "Display" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the top
in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3

F . r e c o r d

# 1

1
1
2
1
0
1
2
0

# 2
# 3
# 4

6
8
0
5
4
1
8
7

/
:
/
:
/
:
/
:

J
1
M
2
F
5
J
3

u
3
a
9
e
4
a
0

l
:
y
:
b
:
n
:

/
5
/
2
/
5
/
1

2
7
2
2
2
3
2
8

0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.

0
0
0
1
0
2
0
4

1
3
1
0
1
9
1
1

1
1
9
2

Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.

135

and

keys and press the

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
/
0
1
O
P

P
I

4
1
8
C
h

r
a

/
:
1
a

I b
I c
I e
I s e
I 1
I 2
I 0
I 2 /
V a
V b
V c
V e s
V a b
V b c
V c a
V 1
V 2
V 0
f
d f
F a u
I a
I b
I c
I e
I s e

F . r e c o r d
# 1
J a n / 2 0 0 2
1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
Trip element

s e
A
. k m
f a u l

I 1


l t
v

B
(
t

.
a

C

v
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

l u
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.

H
e

%
l
k

)
u e s
A

H
z
s
k

See Table 3.5.1 for the indicated quantities.

A
A
A
A
A
A
A

V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
z
/ s
A
A
A
A
A

136

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
I 1
I 2
I 0
I 2 / I 1
T H M
V a

V b

V c

V e s

V a b

V b c

V c a

V 0

V 1

V 2

f
d
0
1
A
0
1
O
0
1
A
0
1
O

f
1
8
R
1
8
C
1
8
R
1
8
C

/
:
C
/
:
1
/
:
C
/
:
1

/
5

.
2
8

0
.

0
0

H
2
3

k A

k A

k A

%
k

H
z

V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V

J
1
J
1

a
3
S
a
3

z
/ s

n
:
1
1
n / 2 0 0 2
: 5 9 . 0 3 1

J
1
J
1
,

a
4
S
a
4
A

n
:
2
n
:
R

/ 2 0 0 2
0 0 . 0 3 1
/ 2 0 0 2
0 1 . 0 3 1
C - F T

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the

and

keys.

To clear all the fault records, do the following:


Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y

r e c o r d s ?
C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.

If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not

137

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
displayed.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.

4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:


Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.
/ 2
E . r e c o r d
D
i
s p l a y

C l e a r

Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3
2
O
2
O

1
C
1
C

E . r e c o r d
/
1
/
1

S
S
-

e p / 2 0 0 2
A
t r i p
e p / 2 0 0 2
A

The time is displayed by pressing the


/ 3
1
O
1
O

Press the

3
C
3
C

4
O
4
O

8 0
n
7 9
n

key.

E . r e c o r d
:
1
:
1

2
2
-

2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1
A
t r i p
O n
2 : 4 5 . 1 0 9
A
O n

key to return the screen with date.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the

and

keys.

To clear all the event records, do the following:


Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y

r e c o r d s ?
C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.

138

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.
/ 2
D . r e c o r d
D i s p l a y
C l e a r

Select "Display" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/ 3

D . r e c o r d

# 1

1
1
2
1
0
1
2
0

# 2
# 3
# 4

6
8
0
5
4
1
8
7

/
:
/
:
/
:
/
:

J
1
M
2
F
5
J
3

u
3
a
9
e
4
a
0

l
:
y
:
b
:
n
:

/
5
/
2
/
5
/
1

2
7
2
2
2
3
2
8

0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.

0
4
0
3
0
4
0
8

1
0
1
8
1
4
1
7

1
8
4
6

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the

and

keys.

To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:


Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y

r e c o r d s ?
C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter
Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 2
C o u n t e r
D i s p l a y
T r i p s
C l e a r
T r i p s
A
(*)
C l e a r
T r i p s
B
(*)
C l e a r
T r i p s
C
(*)
C l e a r
C l e a r
I ^ y A
C l e a r
I ^ y B
C l e a r
I ^ y C
A R C s
C l e a r
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.

Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.

139

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
/ 3
C o u n t e r
T r i p s

T r i p s A
(*)

T r i p s B
(*)

T r i p s C
(*)

I ^ y A
E 6
I ^ y B
E 6
I ^ y C
E 6
A R C s

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the
To clear each count, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y

T r i p s ?
C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.


C l e a r
E N D = Y

T r i p s
A ?
C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.


C l e a r
E N D = Y

T r i p s
B ?
C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.


C l e a r
E N D = Y

T r i p s
C ?
C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear I^yA" to display the following confirmation screen.


C l e a r
E N D = Y

I ^ y A ?
C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear I^yB" to display the following confirmation screen.


C l e a r
E N D = Y

I ^ y B ?
C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear I^yC" to display the following confirmation screen.


C l e a r
E N D = Y

I ^ y C ?
C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear ARCs" to display the following confirmation screen.


C l e a r
E N D = Y

A R C s ?
C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.

140

and

keys.

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
4.2.4

Displaying the Status


From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
The data are updated every second.

4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:


Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/

1
M
B
R
T
C
L

e
i
e
i
l
C

S
t
n
l
m
o
D

t
e
a
a
e
c

a t u s
r i n g
r y
I /
y
e l e
s y n
k
a d j
c o n t r

O
m
c
u
a

e n t
.
s t .
s t

Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.


/

2
M e
M e t e
D e m a
D i r e

t
r
n
c

e r i n g
i n g
d
t i o n

Select "Current" to display the current power system quantities on the "Metering" screen.
/ 3
I a

M e t e r

I b

I c

I e

I s e

I 1

I 2

I 0


I 2 / I 1

T H M

V a

n
.

.
.

.
.
.

See Table 3.5.1 for the indicated quantities.

A
A
A

k A

k A

%
k V

141

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
V b
V c
V e s
V a b
V b c
V c a
V 1
V 2
V 0
f
P F
P
Q
S

-
-
-

V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
z

k W
k v a r
k V A

If the primary side unit (A) is required, select 2(=Pri-A) on the "Metering" screen. See Section
4.2.6.6.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.

Select "Demand" to display the current demand on the "Metering" screen.


/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P
Q
S
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
f
f

3
a
b
c
e
s
2
2
m
m
m
a
a
b
b
c
c
e
e
0
0
m
m

m
m
m
m
e
m
1
a
a
a
m
m
m
m
m
m
s
s
m
m
a
i

D
a
a
a
a
m
a
m
x
x
x
a
i
a
i
a
i
m
m
a
i
x
n

e m
x
x
x
x
a x
x
a x
x
n
x
n
x
n
a x
i n
x
n

a n

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

k
k
k
k
k
k

A
A
A
A
A
A

k
k
k

a
A
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
z
z

W
v
V
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
H
H

See Table 3.5.1 for the indicated quantities.

To clear all max data, do the following:


Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the

142

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y

m a x ?
C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in non-volatile memory.
Select "Direction" to display the direction of a current on the "Metering" screen.

The direction of each current is displayed when the directional characteristic is selected as
follows:
Ia, Ib, Ic: [OC-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting
Ie: [EF-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting
Ise: [SE-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting
I2: [NC-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting
/
I
I
I
I
I
I

3
D i r e c t i o n
a
F o r w a r
b
R e v e r s
c
F o r w a r
e
F o r w a r
s e
F o r w a r
2
_ _ _ _ _ _

See Table 3.5.1 for the indicated quantities.

d
e
d
d
d
_

4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:


Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.

For Models 110, 400 and 420:


/ 2
I P
O P

B i n a r y
I / O
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0

The display format is shown below.


[

Input (IP)

BI1

BI2

BI3

BI4

BI5

BI6

BI7

BI8

Output (OP)

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

FAIL

Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to each binary input signal. The
models 400 and 420 are not available for BI6 to BI8. For the binary input signal, see Appendix H.
The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the photo-coupler output circuit.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO7 are configurable. The status
of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay
driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
For Models 401 and 421:
/
I
O
O

2
P
P
P 2

i
0
0
0

n
0
0
0

a
0
0
0

r y
I / O
0
0

0
0 0 0

143

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The display format is shown below.
[

Input (IP)

BI1

BI2

BI3

BI4

BI5

Output (OP)

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

FAIL

Output (OP2)

HBO1

HBO2

HBO3

HBO4

Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI5 correspond to a binary input signal. For the binary
input signal, see Appendix F. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the
photo-coupler output circuit.
Lines 2 and 3 show the binary output statuses. BO1 to BO6 of line 2 corresponding to the binary
outputs are a normal auxiliary relay, which are configurable. FAIL of line 3 corresponds to the
relay failure output. HBO1 to HBO4 of line 3 are a high-speed auxiliary relay, which are
configurable. The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input
circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
To display all the lines, press the

and

keys.

4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:


Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/
O
O
E
S
N
U
T
B
C
I
C
O
O
U
U
Z
N
F
A

2
C
C
F
E
O
C
H
C
B
C
L
V
V
V
V
O
O
R
R

R y
# 1 [
# 2 [
[
F
[
C
[
[
M [
D
[
F
[
D
[
P
[
# 1 [
# 2 [
# 1 [
# 2 [
V
[
V
[
Q
[
C
[

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

e
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

l
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0

e m e n t
0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
]
0
]
0
]
]
0 0 0
]
]
]
]
]
0
]
0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
]
0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
]
]
]
0
]
0 0
]

The displayed elements depend on relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[

OC#1

OC1-A OC1-B OC1-C OC2-A OC2-B

OC#2

OC4-A OC4-B OC4-C


EF2

OC2-C

OC3-A

OC3-B

]
OC3-C OC elements
OC elements

EF

EF1

EF3

EF4

EF elements

SEF

SEF1 SEF2 SEF3

SEF4

SEF elements

144

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
[

NOC

NOC1 NOC2

UC
THM

UC1-A UC1-B UC1-C


Alarm Trip

BCD

BCD

CBF
ICD
CLP
OV#1
OV#2
UV#1
UV#2
ZOV
NOV
FRQ
ARC

CBF-A
ICD-A
0
OV1-A
OV4-A
UV1-A
UV4-A
ZOV1
NOV1
FRQ1
OVB

]
NOC elements

UC2-A

UC2-B

UC2-C

UC elements
THM element
BCD element

CBF-B
ICD-B
1
OV1-B
OV4-B
UV1-B
UV4-B
ZOV2
NOV2
FRQ2
UVB

CBF-C
ICD-C
2
OV1-C
OV4-C
UV1-C
UV4-C

FRQ3
SYN

3
OV2-A

OV2-B

OV2-C

OV3-A

OV3-B

UV2-A

UV2-B

UV2-C

UV3-A

UV3-B

FRQ4
OVL

UVL

CBF element
ICD element
Cold Load state
OV3-C OV elements
OV elements
UV3-C UV elements
UV elements
ZOV elements
NOV elements
FRQ elements
ARC elements

The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRD140 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary
input signal clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP server. To display on the LCD whether these clocks
are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with, do the
following:
Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2
B
I
I
S

I
R
E
N

T i m e
:
A
I G : I n
C
: I n
T P : A c

s
c
a
a
t

y
t
c
c
.

n c .
.
t
.
t
.
( S r v 1 )

The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".

For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.


4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2

1 2 / N o v / 2 0 0 1
2 2 : 5 6 : 1 9
L o c

Loc:Local, BI:BI, IRI:IRIG-B, IEC:IEC103, SNT:SNTP

145

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
M i n u t
5
H o u r
2
D a y
1
M o n t h
1
Y e a r
2 0 0

e
6

2
2
1
1

Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI], [IRI], [IEC], [SNT] or [RSM] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.

If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:


Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/ 2

L C D

c o n t r a s t

Press the or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thin by
pressing the key and deep by pressing the key.

4.2.5

Viewing the Settings


The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting

146

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.


Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/

1
V
D
C
R
S
P
B
B
L

e
e
o
e
t
r
i
i
E

S
r
s
m
c
a
o
n
n
D

e
s
c
m
o
t
t
a
a

t
i
r
s
r
u
e
r
r

. ( v i e w )
o n
i p t i o n
d
s
c t i o n
y
I / P
y
O / P

Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.


/ 2
V e r s i o n
t y p e
R e l a y
N o .
S e r i a l
S o f t w a r e

Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number.
G R D 1 4 0 - 4 0 0 D - 1 0
- A 0

Select "Serial number" to display the relay manufacturing number.


Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.
s o f t w a r e
M a i n
G S P D M 1 - 0 4 -
I
G
P
P
(
I
I
(
I
X
(
G
Y
(

L
G

E
G

E
G

O
G

C
R

C
R

C
R

O
R

6 1 8

d a
D 1 4

1 0 3
D 1 4

6 1 8
D 1 4

S E
Z 1 0

5
t
0

5
0

s
0

a
D

d
D

0
D

u
D

e n g .
-

)
t

)
d

)
s


a

a t a

c .

4.2.5.2 Settings

The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary O/P" and
"LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

147

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
4.2.6

Changing the Settings


The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.

CAUTION
Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
Modification of settings :
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)
depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary
settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:


- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.


The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the
and
keys.
/

1
P
D
C
R
S
P
B
B
L

a
e
o
e
t
r
i
i
E

S
s
s
m
c
a
o
n
n
D

e
s
c
m
o
t
t
a
a

t
w
r
s
r
u
e
r
r

. ( c h a n g e)
o r d
i p t i o n
d
s
c t i o n
y
I / P
y
O / P

148

and

keys.

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Move the cursor to a setting item.
Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.


/ 2
D e s c r i p t i o n
n a m e
P l a n t
D e s c r i p t i o n

To select a character, use keys , , and to move blinking cursor down, up, left and right. "
" and " " on each of lines 4, 8 and 10 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A
maximum of 22 characters can be entered.
_
A
H
O
V
a
h
o
v
0
7
(
}

B
I
P
W
b
i
p
w
1
8
)

!
:

C
J
Q
X
c
j
q
x
2
9

D
K
R
Y
d
k
r
y
3

#
,

E
L
S
Z
e
l
s
z
4

F G
M N
T U

f g
m n
t u

5 6

@_ {

$ %&
. `

Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER key.
Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.
Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered character, do either of the following:


Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:


The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
and
keys. If
cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the
setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the
and
keys.
/ 4

T i m e / s t a r t e r

T i m e
2 . 0
O C

s
_
A

149

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2 . 0 0
E F
S
N
O
U
Z
N

0 . 6
E F
0 . 2
C
0 . 4
V
1 2 0 .
V
6 0 .
O V
2 0 .
O V
2 0 .

A
0
A
0 0
A
0
V
0
V
0
V
0
V
0

Move the cursor to a setting line.


Press the
key.

or

key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the

or

Press the ENTER key to enter the value.


After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.


If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
and
keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper
one.

To complete the setting

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the
"Set. (change)" sub-menu.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,

or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns back
to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made so far
and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2

Password

For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:

150

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
/ 2
P a s s w o r d
S e t t i n g
T e s t

Select "Setting" to set the password for the setting change.


Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
I n p u t
_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
R e t y p e
_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Select "Test" to set the password for the test.

Set the password the same manner as that of the "Setting" above.
Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.
P a s s w o r d
_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRD140 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.

151

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2
D e s c r i p t i o n
n a m e
P l a n t

D
A
A
A
A

e
l
l
l
l

s
a
a
a
a

c
r
r
r
r

r
m
m
m
m

i p t i o n
1
T e x t
2
T e x t
3
T e x t
4
T e x t

To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
To enter the name for Alarm, select "Alarm" on the "Description" screen.
_
A
H
O
V
a
h
o
v
0
7
(
}

B
I
P
W
b
i
p
w
1
8
)

!
:

C
J
Q
X
c
j
q
x
2
9

D
K
R
Y
d
k
r
y
3

#
,

E
L
S
Z
e
l
s
z
4

F G
M N
T U

f g
m n
t u

5 6

@_ {

$ %&
. `

Enter the text string (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
4.2.6.4 Communication

If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103
communication or Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/ 2
C o m m s
.
A d d r . / P a r a m .
S w i t c h

Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3

A d d r . / P a r a m

I E C
2

S Y A D J
I P 1 1
I P 1 1

0
1
9 2
2
6 8

152

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
I P 1 - 3
1
I P 1 - 4
1 7
S M 1 - 1
2 5
S M 1 - 2
2 5
S M 1 - 3
2 5
S M 1 - 4

9
2
5
5
5

0
1
9 2
2
6 8
3
1 9
1 - 4
1
:
:
4 - 1
0
4 - 2
0
4 - 3
0
4 - 4
0
O D E
0
A D T
1 2 0
I N T
6 0
1 - 1
0
1 - 2
0
1 - 3
0
1 - 4
0
2 - 1
0
2 - 2
0
2 - 3
0
2 - 4
0

G W1 1
G W1 1
G W1 G W

S I
S I
S I
S I
S M
D E
G O
P G
P G
P G
P G
P G
P G
P G
P G

m i n
s

Enter the address number on "IEC" column for IEC60870-5-103 and the compensation value
on "SYADJ" column for adjustment of time synchronization of protocol used (: lags the time,
+: leads the time).
Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for
GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI4-4. Four SNTP servers are

153

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
available.
Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP
server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain
synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and
synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".
Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE
message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive time.
Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG1-4 if Ping response is checked.
IP address: , , ,
IP1-1 IP1-2 IP1-3 IP1-4

SM1-1 to SM1-4, GW1-1 to GW1-4, SI1-1 to SI4-4, PG1-1 to PG1-4: same as above.

Press the ENTER key.

CAUTION: Do not overlap the relay address number.


Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., of the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850.
/ 3
2
9
I
9
I
N
8
N
8
O
T
O
G
O
P
O

3
.
E
.
E
o
5
o
5
f
S
f
S
f
I
f

S w i t c h
2
6
C
6
C
r
0
r
0
f
T
f
E
f
N
f

C
/
B
/
B
m
B
m
A
/
M
/
C
/
G
/

1
R
1
L
a
L
a
U
O
O
O
H
O
C
O

0
9 . 2 / 5 7 . 6
1
9 . 2
K
0
l / B l o c k e d
K
0
l / B l o c k e d
T
0
n
D
0
n
K
n
H K
n

Select the number and press the ENTER key.


<232C>

This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.
Note: default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to
serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.

<IECBR>

This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
<IECBLK>

Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC60870-5-103 communication. When
using the IEC60870-5-103 communication, select 1 (=Normal).
<850BLK>

Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC61850 communication. When using the

154

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
IEC61850 communication, select 1 (=Normal).
<850AUT>

With IEC61850 communication, GRD140 provides access restriction which permits a client
access only if an authentication parameter matches with a valid parameter (password). The
password is a 4-digit number shared with RSM100.
Select 1 (=On) to use the authentication function.
<TSTMOD>

Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.


<GSECHK>

This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file
cannot be received.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.
<PINGCHK>

This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a Ping to IP address
which is set on PG-.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a Ping response check.
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:


Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/

2
F
E
D
C

.
.
.
o

R
r
r
r
u

e
e
e
e
n

c
c
c
c
t

o
o
o
o
e

r
r
r
r
r

d
d
d
d

Setting the fault recording


Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.
/ 3

F . r e c o r d

F L
O f f / O n

Enter 1 to enable the fault locator. If to disable the fault locator, enter 0.
Setting the event recording
Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.
/ 3

E . r e c o r d

B I T R N
1 0 0
E V 1
3 0 0 1

_
_

155

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
E V 2
3
E V 3
3
:
:
E V 1
3
E V 1
3

0 0 2

0 0 3

2
1
2
1

7
2 7
8
2 8

_
_

<BITRN>

Enter the number of event to record the status change both to "On" and "Off". If 20 is entered, both
status change is recorded for EV1 to EV20 events and only the status change to "On" is recorded
for EV21 to EV128 events.
<EV>

Enter the signal number in Appendix C to record as the event. It is recommended that this setting
can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD screen. (Refer
to Section 3.4.2.)
Setting the disturbance recording
Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.
/

3
D .
T i m e
S c h e
B i n a

r
/
m
r

e c o r d
s t a r t e r
e
s w
y
s i g .

Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.


/ 4

T i m e / s t a r t e r

T i m
2
O C
2
E F
0
S E F
0
N O C
0
O V
1 2
U V
6
Z O V
2
N O V
2

e
. 0

s
_
A

. 0 0
A
. 6 0
A
. 2 0 0
A
. 4 0
V
0 . 0
V
0 . 0
V
0 . 0
V
0 . 0

Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:


Select "Scheme sw" on the "D. record" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

156

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
/ 4
T
O
O
O
E
O
S
O
N
O
O
O
U
O
Z
O
N
O

r
f
C
f
F
f
E
f
O
f
V
f
V
f
O
f
O
f

S c h e m e

s w

i p
f / O n

1
f / O n
1
f / O n
F
f / O n
C
f / O n

1
1
1

f / O n
1
f / O n
V
f / O n
V
f / O n

1
1

Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:


Select "Binary sig." on the "D. record" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4

B i n a r y

S I G
3
S I G
3
S I G
3

1
0 0 1
2
0 0 2
3
0 0 3

s i g .

S I G 3 2
3 0 3 2

Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix C.


Setting the counter
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 3
C o u n t e r
s w
S c h e m e
A l a r m s e t

To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:


Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4
T
O
C
O
T
O

C
f
B
f
C
f

S c h e m e
S
f
S
f
A
f

P
/
M
/
E
/

E
O
E
O
N
O

s w

N
0
_
n / O p t - O n
N
0
n
0
n

157

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

O
O
O

I
f
P
f

y
f
T
f

A
/
A
/

E
O
E
O

N
n
N
n

0
0

Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set threshold setting, do the following:


Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/ 4
T C
1
I
1
Y V

A l a r m
A
0
y
0
A

L
0
A
0
L
2
O P T A
1 0

M
0
L
0
U
.
L
0

0
M
0
E
0
M
0

s e t

_
E 6

m s

Enter the threshold settings.


4.2.6.6 Status

To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:


Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/

2
S t a t u s
M e t e r i n g
T i m e
s y n c .
T i m e
z o n e

Setting the metering


Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 3
D
P
P
S
C
L

i
r
o
e
u
a

M e t e r i n g
s
i
w
n
r
g

p
/
e
d
r
/

l
S
r
/
e
L

a y
0
_
e c / P r i - A
0
R e c e i v e
n t
1
e a d

Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.

Enter 0(=Pri) to display the primary side current in kilo-amperes(kA).


Enter 1(=Sec) to display the secondary side current.
Enter 2(=Pri-A) to display the primary side current in amperes(A).
Enter 0(=Send) or 1(=Receive) for Power, and 0(=Lag) or 1(=Lead) for Current, and press the
ENTER key.
Note: Power and Current setting

158

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Active Power Display
Power setting=1(Send)

Power setting=2(Receive)

V
I

Reactive Power Display


Current setting=1(Lag)

Current setting=2(Lead)

V
I

Setting the time synchronization

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronized with the binary input signal, RSM clock, or
by an IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows.
Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.
/ 3

T i m e

s y n c .

T i m e
s y n c
0
_
O f / B I / I R I / I E C / S N

Enter 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=of) not to be synchronized with any external signals.


Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronized with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=IRI) to be synchronized with IRIG-B time signal.
Enter 3(=IEC) to be synchronized with IEC60870-5-103.
Enter 4(=SN) to be synchronized with SNTP.
Note: When selecting BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, check that they are active on the
"Status" screen in "Status" sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be None because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, the calendar clock runs locally.

Setting the time zone

When the calendar clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time standard, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time.
Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.
/ 3

T i m e

z o n e

G M T

h r s
+ 9

G M T m

M i n
+ 0

159

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hrs) and
GMTm (min), and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.7 Protection

The GRD140 can have 8 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/

2
P r o t e
C h a n g e
C h a n g e
C o p y
g p

c t i o n
a c t . g p .
s e t .
.

Changing the active group


Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/ 3

C h a n g e
a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e
g p .
1
_

Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.


Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix H. To change the settings, do the following:
Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/

3
C
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G

o
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r

A
m
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

c
m
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u

t
o
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p

g p . =
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Changing the Common settings


Select "Common" to set the current and voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring for
GRD140-40 and -42 and press the ENTER key.
/ 4
A
O
A
O
A
O
C
O

P
f
P
f
P
f
T
f

C o m m o n
P
f
P
f
P
f
F
f

L
/
L
/
L
/
E
/

C
3
V
O
V
V
N
O

T
1
_
P / 2 P / 1 P
T
1
n
P
E S
e / V s
0
n / O P T - O n

160

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
V
O
V
O
C
O
V
O
V
O
A
O

T
f
T
f
T
f
0
f
2
f
O
f

F
f
F
f
S
f
S
f
S
f
L
f

1
/
2
/
V
/
V
/
V
/
E
/

E
O
E
O
E
A
E
A
E
A
D
O

N
n
N
n
N
L
N
L
N
L

0
/ O P T - O
0
/ O P T - O
2
M & B L K /
2
M & B L K /
2
M & B L K /
1

n
n
A L M
A L M
A L M

<APPLCT>
Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=3P: 3 phase), 2(=2P: 2 phase) or 3(=1P: 1 pole) to set the current
input state and press the ENTER key.
<APPLVT>
Enter 0(=Off: not used) or 1(=On: used) and press the ENTER key.
<APPLVES>
Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=Ve: used zero-sequence voltage is input directly) or 2(=Vs: used
voltage for synchronism check) and press the ENTER key.
AOLED

This switch is used to control the TRIP LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.
Enter 1 (=On) to light the TRIP LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER
key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
CTFEN, VTF1EN, VTF2EN

To set CT failure function and VT failure function enable, do the following.


Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=On) or 2(=OPT-On) by pressing the
key.

or

key and press the ENTER

CTSVEN, V0SVEN, V2SVEN

To set AC input imbalance supervision enable, do the following.


Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=ALM&BLK) or 2(=ALM) by pressing the
ENTER key.

or

key and press the

Changing the Group settings


Select the "Group" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER
key.
/

4
G r o u p
P a r a m e t e r
T r i p
A R C

161

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Setting the parameter

Enter the line name, the CT/VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:
Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/

5
P a r a m e
L i n e
n a m
C T / V T
r a
F a u l t L o c

t e r
e
t i o
.

Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.


Enter the line name as a text string and press the EN D key.
Select "CT/VT ratio" to display the "CT/VT ratio" screen.
/ 6

C T / V T

O C C
4
E F C
4
S E F
4
P V T
1
V E S
1

T
0
T
0
C
0

r a t i o

0
T
0

0 0
V T
0 0

for Ve or Vs

Note: The "CT/VT ratio" screen depends on the APPLCT and APPLVT setting.

Enter the CT/VT ratio and press the ENTER key.


Select "Fault Locator" to display the "Fault Locator" screen.
/ 6

F a u l t

L o c .

X 1
1 0 . 0

X 0
3 4 . 0

R 1
1 . 0

R 0
3 . 5
K a b

%
1 0 0

K b c

%
1 0 0

K c a

%
1 0 0

K a

%
1 0 0

K b

%
1 0 0

K c

1 0 0
L I N E
5 0 . 0

k m

Enter the setting value and press the ENTER key.

162

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Setting the trip function

To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.


Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5
T r i p
s w
S c h e m e
e l e m e n t
P r o t .

Setting the scheme switch


Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/

6
A
O
E
S
N
M
C
O
U
Z
N
F

p
C
F
E
O
i
o
V
V
O
O
R

S c h e m e
s w
p l i c a t i o n

F
C
s c
l d

L o a d

V
V
Q

Setting the application

To set the application setting, do the following.


Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/ 7
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D

O
/
O
/
E
/
E
/
S
/
S
/
N
/
N
/

A p p l i c a t i o n
C
I
C
I
F
I
F
I
E
I
E
I
C
I
C
I

1
E
2
E
1
E
2
E
1
E
2
E
1
E
2
E

0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U

_
S / C
_
S / C
S / C
S / C
S / C
S / C
_
S / C
_
S / C

MOC1, 2, MEF1, 2, MSE1, 2, <MNC1, 2>

To set the OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1, SEF2, NOC1 and NOC2 time delay characteristic type, do
the following.
Enter 0(=D: DT) or 1(=IEC) or 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US) or 4(=C: CON) and press the ENTER
key.

163

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Setting the OC protection

The settings for the OC protection are as follows:


Select "OC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OC" screen.
/ 7

O C

O
O
O
F
M
N
M
M
M
C
O
D
O
N
V
O
O
O
O
F

C
f
C
W
O
I
O
I
O
O
C
E
C
A
T
f
C
f
C
W

1
f
1
D
C
/
C
/
C
2
1
F
1
/
F
f
2
f
2
D

V
O
O
O
O
F
O
N
V
O
O
O

T
f
C
f
C
W
C
A
T
f
C
f

F
f
3
f
3
D
3
/
F
f
4
f

V
O
O
3

T
f
C
P

F
f
T
O

E
/
/
1
V
1
V
1
/
R
/
B
/
E
/
/

N
O
D
R
C
I
C
I
C
C

1
n
I
E
/
/
O

R
V
I
E
I
E
U
8

/
E
I
E
I
S

0
N O N
C
0
/ L T I
E E
0

This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 1(=IEC).

This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 3(=US).

This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE).

0
D
2
l
O
O
N
O
D
R

E P
F
o c k
C 1 B L K
n

0
0

n
I R
E V / N
:
:
- O C 2 B L
/ O n
E N
/ O n
- D I R
/ R E V / N
- 2 F
B l o c k
- O C 3 B L
/ O n
E N
/ O n
:
:
- O C 4 B L
/ O n
P
R / 2 O U T

0
O N
K

0
0
0

O N
K

0
0

0
O F 3

OCEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC, enter

0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


OC-DIR

To set the OC directional characteristic, do the following.


Enter 0(=FWD) or 1(=REV) or 2(=NON) and press the ENTER key.

164

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
MOC1C, <MOC2C>

To set the OC1 and OC2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
If [MOC] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
If [MOC] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
If [MOC] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
OC1R, <OC2R>

To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.


If [MOC] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
OC1-2F, OC2-2F, OC3-2F, OC4-2F
Enter 1(=Block) to block the OC1, OC2, OC3 and OC4 against the inrush current, and press
the ENTER key.
VTF-OCBLK

To set the VTF block enable of OC, do the following.


Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the VTF function and press the ENTER key. If

disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


OCTP

To set the trip mode, do the following.


Enter 0(=3POR) or 1(=2OUTOF3) and press the ENTER key. If the 2OUTOF3 selected,
the trip signal is not issued when only one phase element operates.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the EF protection

The settings for the EF protection are as follows:


Select the "EF" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "EF" screen.
/ 7
E
O
E
F
M
N
M
M
M

F
f
F
W
E
I
E
I
E

E F
1
f
1
D
F
/
F
/
F

E
/
/
1
V
1
V
1

N
O
D
R
C
I
C
I
C

1
n
I
E
/
/
-

/
R
V
I
E
I
E
U

P O P
/
E
I
E
I
S

0
N O N
C
0
/ L T I
E E
0

This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 1(=IEC).

This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 3(=US).

165

This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE).

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
C
E
D
E
N
C
O
V
O
E
O
E
F

O
F
E
F
A
T
f
T
f
F
f
F
W

2
1
F
1
/
F
f
F
f
2
f
2
D

/
R
/
B
/
/
E
/
/

C O 8
D
2
l
E
O
E
O
N
O
D
R

C
O
V
O
E
O
E
F
E
N
C
O
V
O
E
O

T
f
T
f
F
f
F
W
F
A
T
f
T
f
F
f

F
f
F
f
3
f
3
D
3
/
F
f
F
f
4
f

/
/
E
/
/
B
/
/
E
/

E
O
E
O
N
O
D
R
2
l
E
O
E
O
N
O

V
O
C
O

T
f
U
f

F
f
R
f

/
R
/

E
O
E
1

0
E
F
o
F
n
F
n
n
I
E
:
:
F
n
F
n
n
I
E
F
o
F
n
F
n

P
c k
1 B L K

1 B L K

0
/ P O P
R
0
V / N O N
2 B L K

2 B L K

0
/ P O P
R
0
V / N O N
c k
3 B L K

3 B L K

0
n
:
:
F 4 B L K
0
n
V
0
/ 2 / 3 / 4

EFEN
Enter 1(=On) to use an earth fault protection or enter 2(=POP) to use the directional earth fault
command protection (POP scheme), and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF, enter

0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


EF-DIR

To set the EF directional characteristic, do the following.


Enter 0(=FWD) or 1(=REV) or 2(=NON) and press the ENTER key.
MEF1C, <MEF2C>

To set the EF1 and EF2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
If [MEF] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
If [MEF] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.

166

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
If [MEF] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
EF1R, <EF2R>

To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.


If [MEF] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
EF1-2F, EF2-2F, EF3-2F, EF4-2F
Enter 1(=Block) to block the EF1, EF2, EF3 and EF4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
CTF-EFBLK, VTF-EFBLK

To set the CTF block and VTF block enable of EF, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the CTF function and VTF function, and press the
ENTER key. If disabling them, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
CURREV

To set which stage is used for current reverse detection in the command protection, do the
following.
Enter 1(=EF1), 2(=EF2), 3(EF3) or 4(=EF4) and press the ENTER key. If disabling them,

enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the SEF protection

The settings for the SEF protection are as follows:


Select "SEF" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "SEF" screen.
/ 7
S
O
S
F
M
N
M
M
M
C
S
D
S
O
S
N

E
f
E
W
S
I
S
I
S
O
E
E
E
f
E
A

S E F
1
f
1
D
E
/
E
/
E
2
1
F
1
f
1
/

E
/
/
1
V
1
V
1
/
R
/
S
/
B

N
O
D
R
C
I
C
I
C
C

1
n
I
E
/
/
O

R
V
I
E
I
E
U
8

/
E
I
E
I
S

0
N O N
C
0
/ L T I
E E
0

This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 1(=IEC).

This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 3(=US).

0
D
2
O
2
l

E P
0
n
F
o c k

167

This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE).

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
V
O
S
O
S
F

T
f
E
f
E
W

F
f
2
f
2
D

V
O
S
O
S
F
S
N
V
O
S
O

T
f
E
f
E
W
E
A
T
f
E
f

F
f
3
f
3
D
3
/
F
f
4
f

V
O
R
O

T
f
P
f

F
f
E
f

/
E
/
/

S
O
N
O
D
R

E 1 B L K
n

0
0

n
I R
E V / N
:
:
- S E 2 B L
/ O n
E N
/ O n
- D I R
/ R E V / N
- 2 F
B l o c k
- S E 3 B L
/ O n
E N
/ O n
:
:
- S E 4 B L
/ O n
N
/ O n

0
O N
K

0
0
0

O N
K

0
0

SEEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF, enter

0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


MSE1C, <MSE2C>

To set the SEF1 and SEF2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
If [MSE] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
If [MSE] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
If [MSE] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
SE1R, <SE2R>

To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.


If [MSE] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
SE1S2

To set the Stage 2 Timer Enable, do the following.


Enter 1(=On) to enable the SE1S2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SE1S2, enter

0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


SE1-2F, SE2-2F, SE3-2F, SE4-2F
Enter 1(=Block) to block the SEF1, SEF2, SEF3 and SEF4 against the inrush current, and press

168

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
the ENTER key.
VTF-SEBLK

To set the VTF block enable of SE, do the following.


Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the VTF function and press the ENTER key. If

disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


RPEN

To set the residual power block enable of SE, do the following.


Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the residual power block function and press the
ENTER key. If disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the NOC protection

The settings for the NOC protection are as follows:


Select the "NOC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NOC" screen.
/ 7

N O C

N
O
N
F
M
N
M
M
M
C
N
D
N
N
C
O
V
O
N
O
N
F

C
f
C
W
N
I
N
I
N
O
C
E
C
A
T
f
T
f
C
f
C
W

1
f
1
D
C
/
C
/
C
2
1
F
1
/
F
f
F
f
2
f
2
D

E
/
/
1
V
1
V
1
/
R
/
B
/
/
E
/
/

N
O
D
R
C
I
C
I
C
C
D
2
l
N
O
N
O
N
O
D
R

C
O
V
O

T
f
T
f

F
f
F
f

/
/

N
O
N
O

1
n
I
E
/
/
O

R
V
I
E
I
E
U
8

/
E
I
E
I
S

0
N O N
C
0
/ L T I
E E
0

This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 1(=IEC).

This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 3(=US).

0
E
F
o
C
n
C
n

P
c k
1 B L K

1 B L K

0
0

n
I
E
:
:
C
n
C
n

R
0
V / N O N
2 B L K

2 B L K

169

This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 2(=IEEE).

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
NCEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the NC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NC, enter

0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


NC-DIR

To set the NC directional characteristic, do the following.


Enter 0(=FWD) or 1(=REV) or 2(=NON) and press the ENTER key.
MNC1C, <MNC2C>

To set the NOC1 and NOC2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
If [MNC] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
If [MNC] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
If [MNC] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
NC1R, <NC2R>

To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.


If [MNC] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
NC1-2F, NC2-2F
Enter 1(=Block) to block the NOC1 and NOC2 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
CTF-NCBLK, VTF-NCBLK

To set the CTF block and VTF block enable of NC, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the CTF function and VTF function, and press the
ENTER key. If disabling them, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the Misc. protection

The settings for the miscellaneous protection are as follows:


Select "Misc." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7
U
O
C
O
U

C
f
T
f
C

M i s c .
1
f
F
f
2

E
/
/
E

N
O n
U C 1 B L K
O n
N

170

0
0
0

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
O
C
O
T
O
T
O
B
O
B
N
B
O
R
O

f
T
f
H
f
H
f
C
f
C
A
T
f
T
f

f
F
f
M
f
M
f
D
f
D
/
C
f
C
f

/
/
E
/
A
/
E
/
B

O
U
O
N
O
E
O
N
O
2
l

n
C 2 B L K
n

0
0

n
N
n

0
0

n
F
o c k

0
0

/ O n
0
/ D I R / O C

UCEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the UC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UC, enter

0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


CTF-UCBLK

To set the CTF block enable of UC, do the following.


Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the CTF function, and press the ENTER key. If

disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


THMEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal OL and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Thermal

OL, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


THMAEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal Alarm and press the ENTER key. If disabling the

Thermal Alarm, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


BCDEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the Broken Conductor and press the ENTER key. If disabling the

Broken Conductor, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


BCD-2F
Enter 1(=Block) to block the BCD against the inrush current, and press the ENTER key.
BTC
Enter 1(=On) to set the Back-trip control and press the ENTER key. If not setting the

Back-trip control, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


RTC

To set the Re-trip control, do the following.

171

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=Direct) or 2(=OC controlled) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the Cold Load protection

The settings for the Cold Load protection are as follows:


Select "Misc." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7
C
O
C
O

L
f
L
f

C o l d
E
f
D
f

L o a d

N
/ O n
O E N
/ O n

CLEN

To set the Cold load function enable, do the following.


Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load function and press the ENTER key. If disabling the

Cold Load, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


CLDOEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load drop-off and press the ENTER key. If disabling the

Cold Load drop-off, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the OV protection

The settings for the OV protection are as follows:


Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/ 7
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

V
f
V
f
V
f
V
f

O V
1
f
2
f
3
f
4
f

E
/
E
/
E
/
E
/

N
D
N
D
N
O
N
O

0
_
T / I D M T / C
0
T / I D M T / C
0
n
0
n

OV1EN, <OV2EN>

To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.


Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

172

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
OV3EN, <OV4EN>
Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3 or OV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3 or

OV4, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the UV protection

The settings for the UV protection are as follows:


Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/ 7
U
O
V
O
U
O
V
O
U
O
V
O
U
O
V
O
V
O

V
f
T
f
V
f
T
f
V
f
T
f
V
f
T
f
B
f

U V
1
f
F
f
2
f
F
f
3
f
F
f
4
f
F
f
L
f

E
/
/
E
/
/
E
/
/
E
/
/
K
/

N
D
U
O
N
D
U
O
N
O
U
O
N
O
U
O
E
O

1
_
T / I D M T / C
V 1 B L K
0
n
1
T / I D M T / C
V 2 B L K
0
n
0
n
V 3 B L K
0
n
0
n
V 4 B L K
0
n
N
0
n

UV1EN, <UV2EN>

To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.


Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
UV3EN, <UV4EN>
Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3 or UV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3 or

UV4, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.


VTF-UVBLK

To set the VTF block enable of UV, do the following.


Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the VTF function and press the ENTER key. If

disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

173

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
VBLKEN
Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV

blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.


Setting the ZOV protection

The settings for the ZOV protection are as follows:


Select "ZOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.
/ 7
Z
O
V
O
Z
O
V
O

O
f
T
f
O
f
T
f

Z O V
V
f
F
f
V
f
F
f

1
/
/
2
/
/

E
D
Z
O
E
D
Z
O

N
T
V
n
N
T
V
n

1
_
/ I D M T / C
1 B L K
0
0
/ I D M T / C
2 B L K
0

ZOV1EN, <ZOV2EN>

To set the ZOV1 and ZOV2 delay type, do the following.


Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the ZOV1 or ZOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
VTF-ZV1BLK, VTF-ZV1BLK

To set the VTF block enable of ZOV1 and ZOV2, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the VTF function and press the ENTER key. If

disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the NOV protection

The settings for the NOV protection are as follows:


Select "NOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NOV" screen.
/ 7

N O V

N O V 1 E N

174

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
O
V
O
N
O
V
O

f
T
f
O
f
T
f

f
F
f
V
f
F
f

/
/
2
/
/

D
N
O
E
D
N
O

T
V
n
N
T
V
n

/ I D M T / C
1 B L K
0
0
/ I D M T / C
2 B L K
0

NOV1EN, <NOV2EN>

To set the NOV1 and NOV2 delay type, do the following.


Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the NOV1 or NOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
VTF-NV1BLK, < VTF-NV2BLK

To set the VTF block enable of NOV1 and NOV2, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the VTF function and press the ENTER key. If

disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the FRQ protection

The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:
Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/ 7
F
O
F
O
F
O
F
O
D
O
D
O
D
O
D
O

R
f
R
f
R
f
R
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
F
f

F R Q
Q
f
Q
f
Q
f
Q
f
R
f
R
f
R
f
R
f

1
/
2
/
3
/
4
/
Q
/
Q
/
Q
/
Q
/

E
O
E
O
E
O
E
O
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
R

N
F
N
F
N
F
N
F
E
/
E
/
E
/
E
/

/ U F
0
/ U F
0
/ U F
0
/ U F
N
D
N
D
N
D
N
D

0
0
0
0

FRQEN

To set the FRQ scheme enable, do the following.


Enter 1(=OF, overfrequency) or 2(=UF, underfrequency) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the FRQ, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

175

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
DFRQEN

To set the FRQ scheme enable, do the following.


Enter 1(=R, frequency rise rate) or 2(=UF, frequency decay rate) and press the ENTER key.

If disabling the FRQ, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the protection elements

To set the protection elements, do the following.


Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/

6
O
E
S
N
M
C
O
U
Z
N
F
C

P r o t . e l e m e n t
C
F
E
O
i
o
V
V
O
O
R
T

F
C
s c
l d

L o a d

V
V
Q
F / V T F

Setting the OC elements


Select "OC" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OC" screen.
/ 7

O C

O C
4 5
O C 1
1
T O C
1
T O C
1 .
T O C
0
T O C
1 .
O C 2
5
T O C
1
T O C
1 .
T O C
0
T O C
1 .
O C 3
1 0
T O C
0
O C 4

_
A

.
1
.
1
0
1
.
1
0

0 0
s
0
M
0
R
0
R
0

0
0
s
M
0
A

.
2
.
2
0
2
.
2
0

0 0
s
0
M
0
R
0
R
0

0
0
s
M
0
A

. 0 0
3
. 0 0

s
A

176

Directional characteristic setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
2 0 .
T O C 4
0 .
O C 1 0 . 0
O C 1 0 .
O C 1 0 . 0
O C 1 0 . 0
O C 1 0 .
O C 2 0 . 0

0 0
s

0
k
0

0
C
0
k
0

0
k
0
:
:
O C 2 -
0 . 0

0
OC1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
r
0

ditto
ditto

0
OC2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the EF elements
Select "EF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "EF" screen.
/ 7
E F

E F

4 5

Directional characteristic setting

V0 threshold setting for directional characteristic

E F V
3 . 0
E F 1
0
T E F
1 .
T E F
1
T E F
T
E
T
E
T
E

.
1
0
1
.
1
0
E F 1
1 . 0
F 2
3 .
E F 2
1 .
F 3
5 .
E F 3
0 .
F 4
1 0 .

A
3 0
M
0 0

_
s

0
R
.
R
0

0
s
0
M
0
A

0 0
s
0 0
A
0 0
s
0 0
A
0 0

177

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
T E F
0
T R E
0
E F 1
0 .
E F 1
0
E F 1
0 .
E F 1
0 .
E F 1
0
E F 2
0 .

4
.
B
.
0
.
0
0
.
0

0
K
1
k
0

0
C
0
k
0

0
k
0
:
:
E F 2 -
0 . 0

0
s

Delay time of current reverse detection

0
EF1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
r
0

ditto
ditto

0
EF2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the SEF elements
Select "SEF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "SEF" screen.
/ 7
S E

S E F

9 0

S E V

Directional characteristic setting

V0 threshold setting for directional characteristic

3 . 0
S E 1
0 . 0
T S E 1
1 .
T S E 1
1 . 0
T S E 1
0
T S E 1
1 . 0
T S 1 S
0 .
S E 2
0 . 0
T S E 2
1 .
T S E 2
1 . 0
T S E 2

A
1 0
s
0
M
0
R
.
R
0
2
0

0
0
s
0
M
0
s
0
A

1 0
s
0 0
M
0 0
R

178

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

T S
1
S E
0
T S

E
.
3
.
E
0
S E 4
0 .
T S E
0
R P
0
S E 1
0 .
S E 1
0
S E 1
0 .
S E 1
0 .
S E 1
0
S E 2
0 .

0 . 0
2 R M
0 0 0
A
0 1 0
3
. 0 0

s
A

0 10
4
. 0 0

s
W

.
0
.
0
0
.
0

0
k
0

0
C
0
k
0

0
k
0
:
:
S E 2 -
0 . 0

0
SE1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
r
0

ditto
ditto

0
SE2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the NOC elements
Select "NOC" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NOC" screen.
/ 7
N C

N O C

4 5

N C V

Directional characteristic setting

V0 threshold setting for directional characteristic

3 . 0
N C 1
0
T N C
1
T N C
1 .
T N C

.
1
.
1
0
1
0
T N C 1
1 . 0

A
4 0
s
0
M
0
R
.
R
0

0
0
s
0
M
0

179

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
N C 2
0
T N C
1
T N C
1 .
T N C
T N
1
N C
0
N C
N C
0
N C
0
N C
N C
0
N C

A
.
2
.
2
0
2
0
2
0
0
.
0
0
.
0

2 0

0
M
0
R
.
C
R
.
0
1
k
.
0
1

0
0
1
C
.
0
1
k
.
0
1

0
0
2
k
.
0
:
:
2 -
0 . 0

s
0
0
s
0
M
0
NC1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
r
0

ditto
ditto

0
NC2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the Misc. protection elements
Select "Misc." on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7
U C 1
0
T U C
1
U C 2
0
T U C
1
T H M
1
T H M
0
T T H
1
T H M

M i s c .
A
. 2 0
1
. 0 0

_
s
A

. 4 0
2
. 0 0

s
A

.
I
.
M
0
A

0 0
P
0 0

A
m i n

. 0
%
8 0

B C D

180

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
0
T B C
1
C B F
0
T B T
0
T R T
0
I C D

. 2 0
D
. 0 0

s
A

.
C
.
C
.
-

5 0
s
5 0

4
2
1
I C D O C
0 . 1

s
0
f
5

%
A

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the Cold Load protection elements
Select "Cold Load" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "Cold Load" screen.
/ 7
O C 1
2
O C 2
5
O C 3
2 0
O C 4
4 0
E F 1
2
E F 2
5
E F 3
2 0
E F 4
4 0
S E 1
0 .
S E 2
0 .
S E 3
0 .
S E 4
0 .
N C 1
0
N C 2
0
B C D
0

C o l d

l o a d
A

. 0 0

_
A

. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
0 2 0
A
0 2 0
A
0 2 0
A
0 2 0
A
. 8 0
A
. 4 0
. 4 0

181

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
T C L
1
T C L
1
I C L
0
T C L
0

E
0
R
0
D
.
D
.

s
0
s
0
O
5 0
O
0 0

A
s

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the OV elements
Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/ 7

O V

O V 1
1 2 0
T O V 1
1 .
T O V 1
1 .
T O V 1
0
O V 1 D

. 0
0
M
0
R
.
P
9

O V 2
1 4 0 .
:
:
O V 2 D P
9
O V 3
2 4 0 .
T O V 3
1 . 0
O V 3 D P
9
O V 4
2 4 0 .
T O V 4
1 . 0
O V 4 D P
9
O V 1 - k
1 . 0
O V 1 -
1 . 0
O V 1 - C
0 . 0 0
O V 2 - k

OV1 Threshold setting.

OV1 Definite time delay.

0
OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
0
0
R
5

OV1 Definite time reset delay.

OV1 DO/PU ratio

OV2 Threshold setting.

OV2 DO/PU ratio

OV3 Threshold setting.

OV3 Definite time delay.

OV3 DO/PU ratio

OV4 Threshold setting.

OV4 Definite time delay.

OV4 DO/PU ratio

0
R
5
0
0
R
5
0
0
R
5

OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting


0
ditto
0
ditto
0
OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

182

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
1
O V 2
1
O V 2
0 .

.
.
0

0 0

0 0
C
0 0

ditto
ditto

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the UV elements
Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/ 7
U V 1
6
T U V
1
T U V
1
T U V
U V 2
4
T U V
1
U V 3
4
T U V
1
U V 4
4
T U V
1
V B L
1
U V 1
1
U V 1
1
U V 1
0 .
U V 2
1
U V 2
1
U V 2
0 .

U V

0
1
.
1
.
1
0

. 0
0 0
M
0 0
R
. 0

0 . 0
2
. 0 0
0 . 0
3
. 0 0
0
4
.
K
0
.
.
0
.
.
0

UV1 Threshold setting.

UV1 Definite time delay.

_
UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
s

UV1 Definite time reset delay.

UV2 Threshold setting.

UV2 Definite time setting.

UV3 Threshold setting.

UV3 Definite time setting.

UV4 Threshold setting.

UV4 Definite time setting.

UV Blocking threshold

. 0
0 0
.
k
0

0
C
0
k
0

0
C
0

0
UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

183

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the ZOV elements
Select "ZOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.
/ 7

Z O V

Z O V
2
T Z O
1
T Z O
1
T Z O

1
0
V
.
V
.
V
0
2
0
V
.
V
.
V
0
1
.
1
.
1
0
2
.
2
.
2
0

Z O V
4
T Z O
1
T Z O
1
T Z O
Z O V
1
Z O V
1
Z O V
0 .
Z O V
1
Z O V
1
Z O V
0 .

.
1
0
1
0
1
.
.
2
0
2
0
2
.
0
0
0
0
0
0

ZOV1 Threshold setting.

ZOV1 Definite time setting.

0
M
0
R
0

ZOV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.


s

ZOV1 Definite time reset delay.

ZOV2 Threshold setting.

ZOV2 Definite time setting.

0
0
M
0
R
0
k
0

0
C
0
k
0

0
C
0

ZOV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.


s

ZOV2 Definite time reset delay.


ZOV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
ditto
ditto
ZOV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
ditto
ditto

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the NOV protection elements
Select "NOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NOV" screen.
/ 7

N O V

N O V
2
T N O
1

1
0 . 0
V 1
. 0 0

NOV1 Threshold setting.

NOV1 Definite time setting.

184

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
T N O V 1 M
1 . 0 0
T N O V 1 R
0 . 0
N O V 2
4 0 . 0
T N O V 2
1 . 0 0
T N O V 2 M
1 . 0 0
T N O V 2 R
0 . 0
N O V 1 - k
1 . 0 0
N O V 1 -
1 . 0 0
N O V 1 - C
0 . 0 0 0
N O V 2 - k
1 . 0 0
N O V 2 -
1 . 0 0
N O V 2 - C
0 . 0 0 0

NOV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.


s

NOV1 Definite time reset delay.

NOV2 Threshold setting.

NOV2 Definite time setting.


NOV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.

NOV2 Definite time reset delay.


NOV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
ditto
ditto
NOV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
ditto
ditto

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the FRQ elements
Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/ 7

F R Q

F R Q 1
1 . 0
T F R Q 1
1 . 0
F R Q 2
1 . 0
T F R Q 2
1 . 0
F R Q 3
1 . 0
T F R Q 3
1 . 0
F R Q 4
1 . 0
T F R Q 4
1 . 0
F V B L K
4 0 .
D F R Q 1

H z
0

0
H z
0
0
H z
0
0
H z
0

0
V
0
H z s

185

UV Blocking threshold

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
0
D F R Q
0
D F R Q
0
D F R Q
0

.
2
.
3
.
4
.

5
H z s
5
H z s
5
H z s
5

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the CTF/VTF elements
Select "CTF/VTF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "CTF/VTF" screen.
/ 7

C T F / V T F

E F F
0
Z O V
2
U V F
5

A
. 2 0
F
0 . 0

_
V
V

1 . 0

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the autoreclose function

To set the autoreclose function, do the following.


Select "ARC" on the "Group " screen to display the "ARC" screen.
/ 5
A R C
s w
S c h e m e
e l e m e n t
A R C

Setting the scheme switch


Select "Scheme sw" on the "ARC" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/

6
G
O
E
S
M

S c h e m e
e n e r a l
C
F
E F
i s c

s w

186

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
General
Select "General" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose mode.
/ 7
A
O
A
S
V
O
D
O
V
A
V
P
3
B

R
f
R
1
C
f
f
f
T
/
T
H
P
u

G e n e r a l
C
f
C
/
H
f
E
f
P
B
H
s

E
/
S
K
/
N
/
H
/
R
G
/

N
0
_
O n
N U M
0
2 / S 3 / S 4 / S 5
0
L D / D L / D D / S
0
O n
S E L
0
C
A T E
0
/ P H - P H
V T
0
L i n e

ARCEN
Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or to disable the autoreclose.
ARC-NUM
Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 to set the number of shot.

Enter 0 (= S1) to perform single-shot autoreclosing.


Enter 1 (= S2) to perform two-shot autoreclosing..
Enter 2 (= S3) to perform three-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 3 (= S4) to perform four-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 4 (= S5) to perform five-shot autoreclosing.
VCHK
Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Off) to perform the reclose without voltage and synchronism check.
Enter 1 (= LD) to perform the reclose under "live bus and dead line" condition or with
synchronism check.
Enter 2 (= DL) to perform the reclose under "dead bus and live line" condition or with
synchronism check.
Enter 3 (= DD) to perform the reclose under "dead bus and dead line" condition.
Enter 4 (= S) to perform the reclose with synchronism check.
DfEN
Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the f checking function.


Enter 1 (= On) to use the f checking function.
VTPHSEL
Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.

187

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Enter 0 (= A) not to use A-phase voltage for voltage and synchronism check.
Enter 1 (= B) to use B-phase voltage.
Enter 2 (= C) to use C-phase voltage.
VT-RATE
Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= PH-G) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-earth voltage.


Enter 1 (= PH-PH) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-phase voltage.
3PH-VT
Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Bus) if three-phase voltage is applied to the bus side.


Enter 1 (= Line) if three-phase voltage is applied to the line side..
OC, <EF>, <SEF>
Select "OC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose initiation and trip mode of OC
protection.
/ 7
O
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

C
A
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
O

C
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
O
f

O C
1
/
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
:
:
4
4
f
4
f
4
f
4
f
4
f
4
f
O
f

O
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/

I
n
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I

N
/
1
n
2
n
3
n
4
n
5
n
6
n

I T
0
B l o c k
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t

T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
R
/

I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
D
o

N
1
n
2
n
3
n
4
n
5
n
6
n
n

I T
s t / S e
s t / S e
s t / S e
s t / S e
s t / S e
s t / S e
O C

2
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
0

Enter 1(=INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block the autoreclose by the OC1 trip in
"OC1-INIT". To neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).

188

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Enter 1(=Inst) or 2(=Set) to set the OC1 first trip to Instantaneous trip or Set time delay trip
in the "OC1-TP1". To not use the OC1 trip, enter 0(=Off).
Note: OC1-TP2 to OC1-TP6 show the OC1 second trip to OC1 sixth trip.

For OC2 to OC4, the settings are same as OC1.


Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or to disable the co-ordination for "COORD-OC" and press
the ENTER key.

After changing settings, press the ENTER key.


The setting method for EF and SEF is same as that of OC above.
Misc>
Select "Misc" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the external initiation of the autoreclose.
/ 7

M i s c

E X T - I N I T
0
N A / O n / B l o c k

Enter 1(=On: INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block the autoreclose by the external trip. To
neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
Setting ARC element
Select "ARC element" on the "Group " screen to set timer setting and the threshold setting of
OC, EF and SEF for co-ordination.
/ 6

A R C

e l e m e n t

T R D
6
T D 1
1 0
T R 1
3 1 0
:
:
T D 5
1 0
T R 5
3 1 0
T W
2
T S U
3
T R C
1 0
T A R
1 0
T R S
3
O V B

Y
0 . 0

s
s

. 0 0
s
. 0 0

s
. 0 0
s
. 0 0
s
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
E
.

0 0
s
0
V
0
P
0
T
0

0
s
0
s
0
s
0
V

5 1
U V B

189

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
1 3
O V L

V
5 1

U V L

S Y N U
S Y N O
S Y N D
1
S Y N
S Y
T S
T D
T L
T D
O C
E F
S E
0

1
V
8
V
5
V
5

3
V
3
V
1
V
0
d e g

3 0
N D f
1 . 0 0
Y N
1 . 0 0
B L L
0 . 0 5
B D L
0 . 0 5
B D L
0 . 0 5
- C O
1 . 0 0
- C O
0 . 3 0
- C O
. 0 1 0

H z
s
s
s
s
A
A
A

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "ARC" screen.
Setting group copy

To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/ 3

C o p y

t o

A
B

B
_

Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.

190

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

B i n a r y
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

I / P

Model 110 only.


Model 110 only.
Model 110 only.

Selection of Binary Input


Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.

After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.
/ 3
B I
T i m e r s
F u n c t i o n s

Setting timers
Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4

T i m e r s

P U D
0 . 0 0
D O D
0 . 0 0

Pick-up delay setting

Drop-off delay setting

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
Setting Functions
Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4

F u n c t i o n s

S N S
N o r m / I n v

To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
4.2.6.9

Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRD140 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix C.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.

191

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Appendix H shows the factory default settings.

CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output relay

Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

For Models 110, 400 and 420:


/

2
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

B i n a r y
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

O / P

O
O
O
O
O
O
O

2
B
B
B
B
B
B
H
H
H
H

B
1
2
3
4
5
6
O
O
O
O

O / P

O
O
O
O
O
O
B
B
B
B

For Models 401 and 421:


/

i n a r y

1
2
3
4

Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.

Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/ 3
B O
L o g i c / R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and timer


Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4
L
O
R
I

o
R
e
n

L o g i c / R e s e t
g
/
s
s

i
A
e
/

c
0
_
N D
t
0
D l / D w / L a t

Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

192

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing
and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals
Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4
I n
I n
I n
I n
I n
I n
T B

F u n c t i o n s
#
1 0
#
1 0
#
1 0
#
1 0
#
1 0
#
1 0
O
0 .

1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0

1
2
3
4
5
s

2 0

Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C. Do not assign the signal numbers 471 to 477 and 487 to 490 (signal
names: "BO1 OP" to "BO7 OP" and "HBO1_OP" to "HBO4_OP"). And set the delay time of
timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.


4.2.6.10 LEDs

Six LEDs of the GRD140 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can be
viewed on the LED screen as Virtual LEDs. The signals listed in Appendix C can be assigned to
each LED as follows.

CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2
L E D
L E D
V i r t u a l

L E D

Selection of real LEDs


Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

193

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
/

3
L
L
L
L
L
L

E
E
E
E
E
E

L
D
D
D
D
D
D

E D
1
2
3
4
5
6

Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/ 4
L E D
L o g i c / R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and reset type


Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 5
L
O
R
I

o
R
e
n

L o g i c / R e s e t
g
/
s
s

i
A
e
t

c
N D
t
/ L a t c h

Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.

Assigning signals
Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5
I n

F u n c t i o n s

#
1 0
I n
#
1 0
I n
#
1 0
I n
#
1 0

1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0

1
2
3

Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.


Selection of virtual LEDs
Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.

194

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
/ 3
V i r t u a l
I N D 1
I N D 2

L E D

Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.
/ 4
I N D
R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s

Setting the reset timing


Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5

R e s e t

R e s e t
I n s t / L a t c h

Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals
Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5

F u n c t i o n s

B I T
1
B I T
1

1
0 0 0
2
0 0 1

B I T 8
1 0 0 7

Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).

Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.7

Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs. The password, if set, must be entered in order to enter the test
screens because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section 4.2.6.2.) If the
password trap ser, enter the password in the following screen.
P a s s w o r d
_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a lighting state.

195

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
4.2.7.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/

1
T e
S w i t
B i n a
L o g i

s t
c h
r y
O / P
c
c i r c u i t

Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.


/ 2
A
O
U
O
C
O
T
O
S
O
I
O

.
f
V
f
L
f
H
f
H
f
E
f

S w i t c h
M
f
T
f
P
f
M
f
O
f
C
f

.
/
S
/
T
/
R
/
T
/
T
/

F
O
T
O
S
S
S
O
N
S
S
O

.
n

0
n
T
0 / S 3
T
n
U M
1 - S 6
T
n

0
0
0
0

Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the
ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=State0) or 2(=State3) to set forcibly the test condition of the Cold Load
Protection (CLPTST) and press the ENTER key.
Enter 1(=On) to set the reset delay time of the thermal overload element to instantaneous reset
for testing (THMRST) and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=S1) or 2(=S2) or 3(=S3) or 4(=S4) or 5(=S5) to set shot number
(SHOTNUM) for autoreclose test and press the ENTER key.
Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit test mode to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the external
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD

196

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
H
D
H
D
H
D
H
D
F
D

O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
B
i
B
i
B
i
B
i
A
i

B i n a r y
1
s
2
s
3
s
4
s
5
s
6
s
7
s
O
s
O
s
O
s
O
s
I
s

O / P

0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
1
0
a b l e / E n a b
2
0
a b l e / E n a b
3
0
a b l e / E n a b
4
0
a b l e / E n a b
L
0
a b l e / E n a b

_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e

Not available for Models 401 and 421.


Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.
Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.
Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.
Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.

Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.7.3 Logic Circuit

It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix C with monitoring
jacks A and B.
Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
/ 2

L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1
_
T e r m B
1 0 0 1
_

Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the ENTER key.

197

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring
jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.
On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.

198

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

4.3

Personal Computer Interface


The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS232C port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
Display of current and voltage waveforms:

Oscillograph display

Symmetrical component analysis:

On arbitrary time span

Harmonic analysis:

On arbitrary time span

Frequency analysis:

On arbitrary time span

For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

4.4

Relay Setting and Monitoring System


The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data
on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual
relays via Ethernet LAN networks using a remote PC as shown in Figure 4.4.1.
TCP/IP
(LAN cable)

Figure 4.4.1

HUB

Relay Setting and Monitoring System

199

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

4.5

IEC 60870-5-103 Interface


The GRD140 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly
used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following
measurand and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)
Measurand data: current, voltage, active power, reactive power, frequency
Status data:

events, fault indications, etc.

The protocol can be used through the RS485 port or the Fibre optic port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors 1.2
and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.

4.6

IEC 61850 Communication


GRD140 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard. Station bus
communication as specified in IEC 61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within
substation control and automation systems via Ethernet LAN.
Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC
61850 communication.

Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network

200

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

4.7

Clock Function
The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
Event records
Disturbance records
Fault records

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP for IEC61850 etc. This can be
selected by setting (see 4.2.6.6.).
The clock synchronise function synchronises the relay internal clock to the BI (connected to
PLC input No.2576 SYNC_CLOCK) by the following method. Since the BI signal is an ON or
OFF signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is
achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if
the synchronising BI signal is input every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an OFF to ON (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the
number of seconds is incremented).
n sec

(n+1) sec
500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec

When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and selected "RSM"
in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM
clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the relay clocks
are synchronised with the external time standard.

201

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

5. Installation
5.1

Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.

5.2

Relay Mounting
A flush mounting relay is included. Appendix F shows the case outline.
For details of relay withdrawal and insertion, see Section 6.7.3.

5.3

Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
Do not take out the relay unit outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules
are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.
Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.

5.4

Handling Precautions
A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability
of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing the relay unit unnecessarily.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to
preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and
manufactured.

CAUTION
Before removing the relay unit, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the
equipment by touching the case.
Use the handle to draw out the relay unit. Avoid touching the electronic components,
printed circuit board or connectors.
Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.

202

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried
out in a Special Handling Area.

5.5

External Connections
External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix G.

203

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

6. Commissioning and Maintenance


6.1

Outline of Commissioning Tests


The GRD140 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the users discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
Reclosing circuit test

204

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

6.2

Cautions
6.2.1

Safety Precautions
CAUTION
The relay rack is provided with an earthing terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is earthed.
When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach
the cover provided on top of it.
Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

6.2.2

Precautions for Testing


CAUTION
While the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.
Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.

205

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

6.3

Preparations
Test equipment

The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.


1 Single-phase current source
1 Three-phase current source
1 Single-phase voltage source
1 Three-phase voltage source
1 DC power supply
3 Phase angle meter
3 AC ammeter
3 AC voltmeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings

Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the users settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet.
Visual inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings

Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the users
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC

When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS232C port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
For details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

206

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

6.4

Hardware Tests
The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and AC current and
voltage sources are required.

6.4.1

User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

LCD display
Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "Err: " screen when the DC voltage is applied.

Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that black dots appear on the whole
screen.
LED display
Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.
Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that remaining five LEDs are lit in
red or yellow. (Programmable LEDs are yellow.)
VIEW and RESET keys
Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Virtual LED" and "Metering"
screens are sequentially displayed on the LCD.
Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.
Other operation keys
Press any key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MENU" screen. Press
the END key to turn off the LCD.
Repeat this for all keys.

6.4.2

Binary Input Circuit


The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.

207

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
GRD140-100, -400, -420
TB2

- A1

BI6
BI7

- B1

BI8
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5

- A8
DC
power
supply

- B8
TB2 -A9

- B9
E
Note: Models 400 and 420 are not provided with BI6 to BI8.

(a) For GRD140-100, -400, -420


GRD140-401, -421
TB2

- A4
- B4
- A8
- B8

DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

- B9

BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5

(b) for GRD140-401, -421


Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit

Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.


/ 2
I P
O P

B i n a r y
I / O
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0

Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A1-B1, A2-B2, ..., A8-B8 of terminal block TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
Note: Models 400 and 420 are not provided with BI6 to BI8.

The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.

6.4.3

Binary Output Circuit


This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays

208

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
the name of the output relay.
/ 2
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
H
D
H
D
H
D
H
D
F
D

O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
B
i
B
i
B
i
B
i
A
i

B i n a r y
1
s
2
s
3
s
4
s
5
s
6
s
7
s
O
s
O
s
O
s
O
s
I
s

O / P

0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
1
0
a b l e / E n a b
2
0
a b l e / E n a b
3
0
a b l e / E n a b
4
0
a b l e / E n a b
L
0
a b l e / E n a b

_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e

Not available for Models 401 and 421.


Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.
Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.
Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.
Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.

Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.


After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.
Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation

6.4.4

AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying known values of voltage and current to the AC input
circuits and verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD
screen.
The testing circuits are shown in Figures 6.4.2 and 6.4.3. A three-phase voltage source and a
single-phase current source are required.

209

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
GRD140-110

V
TB1 -1

Single-phase
voltage
source

-2
TB1 -5

Single-phase
current
source

-6
-7
-8

DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9

Ie
Ise

Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit for Model 110


GRD140-40 or -42
V

Three-phase
voltage
a
source
b

V
-A1
-B1

Va
Vb

-A2

Vc

-B2
-A3

TB1 -1

Single-phase
current
source

-B3

-2
TB2 -3
-4
-5
-6

Ves

Ia

Ib
Ic

-7
-8
DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9

Ie or I
se

Figure 6.4.3 Testing AC Input Circuit for Models 40 and 42

Check that the metering data is set to be expressed as secondary values on the "Metering switch"
screen.

"Settings" sub-menu "Status" screen "Metering switch" screen


If the setting is Display Value = Primary, change the setting in the "Metering switch".
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.

"Status" sub-menu "Metering" screen


Apply AC rated voltages and currents and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the
input values.

210

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

6.5

Function Test
CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.
Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.

6.5.1

Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A
or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to
each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.
/ 2

L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1
_
T e r m B
4 8
_

When a signal number is entered for the Term A line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A
and when entered for the Term B line, it is observed at monitoring jack B.
Note:

The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for
logic level "0".

CAUTION

Use test equipment with more than 1 k of internal impedance when observing the output
signal at the monitoring jacks.
Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.

In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] and [APPLVES] settings are selected 3P
and 3PV.
Note: Operating time test of measuring relay elements at monitoring jack A or B is not
including the operation of binary output. Whole the operating time test, if required,
should be measured at a binary output relay.

211

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
6.5.1.1

Overcurrent and undercurrent element OC1 to OC4, UC1, UC2 and CBF and Earth fault
element EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF4

The overcurrent element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
Operating current check

Figure 6.5.1 shows a testing circuit. The operating current value is checked by increasing or
decreasing the magnitude of the current applied.
GRD140

Single-phase
current
source

TB1 -(*)

-(*)

Monitoring
jack
DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9

A
0V

DC
voltmeter

0V
(): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Current Value Test

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.


The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element

Signal No.

Element

Signal No.

Element

Signal No.

Element

Signal No.

OC1-A

101

EF1

131

SEF1

141

UC1-A

161

OC2-A

107

EF2

133

SEF2

143

UC2-A

164

OC3-A

113

EF3

135

SEF3

145

CBF-A

173

OC4-A

116

EF4

136

SEF4

146

Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
Set the scheme switches [-DIR] to NON.
Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.

212

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Operating time check for IDMT curve

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.2.


GRD140
A

Single-phase
current
source

TB1 ()
- ()

Monitoring
jack
DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9

A
0V

E
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
(): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.

Figure 6.5.2 Testing IDMT

One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
Element

Signal No.

OC1-A

101

EF1

131

SEF1

141

Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MOC1, MEF1 or MSE1 on the
"OC", "EF" or "SEF" screen.
Example: "Settings" sub-menu "Protection" screen "Group" screen "OC" screen
The test procedure is as follows:

Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.

Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 Is to 20 Is, where Is is the current setting.

Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1. (For the accuracy, refer to Appendix K.)

If checking the dependent time reset characteristic, use the output signal numbers 576 to 587
(_DEPRST). These signals output 1(logic level) when the value of internal time delay
counter is down to 0 in Figure 6.5.2.1 Dependent time reset characteristic in accordance with
IEC 60255-151.

213

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Signal _DEPRST outputs 1.

Signal _DEPRST outputs 1.

Figure 6.5.2.1 Dependent time reset characteristic

6.5.1.2

Directional characteristic test

The directional characteristic is checked as follows:


OC element for Models 40 and 42

The test circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.3.


GRD140-40 and -42

TB2 -A1

Va

-B1

Vb

-A2

Vc

-B2

a
Three-phase
voltage
b
source

Monitoring
jack

Single-phase
current
source

DC
power
supply

TB1 -1

Ia

-2

TB2 -A9

-B9
(E)

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.3 Testing OC Element

OC elements and their output signal number are shown in Section 6.5.1.1.

214

A
0V

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The following shows the case when testing OC1.
Select "Logic circuit" on the Test screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
Enter the signal number to be observed at monitoring jack as shown in Section 6.5.1.
Set the scheme switch [OC1-DIR] to FWD.
Apply three-phase rated voltage and single-phase test current IT (= Ia).
Set IT to lag Vbc by OC characteristic angle OC . (The default setting of OC is -45.)
Changing the magnitude of IT while retaining the phase angle with the voltages, and measure
the current at which the element operates. Check that the measured current magnitude is within
5% of the current setting.
EF element

The test circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.4.


GRD140

TB1 or TB2

-(*)
Residual voltage

Single-phase
voltage
source

-(*)
Monitoring
jack

Single-phase
current
source

DC
power
supply

TB1 -(*)

Ie or Ise

A
0V

-(*)

TB2 -A9

-B9
E

DC
voltmeter
Note: Connect the terminal number of residual voltage input and residual current
input or zero sequence current input for SEF as shown in Table 3.2.1.

Figure 6.5.4

Testing EF and SEF Elements

EF elements and their output signal number are shown in Section 6.5.1.1.
The following shows the case when testing EF1.
Select Logic circuit on the Test menu screen to display the Logic circuit screen.
Enter the signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A as shown in Section 6.5.1.
Set the scheme switch [EF1-DIR] to FWD.
Apply the rated voltage VT (= V0) and single-phase test current IT.
Set IT to lag V0 by EF characteristic angle EF . (The default setting of EF is -45.)
Changing the magnitude of IT while retaining the phase angle with the voltages, and measure
the current at which the element operates. Check that the measured current magnitude is within
5% of the current setting.

215

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
SEF element

The test circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.4.


SEF elements and their output signal number are shown in Section 6.5.1.1.
The following shows the case when testing SEF1.
Select Logic circuit on the Test menu screen to display the Logic circuit screen.
Enter the signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A as shown in Section 6.5.1.
Set the scheme switch [SE1-DIR] to FWD.
Apply the rated voltage VT (= V0) and single-phase test current IT (= Ise).
Set IT to lag V0 by SEF characteristic angle SE . (The default setting of SE is 0.)
Changing the magnitude of IT while retaining the phase angle with the voltages, and measure
the current at which the element operates. Check that the measured current magnitude is within
5% of the current setting.
6.5.1.3

Thermal overload element THM-A and THM-T

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.2.


The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element

Signal No.

THM-A

167

THM-T

168

Set the scheme switch [THMRST]() to "ON".


Note (*): While the switch [THMRST] is set to "ON", the thermal state instantly resets to 0% when
applying the input current to 0 (zero).

Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current
should be between 1.2 Is to 10 Is, where Is is the current setting.

CAUTION
After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after checking that the THM% has
become 0 on the "Metering" screen.
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.5. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
6.5.1.4

Negative sequence overcurrent element NOC1 and NOC2

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.5.


The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element

Signal No.

NOC1

169

NOC2

171

216

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
Apply the three-phase balance current and the operating current value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the current applied.

Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.


GRD140
Ia

TB1 -1

-2

Three-phase
Current
source

Ib

-3

-4
Ic

-5

-6

DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9

Monitoring
jack

A
0V

E
DC
voltmeter

0V

Figure 6.5.5 Testing NOC elements

Directional characteristic test of NOC element

The test circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.6.


GRD140

Va

TB2 -A1

Vb

Three-phase
voltage
source

-B1

Vc

-A2
-B2
Monitoring
jack

Ia

TB1 -1

-3

-2

Three-phase
Current
source

Ib
Ic

-4
-5

-6

DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9
E

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.6 Testing Directional Characteristic of NOC Element

217

A
0V

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The following shows the case when testing NOC1.
Select "Logic circuit" on the Test screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
Enter the signal number to be observed at monitoring jack as shown in Section 6.5.1.
Set the scheme switch [NC1-DIR] to FWD.
Apply three-phase balance voltage and three-phase balance current.
Set Ia to lag Va by NOC characteristic angle NC . (The default setting of NC is -45.)

Changing the magnitude of three-phase balance current while retaining the phase angle with
the voltages, and measure the current Ia at which the element operates. Check that the
measured current magnitude is within 5% of the current setting.

6.5.1.5

Broken conductor detection element BCD

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.7.


GRD140
Ia
Three-phase
Current
source

TB1 -1

-3

-2
Ib

-4
Ic

-5

-6
Monitoring
jack

DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9

A
0V

E
DC
voltmeter

0V

Figure 6.5.7 Testing BCD element

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.


The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
BCD

Signal No.
172

Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
Apply the three-phase balance current at 10% of the rated current and interrupt a phase
current.

Then, check the BCD element operates.


6.5.1.6

Cold load protection

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.


To check the cold load protection function, the scheme switch [CLPTST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used. Test the item of OC1 shown in Section 6.5.1.1.

218

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S0".

Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of normal setting group.
Next, set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S3".

Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of cold load setting of CLP-OC1.
6.5.1.7

Overvoltage and undervoltage elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.8.


GRD140

Variable-

TB2

Voltage source

DC
power
supply

-(*)
-(*)

TB2 -A9

-B9

Monitoring
jack

A
0V

E
DC
voltmeter

0V
(): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.

Figure 6.5.8 Operating Value Test Circuit

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.


Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal number are listed below.
Element
OV1-A
OV2-A
OV3-A
OV4-A
UV1-A
UV2-A
UV3-A
UV4-a
ZOV1
ZOV2

Signal No.
191
197
515
518
201
207
525
528
211
213

Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, OV4, ZOV1, ZOV2
Apply a rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.8.
Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within 5% of the setting.
Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3, UV4
Apply a rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.8.

219

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within 5% of the setting.
Operating time check of OV1, UV1, ZOV1 IDMT curves
Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time.
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.2.1 and 2.2.2. Check the measured operating time.
6.5.1.8

Negative sequence overvoltage element NOV1 and NOV2

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.9.


GRD140
Va
Three-phase
Voltage
source

TB2 -A1

Vb

-B1

Vc
VN

-A2
-B2
Monitoring
jack

DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9

A
0V

DC
voltmeter

0V

Figure 6.5.9 Testing NOV elements

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.


The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element

Signal No.

NOV1

214

NOV2

216

Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
Apply the three-phase balance voltage and the operating voltage value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.

Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.


Operating time check of NOV1 IDMT curve
Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time.
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.2.4. Check the measured operating time.

220

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
6.5.1.9

Frequency Elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.10.


GRD140

VariableFrequency /

Voltage source

DC
power
supply

TB2

-A1
-B2

TB2 -A9

-B9

Monitoring
jack

A
0V

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.10 Operating Value Test Circuit

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.


Frequency elements and their output signal number are listed below.
Element

Signal No.

FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
FRQBLK

218
219
220
221
222

Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4


Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
Apply a rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.10.

In case of overfrequency characteristic,


Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within 0.005Hz of the setting.

In case of underfrequency characteristics,


Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that
the measured value is within 0.005Hz of the setting.
Undervoltage block test, FRQBLK
Apply a rated voltage and change the magnitude of frequency to operate an element.
Keep the frequency that the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the voltage
applied from the rated voltage to less than FRQBLK setting voltage. And then, check that
the element resets.
6.5.1.10 Voltage and Synchronism Check Elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.11.

221

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
GRD140

Single-phase
voltage

source

Single-phase
voltage

source

TB2 -A1
-B2

-A3
-B3

VL

VB

Monitoring
jack

A
0V

DC
power
supply

TB2 -A9

-B9
E

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.11 Operating Voltage Value Test Circuit

Voltage and synchronism check elements and their output signal number are listed below.
Element

Signal No.

OVB

534

UVB

536

OVL

533

UVL

535

SYN

532

Voltage check element OVB, UVB, OVL


Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
Enter a signal number for the Term A line to observe at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
Apply a rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.11.

OVB and UVB :


Adjust the magnitude of the voltage applied to terminal TB2-A3 and -B3 and measure the
value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the
setting.

OVL and UVL :


Adjust the magnitude of the voltage applied to terminal TB-A1 and B2 and measure the
value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the
setting.
Synchronism check element SYN
Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.

222

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Enter a signal number 532 for the TermA line to observe at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
Apply rated voltages VB and VL as shown Figure 6.5.11.

Voltage check:
Set the [DfEN] to "OFF", and set the voltage to any value over the SYNOV setting. (The
default setting of SYNOV is 51 V.)

Whilst keeping VL in-phase with VB, increase the single-phase voltage VL from zero volts.
Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that the measured voltage is
within 5% of the SYNUV setting.
Further increase VL and measure the voltage at that the element resets. Check that the
measured voltage is within 5% of the SYNOV setting.
To check the SYNDV detector, set the VB to a fixed value and increase the VL from zero
volts. Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that | VL VB| is within
5% of the SYNDV setting.

Phase angle check:


Set the [DfEN] to "OFF", and set VB and VL to any value between the SYNOV and
SYNUV settings keeping VB in-phase with VL. Then the SYN element operates.
Shift the angle of VL from that of VB, and measure the angle at which the element resets.
Check that the measured angle is within 5 of the SYN setting. (The default setting of
SYN is 30.)
Change VB and VL, and repeat the above.

Frequency difference check:


Set the [DfEN] to "ON", and set VB and VL to a rated voltage and rated frequency. Then
the SYN element operates.
Shift the frequency of VL and measure the frequency at which the element resets.
Check that |(frequency of VL) (frequency of VB)| is within 5% of the SYNDf setting.
(The default setting of SYNDf is 1.00Hz.)

223

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
6.5.2

Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays after a simulated fault occurs.
Circuit Breaker failure tripping
Set the scheme switch [BTC] to "ON" and [RTC] to "DIR" or "OC".
Apply a fault, retain it and input an external trip signal. Check that the retrip output relays
operate after the time setting of the TRTC and the adjacent breaker tripping output relay
operates after the time setting of the TBTC.

6.5.3

Metering and Recording


The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix D. There are internal events and external events by binary
input commands. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the status of
binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test
(see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record" screen is
correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details
on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.

224

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

6.6

Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1

On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system
voltage and their phase angle with the metering displays on the LCD screen.
Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.
Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.

/ 3
I a
I b
I c
I e
I s e
I 1
I 2
I 0
I 2 /
T H M
V a
V b
V c
V e s
V a b
V b c
V c a
V 1
V 2
V 0
f
P F
P
Q
S

C u r r e



I 1

- .
-
-
-
Note:

t
.

.
.

.
.
.

Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P setting in models 40 and 42.

Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.

Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P setting in models 40 and 42.

A
A

k A

k A

Not available for model 40.


Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.

%
k V

k V

k V

k V

k V

k V

k V

k V

k V

k V

H z

Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P setting in models 40 and 42.
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.

Not available for model 110.


Not available for model 110.
Not available for model 110.
Not available for model 110.
Not available for model 110.
Not available for model 110.
Not available for model 110.
Not available for model 110. Total 3 phase power factor.

k W
k v a r
k V A

Not available for model 110. Total 3 phase active power.


Not available for model 110. Total 3 phase reactive power.
Not available for model 110. Total 3 phase apparent power.

The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by
the setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)

225

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Directional check of Directional phase overcurrent element

The rightness of the polarity of directional phase overcurrent element is verified if current and
voltage values and their phase angle are all right in above metering check. Further, it can be also
checked as follows:
Select Direction on the Metering screen to display Direction screen, and then the
direction of current is displayed. (See Section 4.2.4.1.) Check the direction of current is
correct.
Note: Not available for models 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.

Directional check of Directional earth fault element

The rightness of the polarity of directional earth fault element is verified if current and voltage
values and their phase angle are all right in above metering check. Further, if required, it can be
also checked as follows:
Check the operation of this element by simulating the unbalanced condition of three phase
voltages and currents.
Note: Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.

CAUTION: Must block the tripping circuit while checking by simulating the unbalanced
condition. After checking, must return the connections to their original state.

6.6.2

Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test


The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
Set the breaker to be closed.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
H
D
H
D
H

O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
B
i
B
i
B

B i n a r y
1
s
2
s
3
s
4
s
5
s
6
s
7
s
O
s
O
s
O

O / P

0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
1
0
a b l e / E n a b
2
0
a b l e / E n a b
3
0

_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_

Not available for Models 401 and 421.


Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.
Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.
Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.

226

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
D
H
D
F
D

i
B
i
A
i

s
O
s
I
s

a b l e / E n a b l e
4
0
_
a b l e / E n a b l e
L
0
_
a b l e / E n a b l e

Not available for Models 110, 400 and 420.

BO1 to BO7 and HBO1 to HBO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.
Enter 1 for BO1 and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N

Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO1 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
Repeat the above for BOs.
Reclosing circuit
Ensure that the circuit breaker is open.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
Select the BO number which is an autoreclose command output relay with one normally open
contact.
Note: The autoreclose command is assigned to any of the output relays by the user setting

Operate the BO by the same manner as above.

227

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

6.7

Maintenance
6.7.1

Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures
are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.

6.7.2

Failure Tracing and Repair


Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of
FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1
shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message
Relay Unit

Failure location
CB or
AC cable
cable

Err: SUM
Err: ROM
Err: RAM
Err: CPU
Err: Invalid
Err: NMI
Err: BRAM
Err: EEP
Err: A/D
Err: SP
Err: DC
Err: TC

(Flash memory)
(ROM data)
(SRAM)
(CPU)

(Backup RAM)
(EEPROM)
(A/D converter)
(Sampling)
(DC power supply circuit)
(Tripping circuit)(1)

Err: CT, Err: V0, Err: V2

(AC input circuit)(1)

Err: CB

(Circuit breaker)(1)

Err: CTF

(AC input circuit)(2)

(1)

Err: VTF1, Err: VTF2

(AC input circuit)(2)

(1)

PLC, IEC61850 data

(2)
(2)
(2)

Err: PLC

(PLC data)

Err: MAP

(IEC61850 mapping data)

Err: RTC

(SNTP setting)

Err: LAN

(Ethernet LAN)

Err: GOOSE

(GOOSE subscribe)

Err: Ping

(Ping response)

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power

228

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the DC
power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit
in both cases after checking if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.
If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.

6.7.3

Replacing Failed Relay Unit


If the failure is identified to be in the relay unit and the user has a spare relay unit, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed relay unit.
Repair at the site should be limited to relay unit replacement. Maintenance at the component level
is not recommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software
type form) as the removed relay.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay unit

CAUTION

After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.

The procedure of relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:


Switch off the DC power supply.

WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

Disconnect the trip outputs.


Short-circuit all AC current inputs. Open all AC voltage inputs.
Unscrew the relay front cover.
Unscrew the binding screw on the handle.
To remove the relay unit from its case, pull up the handle and pull the handle towards you. (See
Figure 6.7.1.)
Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.

CAUTION

To avoid risk of damage:


Keep the handle up when inserting the relay unit into the case.
Do not catch the handle when carrying the relay unit.
Check that the relay unit and its case have the identical Model Number
when inserting the relay unit.

229

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

IN SERVICE
VIEW
TRIP
ALARM

IN SERVICE
VIEW
TRIP
ALARM

RESET

RESET

0V CAN ENTER
CEL

END

0V CAN ENTER
CEL

END

Handle

Pull up handle

Bind screw

Figure 6.7.1 Handle of Relay Unit

6.7.4

Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to restore the relay to the service.
Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.

6.7.5

Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C is
recommended for long-term storage.

230

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

7. Putting Relay into Service


The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the
commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
Check that all the external connections are correct.
Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock
are correct.

In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are
recorded during the tests.
Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Alarm view"
screen.
Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.

231

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

232

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix A
Programmable Reset Characteristics
and Implementation of Thermal Model
to IEC60255-8

233

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Programmable Reset Characteristics


The overcurrent stages for phase and earth faults, OC and EF, each have a programmable reset feature.
Resetting may be instantaneous, definite time delayed, or, in the case of IEEE/US curves, inverse time
delayed.
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme. On the other hand, the inverse reset
characteristic is particularly useful to provide correct co-ordination with an upstream induction disc type
overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(pecking or flashing) fault conditions. An example of where such phenomena may be experienced is
in plastic insulated cables, where the fault energy melts the cable insulation and temporarily
extinguishes the fault, after which the insulation again breaks down and the process repeats.
An inverse time overcurrent protection with instantaneous resetting cannot detect this condition until the
fault becomes permanent, thereby allowing a succession of such breakdowns to occur, with associated
damage to plant and danger to personnel. If a definite time reset delay of, for example, 60 seconds is
applied, on the other hand, the inverse time element does not reset immediately after each successive
fault occurrence. Instead, with each new fault inception, it continues to integrate from the point reached
during the previous breakdown, and therefore operates before the condition becomes permanent. Figure
A-1 illustrates this theory.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL

Inverse Time Relay


with Instantaneous
Reset
RX
RX

Inverse Time Relay


with Definite Time
Reset
Delayed Reset

Figure A-1

234

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8


Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time
constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
=

t
I2
1 e 100%
2

I AOL

(1)

where:
= thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
= thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where
0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at which no further
temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for
any given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output when =
100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 100%), with time
constant , as in Figure A-2. If = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.

(%)
100%
I2

I AOL

100%
2

I I 2 1 e
AOL

100 %

t (s)
Figure A-2

A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 Hot and Cold curves.

I2
t =Ln 2 2
I I AOL

(1)

Cold curve

I2 I 2
t =Ln 2 2P
I I AOL

(2)

Hot curve

where:

235

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
IP = prior load current.

In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering
for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure A-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and
is then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient
temperature.

()

Overload Current
Condition

Trip at 100%

100%

Normal Load
Current Condition

Cooling Curve

t (s)

Figure A-3

236

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix B
Directional Earth Fault Protection and
Power System Earthing

237

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Directional Earth Fault Protection and Power System Earthing


Power systems may be solidly earthed, impedance earthed or unearthed (insulated). Depending
on the method used, faults to earth have widely differing characteristics, and so methods of earth
fault protection differ greatly between the various types of system.

1. Solidly earthed systems


In a solidly earthed system the neutral points of the power transformers are connected directly to
earth, for the purposes of reducing overvoltages and facilitating fault detection. The
disadvantage of solid earthing is that fault currents can be very high, and must be disconnected
quickly.
Since the impedance of the source is normally very low, fault current varies greatly in
magnitude depending on the location of the fault. Selective isolation of a faulty section is
therefore possible via time/current graded earth fault overcurrent protection. Fault current is
detected by measuring the system residual current.
On an interconnected system, where fault current can flow in either direction, then directional
earth fault relays are applied. The fault causes a residual voltage to be generated, and this can be
used for directional polarization. Residual current and voltage can be measured as shown in
Figure B-1.
Residual current IR is equal in magnitude and direction to the fault current. It typically lags the
faulted phase voltage by a considerable angle due to the reactance of the source. Directional
control is achieved by polarising against the system residual voltage, which may be found either
by summating the phase voltages, or it may be extracted from the open delta connected
secondary (or tertiary) winding of a five limb VT, as shown in the diagram.
A directional earth fault relay protecting a solidly earthed system is normally connected to
measure VR inverted. If GRD140 is applied to derive residual voltage from the phase voltages
then the inversion of VR is performed internally.
F

51N

67
V an

Prefault
V cn

IR

V an

Ia

Post-fault

Earth
n
V bn

V cn

V bn
VR

Figure B-1 Directional Earth Fault Protection for Solidly Earthed Systems

238

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
The relay characteristic angle setting is applied to compensate for lag of the fault current.
Generally accepted angle settings are -45 for solidly earthed distribution systems and -60 for
transmission systems.
Due to system imbalances and measuring tolerances, small levels of residual voltage can be
present during normal operating conditions. Therefore, GRD140 provides a voltage threshold
which must be exceeded before the directional protection will operate. Although this threshold is
user programmable, most applications will be satisfied by the default setting of 3V.

2. Unearthed (insulated) systems


An insulated system has no intentional connection to earth, although all systems are in fact
earthed by natural capacitive coupling. Fault current is very low, being made up of capacitive
charging currents, thus limiting damage to plant. However, high steady-state and transient
overvoltages are produced, and selective isolation of faults is difficult.
An earth fault on an ungrounded system causes a voltage shift between the neutral point and
earth, and the fault can be detected by measuring this shift. So called neutral voltage
displacement protection is commonly applied but, unfortunately, the shift in voltage is
essentially the same throughout the system and so this method cannot selectively isolate a
faulted section.
The method of directional earth fault protection described previously for solidly earthed systems
cannot be used in the case of insulated systems because of the absence of real fault current.
However, an alternative method can be applied, using GRD140 directional sensitive earth fault
protection. The relay must be connected using a core balance CT, to measure the flow of
capacitive charging currents, which become unbalanced in the event of a fault.
A phase to earth fault effectively short circuits that phases capacitance to earth for the whole
system, thus creating an unbalance in the charging currents for all feeders connected to the
system. The resulting fault current is made up of the sum of the combined residual charging
currents for both the faulty and healthy feeders.

239

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
A
B
C

51N

51N

F
IF
IU2

IU1

-VR

IU3+....
Healthy
feeder

V an

Faulty
feeder

Earth (e)
IR1
Ib

n
V cn

IU2(=IR2)
Ic

IU1

IU1

IF=IU1+IU2+IU3+...
V bn

V an

V cn

n
V bn

Figure B-2 Residual Current Flow in an Unearthed System

It can be shown that the residual current measured in the faulty feeder is 180 out of phase with
that in the healthy feeder, as illustrated in Figure B-2 This fact can be used to apply a GRD140
directional sensitive earth fault relay. The polarising voltage used for directional earth fault
relays is normally -VR (the residual voltage inverted), and it can be seen that the residual current
(IR1) for the faulty feeder leads this voltage by 90. For the healthy feeders the residual current
lags the voltage by 90. Therefore, the GRD140 sensitive earth fault protection should be
applied with a characteristic angle of +90 so as to provide discriminatory protection.
The residual current in the faulted phase is equal to three times the per phase charging current,
and the sensitive earth fault element should be set well below this value to ensure operation
(30% of this value is typical).

3. Impedance earthing
In between the two extremes of solidly earthed and unearthed systems there are a variety of
compromise solutions, which normally involve connecting the system neutrals to earth via a
resistance or reactance.
3a. Resistance earthing
In the case of resistance earthed systems, GRD140 directional earth fault relays can normally be
applied in a similar manner to that for solidly earthed systems, with the exceptions that current
settings will be lower and the characteristic angle setting will probably be different. In the event
of a fault, it is the resistance in the neutral which predominates in the source impedance, and so
the residual current lags its polarising voltage by a much smaller angle. Characteristic angle

240

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
settings of -15 or 0 are common.
3b. Reactance earthing
Reactance earthed systems are also common in many countries. A special case of this method is
known as Petersen coil, or resonant, earthing. The inductance in the neutral is chosen to cancel
the total capacitance of the system so that no current flows into an earth fault.
Directional sensitive earth fault protection can again be applied by detecting the unbalance in
charging currents. It can be shown that the residual current distribution for healthy and faulty
feeders is as illustrated in Figure B-3.
In the case of the healthy feeder, the residual current lags the polarising voltage (-VR) by more
than 90, while for the faulty feeder, the angle is less than 90. GRD140 directional sensitive
earth fault protection can be applied, with a 0 characteristic angle. Note that the SEF boundary
of directional operation should be set to 90. The residual current for the healthy feeder then
falls in the restraint zone, while for the faulty feeder it lies in the operate zone, thus providing
selective isolation of the fault.
-V R

-V R

Healthy
feeder

Faulty
feeder

Earth (e)

V an

V an

IR1

Operate Zone
n
V cn

V bn

Restraint Zone
IR2
V cn

n
V bn

Figure B-3 Residual Current Flow in a Resonant Earthed System

3c. Reactance Earthing and Residual Power Control


GRD140 can provide an additional restraint on operation by the (optional) residual power
control feature. The active component of residual power can be calculated as follows:

PR I R V R cos
where is the phase angle between the residual current (IR) and the polarising voltage (-VR).
It is clear from Figure B-3 that this value will be positive when measured at the faulty feeder and
negative anywhere else. GRD140 directional sensitive earth fault protection can be applied with
a power threshold such that operation is permitted when residual power exceeds the setting and
is in the operate direction.

241

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

242

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix C
Signal List

243

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No. Signal Name
0 CONSTANT_0
1 CONSTANT_1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80

Contents
constant 0
constant 1

244

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160

Signal Name

Contents

OC1-A
OC1-B
OC1-C
OC1-A_INST
OC1-B_INST
OC1-C INST
OC2-A
OC2-B
OC2-C
OC2-A_INST
OC2-B_INST
OC2-C_INST
OC3-A
OC3-B
OC3-C
OC4-A
OC4-B
OC4-C
OC1-A_HS
OC1-B_HS
OC1-C_HS

OC1-A relay element output


OC1-B relay element output
OC1-C relay element output
OC1-A relay element start
OC1-B relay element start
OC1-C relay element start
OC2-A relay element output
OC2-B relay element output
OC2-C relay element output
OC2-A relay element start
OC2-B relay element start
OC2-C relay element start
OC3-A relay element output
OC3-B relay element output
OC3-C relay element output
OC4-A relay element output
OC4-B relay element output
OC4-C relay element output
High speed output of OC1-A relay
High speed output of OC1-B relay
High speed output of OC1-C relay

EF1
EF1_INST
EF2
EF2_INST
EF3
EF4
CUR-REV_DET.
EF1_HS

EF1 relay element output


EF1 relay element start
EF2 relay element output
EF2 relay element start
EF3 relay element output
EF4 relay element output
Current reversal detection.
High speed output of EF1 relay

SEF1
SEF1_INST
SEF2
SEF2_INST
SEF3
SEF4
SEF1_HS
RPF
RPR
ICD-A
ICD-B
ICD-C

SEF1 relay element output


SEF1 relay element start
SEF2 relay element output
SEF2 relay element start
SEF3 relay element output
SEF4 relay element output
High speed output of SEF1 relay
Residual power forward element
Residual power reverse element
Inrush current detector
Inrush current detector
Inrush current detector

245

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240

Signal Name
UC1-A
UC1-B
UC1-C
UC2-A
UC2-B
UC2-C
THM-A
THM-T
NOC1
NOC1_INST
NOC2
BCD
CBF-A
CBF-B
CBF-C
ICLDO-A
ICLDO-B
ICLDO-C
OC-A_DIST
OC-B_DIST
OC-C_DIST
EF_DIST
SEF_DIST
NOC_DIST
NOC2_INST

Contents
UC1-A relay element output
UC1-B relay element output
UC1-C relay element output
UC2-A relay element output
UC2-B relay element output
UC2-C relay element output
THERMAL Alarm relay element output
THERMAL Trip relay element output
NOC1 relay element output
NOC1 relay element start
NOC2 relay element output
BCD relay element output
CBF-A relay element output
CBF-B relay element output
CBF-C relay element output
ICLDO-A relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
ICLDO-B relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
ICLDO-C relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
OC-A relay for disturbance record
OC-B relay for disturbance record
OC-C relay for disturbance record
EF relay for disturbance record
SEF relay for disturbance record
NOC relay for disturbance record
NOC2 relay element start

OV1-A
OV1-B
OV1-C
OV1-A_INST
OV1-B_INST
OV1-C_INST
OV2-A
OV2-B
OV2-C

OV1-A relay element output


OV1-B relay element output
OV1-C relay element output
OV1-A relay element start
OV1-B relay element start
OV1-C relay element start
OV2-A relay element output
OV2-B relay element output
OV2-C relay element output

UV1-A
UV1-B
UV1-C
UV1-A_INST
UV1-B_INST
UV1-C_INST
UV2-A
UV2-B
UV2-C

UV1-A relay element output


UV1-B relay element output
UV1-C relay element output
UV1-A relay element start
UV1-B relay element start
UV1-C relay element start
UV2-A relay element output
UV2-B relay element output
UV2-C relay element output

ZOV1
ZOV1_INST
ZOV2
NOV1
NOV1_INST
NOV2
UVBLK
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
FRQBLK
ZOV2_INST
NOV2_INST
DFRQ1
DFRQ2
DFRQ3
DFRQ4

ZOV1 relay element ouput


ZOV1 relay element start
ZOV2 relay element ouput
NOV1 relay element ouput
NOV1 relay element start
NOV2 relay element ouput
UV blocked element operating
FRQ1 relay element ouput
FRQ2 relay element ouput
FRQ3 relay element ouput
FRQ4 relay element ouput
FRQ blocked element operating
ZOV2 relay element start
NOV2 relay element start
DFRQ1 relay element ouput
DFRQ2 relay element ouput
DFRQ3 relay element ouput
DFRQ4 relay element ouput

EFCF
ZOVCF
UVVF-A
UVVF-B
UVVF-C
UVVF-OR
OCDVF-A
OCDVF-B
OCDVF-C
OCDVF-OR

EF element for CTF detection


ZOV element for CTF detection
UV-A element for VTF detection
UV-B element for VTF detection
UV-C element for VTF detection
UV-OR element for VTF detection
OCD-A element for VTF detection
OCD-B element for VTF detection
OCD-C element for VTF detection
OCD-OR element for VTF detection

246

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No. Signal Name

Contents

241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

ZOVVF
EFVF
OC_COORD-A
OC_COORD-B
OC_COORD-C
EF_COORD
SEF_COORD
ZOV_DIST
NOV_DIST
OV-A_DIST
OV-B_DIST
OV-C_DIST
UV-A_DIST
UV-B_DIST
UV-C_DIST

ZOV element for VTF detection


EF element for VTF detection
OC-A coordination element
OC-B coordination element
OC-C coordination element
EF coordination element
SEF coordination element
ZOV relay for disturbance record
NOV relay for disturbance record
OV-A relay for disturbance record
OV-B relay for disturbance record
OV-C relay for disturbance record
UV-A relay for disturbance record
UV-B relay for disturbance record
UV-C relay for disturbance record

OC1_TRIP
OC1-A_TRIP
OC1-B_TRIP
OC1-C_TRIP
OC2_TRIP
OC2-A_TRIP
OC2-B_TRIP
OC2-C_TRIP
OC3_TRIP
OC3-A_TRIP
OC3-B_TRIP
OC3-C_TRIP
OC4_ALARM
OC4-A_ALARM
OC4-B_ALARM
OC4-C_ALARM

OC1 trip command


OC1 trip command (A Phase)
OC1 trip command (B Phase)
OC1 trip command (C Phase)
OC2 trip command
OC2 trip command (A Phase)
OC2 trip command (B Phase)
OC2 trip command (C Phase)
OC3 trip command
OC3 trip command (A Phase)
OC3 trip command (B Phase)
OC3 trip command (C Phase)
OC4 alarm command
OC4 alarm command (A Phase)
OC4 alarm command (B Phase)
OC4 alarm command (C Phase)

EF1_TRIP
EF2_TRIP
EF3_TRIP
EF4_ALARM
EF1_CARRIER
EF2_CARRIER
EF3_CARRIER
EF4_CARRIER

EF1 trip command


EF2 trip command
EF3 trip command
EF4 alarm command
EF1 carrier command
EF2 carrier command
EF3 carrier command
EF4 carrier command

SEF1-S1_TRIP
SEF1-S2_TRIP
SEF2_TRIP
SEF3_TRIP
SEF4_ALARM

SEF1 Stage1 trip command


SEF1 Stage2 trip command
SEF2 trip command
SEF3 trip command
SEF4 alarm command

UC1_TRIP
UC1-A_TRIP
UC1-B_TRIP
UC1-C_TRIP
UC2_ALARM
UC2-A_ALARM
UC2-B_ALARM
UC2-C_ALARM
THM_ALARM
THM_TRIP
NOC1_TRIP
NOC2_ALARM
BCD_TRIP
CBF_RETRIP
CBF_RETRIP-A
CBF_RETRIP-B
CBF_RETRIP-C
CBF_TRIP
CBF_TRIP-A
CBF_TRIP-B

UC1 trip command


UC1 trip command (A Phase)
UC1 trip command (B Phase)
UC1 trip command (C Phase)
UC2 alarm command
UC2 alarm command (A Phase)
UC2 alarm command (B Phase)
UC2 alarm command (C Phase)
Thermal alarm command
Thermal trip command
NOC1 trip command
NOC2 alarm command
BCD trip command
CBF retrip command
CBF retrip command(A Phase)
CBF retrip command(B Phase)
CBF retrip command(C Phase)
CBF back trip command
CBF back trip command(A Phase)
CBF back trip command(B Phase)

256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320

247

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.

Signal Name

Contents

321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400

CBF_TRIP-C
CBF_OP-A
CBF_OP-B
CBF_OP-C

CBF back trip command(C Phase)


CBF start signal (A phase)
CBF start signal (B phase)
CBF start signal (C phase)

OV1_TRIP
OV1-A_TRIP
OV1-B_TRIP
OV1-C_TRIP
OV2_TRIP
OV2-A_TRIP
OV2-B_TRIP
OV2-C_TRIP

OV1 trip command


OV1 trip command(Phase-A)
OV1 trip command(Phase-B)
OV1 trip command(Phase-C)
OV2 trip command
OV2 trip command(Phase-A)
OV2 trip command(Phase-B)
OV2 trip command(Phase-C)

UV1_TRIP
UV1-A_TRIP
UV1-B_TRIP
UV1-C_TRIP
UV2_TRIP
UV2-A_TRIP
UV2-B_TRIP
UV2-C_TRIP

UV1 trip command


UV1 trip command(Phase-A)
UV1 trip command(Phase-B)
UV1 trip command(Phase-C)
UV2 trip command
UV2 trip command(Phase-A)
UV2 trip command(Phase-B)
UV2 trip command(Phase-C)

ZOV1_TRIP
ZOV2_ALARM
NOV1_TRIP
NOV2_ALARM
FRQ_TRIP
FRQ1_TRIP
FRQ2_TRIP
FRQ3_TRIP
FRQ4_TRIP
DFRQ1_TRIP
DFRQ2_TRIP
DFRQ3_TRIP
DFRQ4_TRIP

ZOV1 trip command


ZOV2 alarm command
NOV1 trip command
NOV2 alarm command
FRQ trip command
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ2 trip command
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ4 trip command
DFRQ1 trip command
DFRQ2 trip command
DFRQ3 trip command
DFRQ4 trip command

GEN.TRIP
GEN.TRIP-A
GEN.TRIP-B
GEN.TRIP-C
GEN.TRIP-N
CLP_STATE0
CLP_STATE1
CLP_STATE2
CLP_STATE3
GEN.ALARM
GEN.ALARM-A
GEN.ALARM-B
GEN.ALARM-C
GEN.ALARM-N
CTF
VTF
VTF1
VTF2
CB_CLOSE
CB_OPEN

General trip command


General trip command (A Phase)
General trip command (B Phase)
General trip command (C Phase)
General trip command (N Phase)
Cold Load Protection State
Cold Load Protection State
Cold Load Protection State
Cold Load Protection State
General alarm command
General alarm command (A Phase)
General alarm command (B Phase)
General alarm command (C Phase)
General alarm command (N Phase)
CT failure detection
VT failure detection
VT failure detection 1
VT failure detection 2
CB closed status
CB opened status

ARC_BLK_OR

Auto-Reclosing block

248

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.

Signal Name

Contents

401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480

ARC_READY_T
ARC_IN-PROG
ARC_SHOT
ARC_SHOT1
ARC_SHOT2
ARC_SHOT3
ARC_SHOT4
ARC_SHOT5
ARC_FT
ARC_SUCCESS
ARC_COORD
VCHK
VCHK_SYN
VCHK_LBDL
VCHK_DBLL
VCHK_DBDL

Auto-Reclosing ready condition


Auto-Reclosing in-progress conditon
Auto-Reclosing shot
Auto-Reclosing shot of number1
Auto-Reclosing shot of number2
Auto-Reclosing shot of number3
Auto-Reclosing shot of number4
Auto-Reclosing shot of number5
Auto-Reclosing failed (Final trip)
Auto-Reclosing succeed
Auto-Reclosing coordination
Voltage check for ARC
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

OV3_TRIP
OV3-A_TRIP
OV3-B_TRIP
OV3-C_TRIP
OV4_ALARM
OV4-A_ALARM
OV4-B_ALARM
OV4-C_ALARM
UV3_TRIP
UV3-A_TRIP
UV3-B_TRIP
UV3-C_TRIP
UV4_ALARM
UV4-A_ALARM
UV4-B_ALARM
UV4-C_ALARM
OC1-OR
OC2-OR
OC3-OR
OC4-OR
OC1_INST-OR
OC2_INST-OR
UC1-OR
UC2-OR
CBF-OR
OV1-OR
OV2-OR
OV3-OR
OV4-OR
OV1_INST-OR
OV2_INST-OR
UV1-OR
UV2-OR
UV3-OR
UV4-OR
UV1_INST-OR
UV2_INST-OR
ICD-OR

OV3 trip command


OV3 trip command(Phase-A)
OV3 trip command(Phase-B)
OV3 trip command(Phase-C)
OV4 alarm command
OV4 alarm command(Phase-A)
OV4 alarm command(Phase-B)
OV4 alarm command(Phase-C)
UV3 trip command
UV3 trip command(Phase-A)
UV3 trip command(Phase-B)
UV3 trip command(Phase-C)
UV4 alarm command
UV4 alarm command(Phase-A)
UV4 alarm command(Phase-B)
UV4 alarm command(Phase-C)
OC1 relay (3PHASE OR)
OC2 relay (3PHASE OR)
OC3 relay (3PHASE OR)
OC4 relay (3PHASE OR)
OC1_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
OC2_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
UC1 relay (3PHASE OR)
UC2 relay (3PHASE OR)
CBF relay (3PHASE OR)
OV1 relay (3PHASE OR)
OV2 relay (3PHASE OR)
OV3 relay (3PHASE OR)
OV4 relay (3PHASE OR)
OV1_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
OV2_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
UV1 relay (3PHASE OR)
UV2 relay (3PHASE OR)
UV3 relay (3PHASE OR)
UV4 relay (3PHASE OR)
UV1_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
UV2_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
ICD (3PHASE OR)

BO1_OP
BO2_OP
BO3_OP
BO4_OP
BO5_OP
BO6_OP
BO7_OP

Binary output 1
Binary output 2
Binary output 3
Binary output 4
Binary output 5
Binary output 6
Binary output 7

249

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511

Signal Name

Contents

512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560

OV2-A_INST
OV2-B_INST
OV2-C_INST
OV3-A
OV3-B
OV3-C
OV4-A
OV4-B
OV4-C

OV2-A relay element start


OV2-B relay element start
OV2-C relay element start
OV3-A relay element output
OV3-B relay element output
OV3-C relay element output
OV4-A relay element output
OV4-B relay element output
OV4-C relay element output

UV2-A_INST
UV2-B_INST
UV2-C_INST
UV3-A
UV3-B
UV3-C
UV4-A
UV4-B
UV4-C

UV2-A relay element start


UV2-B relay element start
UV2-C relay element start
UV3-A relay element output
UV3-B relay element output
UV3-C relay element output
UV4-A relay element output
UV4-B relay element output
UV4-C relay element output

SYN
OVL
OVB
UVL
UVB

Voltage check relay for ARC


ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

OC1-A_RST
OC1-B_RST
OC1-C_RST
OC2-A_RST
OC2-B_RST
OC2-C_RST
EF1_RST
EF2_RST
SEF1_RST
SEF2_RST
NOC1_RST
NOC2_RST
OV1-A_RST
OV1-B_RST
OV1-C_RST
OV2-A_RST
OV2-B_RST
OV2-C_RST
UV1-A_RST
UV1-B_RST
UV1-C_RST
UV2-A_RST
UV2-B_RST

OC1 relay element definite time reset


ditto
ditto
OC2 relay element definite time reset
ditto
ditto
EF1 relay element definite time reset
EF2 relay element definite time reset
SEF1 relay element definite time reset
SEF2 relay element definite time reset
NOC1 relay element definite time reset
NOC2 relay element definite time reset
OV1 relay element definite time reset
ditto
ditto
OV2 relay element definite time reset
ditto
ditto
UV1 relay element definite time reset
ditto
ditto
UV2 relay element definite time reset
ditto

250

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640

Signal Name
UV2-C_RST
ZOV1_RST
ZOV2_RST
NOV1_RST
NOV2_RST
UVBLK-A
UVBLK-B
UVBLK-C

Contents
ditto
ZOV1 relay element definite time reset
ZOV2 relay element definite time reset
NOV1 relay element definite time reset
NOV2 relay element definite time reset
UV blocked element operating
ditto
ditto

OC1-A DEPRST
OC1-B_DEPRST
OC1-C_DEPRST
EF1_DEPRST
SEF1_DEPRST
NOC1_DEPRST
OC2-A_DEPRST
OC2-B_DEPRST
OC2-C_DEPRST
EF2_DEPRST
SEF2 DEPRST
NOC2_DEPRST

OC1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset


ditto
ditto
EF1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
SEF1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
NOC1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
OC2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
ditto
ditto
EF2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
SEF2 relay element IDMT definite time reset
NOC2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset

251

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.

Signal Name

Contents

641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720

252

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767

Signal Name

Contents

768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800

BI1_COMMAND
BI2_COMMAND
BI3_COMMAND
BI4_COMMAND
BI5_COMMAND
BI6_COMMAND
BI7_COMMAND
BI8_COMMAND

Binary input signal BI1


Binary input signal BI2
Binary input signal BI3
Binary input signal BI4
Binary input signal BI5
Binary input signal BI6
Binary input signal BI7
Binary input signal BI8

E_FAULT_L1

A phase earth fault signal for IEC103

253

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.

Signal Name

Contents

801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880

E_FAULT_L2
E_FAULT_L3
E_FAULT_FWD
E_FAULT_REV
PICKUP_L1
PICKUP_L2
PICKUP_L3
PICKUP_N

B phase earth fault signal for IEC103


C phase earth fault signal for IEC103
Earth fault forward signal for IEC103
Earth fault reverse signal for IEC103
A phase element pick-up for IEC103
B phase element pick-up for IEC103
C phase element pick-up for IEC103
Earth fault element pick-up for IEC103

FAULT_FWD
FAULT_REV
CBF_TP_RETP
IDMT_OC_TRIP
DT_OC_TRIP
IDMT_EF_TRIP
DT_EF_TRIP

Forward fault for IEC103


Reverse fault for IEC103
CBF trip or CBF retrip for IEC103
Inverse time OC trip for IEC103
Definite time OC trip for IEC103
Inverse time earth fault OC trip for IEC103
Definite time earth fault OC trip for IEC103

254

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960

Signal Name

Contents

255

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No. Signal Name
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040 FAULT_PHA_A

Contents

fault_phase_A

256

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No. Signal Name
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120

FAULT_PHA_B
FAULT_PHA_C
FAULT_PHA_N
FL_ERR
FL_OB_FWD
FL_OB_BACK
FL_NC
FL_COMPLETED

Contents
fault_phase_B
fault_phase_C
fault_phase_N
fault location start up error
fault location out of bounds(forward)
fault location out of bounds(backward)
fault location not converged
fault location completed

257

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.

Signal Name

Contents

1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200

258

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No. Signal Name
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241 IEC_MDBLK
1242 IEC_TESTMODE
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279

GROUP1_ACTIVE
GROUP2_ACTIVE
GROUP3_ACTIVE
GROUP4_ACTIVE
GROUP5_ACTIVE
GROUP6_ACTIVE
GROUP7_ACTIVE
GROUP8_ACTIVE
RLY_FAIL
RLY_OP_BLK
AMF_OFF

Contents

monitor direction blocked


IEC61870-5-103 testmode
group1 active
group2 active
group3 active
group4 active
group5 active
group6 active
group7 active
group8 active
RELAY FAILURE
RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK
SV BLOCK

RELAY_FAIL-A

TRIP-H
CT_ERR_UF

Trip signal hold


CT error(unfiltered)

V0_ERR_UF
V2_ERR_UF
CT_ERR

V0 error(unfiltered)
V2 error(unfiltered)
CT error

V0_ERR
V2_ERR
TCSV
CBSV
TC_ALARM
SGM_Iy_ALM
OT_ALARM
CTF_ALARM
VTF1_ALARM
VTF2_ALARM

V0 error
V2 error
Trip circuit supervision failure
Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
Trip counter alarm
IY alarm
Operate time alarm
CT failure detection
VT failure detection 1
VT failure detection 2

GEN_PICKUP

General start/pick-up

1280

259

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360

Signal Name

Contents

BI1_COM_UF
BI2_COM_UF
BI3_COM_UF
BI4_COM_UF
BI5_COM_UF
BI6_COM_UF
BI7_COM_UF
BI8_COM_UF

Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)


Binary input signal BI2 (unfiltered)
Binary input signal BI3 (unfiltered)
Binary input signal BI4 (unfiltered)
Binary input signal BI5 (unfiltered)
Binary input signal BI6 (unfiltered)
Binary input signal BI7 (unfiltered)
Binary input signal BI8 (unfiltered)

GOOSE_IN_Q1
GOOSE_IN_Q2
GOOSE_IN_Q3
GOOSE_IN_Q4
GOOSE_IN_Q5
GOOSE_IN_Q6
GOOSE_IN_Q7
GOOSE_IN_Q8
GOOSE_IN_Q9
GOOSE_IN_Q10
GOOSE_IN_Q11
GOOSE_IN_Q12
GOOSE_IN_Q13
GOOSE_IN_Q14
GOOSE_IN_Q15
GOOSE_IN_Q16
GOOSE_IN_Q17
GOOSE_IN_Q18
GOOSE_IN_Q19
GOOSE_IN_Q20
GOOSE_IN_Q21
GOOSE_IN_Q22
GOOSE_IN_Q23
GOOSE_IN_Q24
GOOSE_IN_Q25
GOOSE_IN_Q26
GOOSE_IN_Q27
GOOSE_IN_Q28
GOOSE_IN_Q29
GOOSE_IN_Q30
GOOSE_IN_Q31
GOOSE_IN_Q32
GOOSE_IN_1

Goose Input Quality #1


Goose Input Quality #2
Goose Input Quality #3
Goose Input Quality #4
Goose Input Quality #5
Goose Input Quality #6
Goose Input Quality #7
Goose Input Quality #8
Goose Input Quality #9
Goose Input Quality #10
Goose Input Quality #11
Goose Input Quality #12
Goose Input Quality #13
Goose Input Quality #14
Goose Input Quality #15
Goose Input Quality #16
Goose Input Quality #17
Goose Input Quality #18
Goose Input Quality #19
Goose Input Quality #20
Goose Input Quality #21
Goose Input Quality #22
Goose Input Quality #23
Goose Input Quality #24
Goose Input Quality #25
Goose Input Quality #26
Goose Input Quality #27
Goose Input Quality #28
Goose Input Quality #29
Goose Input Quality #30
Goose Input Quality #31
Goose Input Quality #32
Goose Input #1

260

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440

Signal Name

Contents

GOOSE_IN_2
GOOSE_IN_3
GOOSE_IN_4
GOOSE_IN_5
GOOSE_IN_6
GOOSE_IN_7
GOOSE_IN_8
GOOSE_IN_9
GOOSE_IN_10
GOOSE_IN_11
GOOSE_IN_12
GOOSE_IN_13
GOOSE_IN_14
GOOSE_IN_15
GOOSE_IN_16
GOOSE_IN_17
GOOSE_IN_18
GOOSE_IN_19
GOOSE_IN_20
GOOSE_IN_21
GOOSE_IN_22
GOOSE_IN_23
GOOSE_IN_24
GOOSE_IN_25
GOOSE_IN_26
GOOSE_IN_27
GOOSE_IN_28
GOOSE_IN_29
GOOSE_IN_30
GOOSE_IN_31
GOOSE_IN_32

Goose Input #2
Goose Input #3
Goose Input #4
Goose Input #5
Goose Input #6
Goose Input #7
Goose Input #8
Goose Input #9
Goose Input #10
Goose Input #11
Goose Input #12
Goose Input #13
Goose Input #14
Goose Input #15
Goose Input #16
Goose Input #17
Goose Input #18
Goose Input #19
Goose Input #20
Goose Input #21
Goose Input #22
Goose Input #23
Goose Input #24
Goose Input #25
Goose Input #26
Goose Input #27
Goose Input #28
Goose Input #29
Goose Input #30
Goose Input #31
Goose Input #32

LOCAL_OP_ACT
REMOTE_OP_ACT
NORM_LED_ON
ALM_LED_ON
TRIP_LED_ON
TEST_LED_ON

local operation active


remote operation active
IN-SERVICE LED ON
ALARM LED ON
TRIP LED ON
TEST LED ON

PRG_LED_RESET
LED_RESET

Latched programmable LED RESET


TRIP LED RESET

ARC_COM_ON

IEC103 communication command

PROT_COM_ON
PRG_LED1_ON
PRG_LED2_ON
PRG_LED3_ON
PRG_LED4_ON
PRG_LED5_ON
PRG_LED6_ON

LCD_IND.
LCD_IND1.
LCD_IND2.

IEC103 communication command


PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON
PROGRAMMABLE LED2 ON
PROGRAMMABLE LED3 ON
PROGRAMMABLE LED4 ON
PROGRAMMABLE LED5 ON
PROGRAMMABLE LED6 ON
PROGRAMMABLE LED7 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED8 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED9 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED10 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED11 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED12 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED13 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED14 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED15 ON (reserved)
PROGRAMMABLE LED16 ON (reserved)
VirLCD indication(Virtual LED) command
LCD indication1(Virtual LED) command
LCD indication2(Virtual LED) command

F.Record_CLR
E.Record_CLR
D.Record_CLR
Data_Lost
TP_COUNT_CLR
Iy_COUNT_CLR

Fault record clear


Event record clear
Disturbance record clear
Data clear by BU-RAM memory monitoring error
Trip counter cleared
SGM_Iy counter cleared

261

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520

Signal Name
AR_COUNT_CLR
DEMAND_CLR

Contents
ARC Counter CLR
Demand cleared

PLC_data_CHG
IEC103_data_CHG
IEC850_data_CHG
Sys.set_change
Rly.set_change
Grp.set_change

PLC data change


IEC-103 data change
IEC-850 data change
System setting change
Relay setting change
Group setting change

KEY-VIEW
KEY-RESET
KEY-ENTER
KEY-END
KEY-CANCEL

VIEW key status (1:pressed)


RESET key status (2:pressed)
ENTER key status (3:pressed)
END key status (4:pressed)
CANCEL key status (5:pressed)

DC_supply_err
RTC err
PCI_err
GOOSE_stop
Ping_err
PLC_err
61850_err
SUM_err
ROM_RAM_err
SRAM_err
BU_RAM_err

DC supply error
RTC stopped
PCI bus error
GOOSE stopped
Ping no anwer
PLC stopeed
61850 stopped
Program ROM checksum error
Rom - Ram mismatch error
SRAM memory monitoring error
BU-RAM memory monitoring error

EEPROM_err

EEPROM memory monitoring error

A/D_err
CPU_err
Invalid
NMI
Sampling_err
DIO_err
LAN_err
LCD_err
ROM_data_err

A/D accuracy checking error


Program error
Invalid error
NMI
Sampling error
DIO card connection error
LAN error
LCD panel connection error
8M Romdata error

262

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No. Signal Name
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535

Contents

263

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610

Signal Name
OC1_BLOCK
OC2_BLOCK
OC3_BLOCK
OC4_BLOCK

Contents
OC trip block command
ditto
ditto
ditto

EF1_BLOCK
EF2_BLOCK
EF3_BLOCK
EF4_BLOCK
EF1_PERMIT
EF2_PERMIT
EF3_PERMIT
EF4 PERMIT
SEF1_BLOCK
SEF2_BLOCK
SEF3_BLOCK
SEF4_BLOCK

EF trip block command


ditto
ditto
ditto
Carrier protection permissive command
ditto
ditto
ditto
SEF trip block command
ditto
ditto
ditto

NOC1_BLOCK
NOC2 BLOCK

NOC trip block command


ditto

UC1_BLOCK
UC2_BLOCK
CBF_BLOCK

UC trip block command


ditto
CBF trip block command

THM_BLOCK
THMA_BLOCK
BCD_BLOCK

THM trip block command


ditto
BCD trip block command

DFRQ1_BLOCK
DFRQ2_BLOCK
DFRQ3_BLOCK
DFRQ4_BLOCK

DFRQ trip block command


ditto
ditto
ditto

OV1_BLOCK
OV2_BLOCK
OV3_BLOCK
OV4_BLOCK
UV1_BLOCK
UV2_BLOCK
UV3_BLOCK
UV4_BLOCK
ZOV1_BLOCK
ZOV2_BLOCK

OV trip block command


ditto
ditto
ditto
UV trip block command
ditto
ditto
ditto
ZOV trip block command
ditto

NOV1_BLOCK
NOV2_BLOCK

NOV trip block command


ditto

FRQ1_BLOCK
FRQ2_BLOCK
FRQ3_BLOCK
FRQ4_BLOCK
ARC_BLOCK
ARC_READY
ARC_INIT
MANUAL_CLOSE
ARC_NO_ACT

FRQ trip block command


ditto
ditto
ditto
ARC scheme block command
ARC ready command
ARC initiation command
Manual close command
ARC not applied command

264

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690

Signal Name

Contents

CTF_BLOCK
VTF_BLOCK

CTF block commamd


VTF block commamd

EXT_CTF
EXT_VTF

External CTF commamd


External VTF commamd

EXT_TRIP-A
EXT_TRIP-B
EXT_TRIP-C
EXT_TRIP
TC_FAIL
CB_N/O_CONT
CB_N/C_CONT

External trip commamd (A Phase)


External trip commamd (B Phase)
External trip commamd (C Phase)
External trip commamd
Trip circuit Fail Alarm commamd
CB N/O contact commamd
CB N/C contact commamd

IND.RESET

Indication reset command

ARC-S1_COND
ARC-S2_COND
ARC-S3_COND
ARC-S4_COND
ARC-S5_COND

Auto-reclosing shot1 condition


2
3
4
5

CBF_INIT-A
CBF_INIT-B
CBF_INIT-C
CBF_INIT
TP_COUNT-A
TP_COUNT-B
TP_COUNT-C
TP_COUNT

CBF initiation command (Phase A)


B
C
CBF initiation command
Trip counter count up command
ditto
ditto
ditto

SGM_IY-A
SGM_IY-B
SGM_IY-C

Sigma IY counter count up command


ditto
ditto

OT_ALARM-A
OT_ALARM-B
OT_ALARM-C

Operating alarm start commnad


ditto
ditto

FRQ_S1_TRIP
FRQ_S2_TRIP
FRQ_S3_TRIP
FRQ_S4_TRIP

Frequency scheme trip


Frequency scheme trip
Frequency scheme trip
Frequency scheme trip

command (Stage1)
command (Stage2)
command (Stage3)
command (Stage4)

265

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770

Signal Name

Contents

OC1_INST_TP
OC2_INST_TP
OC3_INST_TP
OC4_INST_TP
EF1_INST_TP
EF2_INST_TP
EF3_INST_TP
EF4_INST_TP
SEF1_INST_TP
SEF2_INST_TP
SEF3_INST_TP
SEF4_INST_TP

OC1 instantly trip command


OC2 instantly trip command
OC3 instantly trip command
OC4 instantly trip command
EF1 instantly trip command
EF2 instantly trip command
EF3 instantly trip command
EF4 instantly trip command
SEF1 instantly trip command
SEF2 instantly trip command
SEF3 instantly trip command
SEF4 instantly trip command

266

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No. Signal Name
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
:
:
:
2557
2558
2559

Contents

267

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639

Signal Name
DISP.ALARM1
DISP.ALARM2
DISP.ALARM3
DISP.ALARM4

Contents
Indicate the alarm display
ditto
ditto
ditto

SYNC_CLOCK

Synchronise clock commamd

ALARM_LED_SET

Alarm LED set

F.RECORD1
F.RECORD2
F.RECORD3
F.RECORD4

Fault record stored command 1


2
3
4

D.RECORD1
D.RECORD2
D.RECORD3
D.RECORD4

Disturbance record stored command 1


2
3
4

268

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719

Signal Name
SET.GROUP1
SET.GROUP2
SET.GROUP3
SET.GROUP4
SET.GROUP5
SET.GROUP6
SET.GROUP7
SET.GROUP8

Contents
Active setting group changed command (Change to group1)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

CON_TPMD1
CON_TPMD2
CON_TPMD3
CON_TPMD4
CON_TPMD5
CON_TPMD6
CON_TPMD7
CON_TPMD8

User configurable trip mode in fault record


ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

ARC_COM_RECV

Auto-recloser inactivate command received

PROT_COM_RECV

protection inactivate command received

TPLED_RST_RCV

TRIP LED RESET command received

269

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No. Signal Name
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799

Contents

270

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879

Signal Name

Contents

TEMP001
TEMP002
TEMP003
TEMP004
TEMP005
TEMP006
TEMP007
TEMP008
TEMP009
TEMP010
TEMP011
TEMP012
TEMP013
TEMP014
TEMP015
TEMP016
TEMP017
TEMP018
TEMP019
TEMP020
TEMP021
TEMP022
TEMP023
TEMP024
TEMP025
TEMP026
TEMP027
TEMP028
TEMP029
TEMP030
TEMP031
TEMP032
TEMP033
TEMP034
TEMP035
TEMP036
TEMP037
TEMP038
TEMP039
TEMP040
TEMP041
TEMP042
TEMP043
TEMP044
TEMP045
TEMP046
TEMP047
TEMP048
TEMP049
TEMP050
TEMP051
TEMP052
TEMP053
TEMP054
TEMP055
TEMP056
TEMP057
TEMP058
TEMP059
TEMP060
TEMP061
TEMP062
TEMP063
TEMP064

271

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959

Signal Name
TEMP065
TEMP066
TEMP067
TEMP068
TEMP069
TEMP070
TEMP071
TEMP072
TEMP073
TEMP074
TEMP075
TEMP076
TEMP077
TEMP078
TEMP079
TEMP080
TEMP081
TEMP082
TEMP083
TEMP084
TEMP085
TEMP086
TEMP087
TEMP088
TEMP089
TEMP090
TEMP091
TEMP092
TEMP093
TEMP094
TEMP095
TEMP096
TEMP097
TEMP098
TEMP099
TEMP100
TEMP101
TEMP102
TEMP103
TEMP104
TEMP105
TEMP106
TEMP107
TEMP108
TEMP109
TEMP110
TEMP111
TEMP112
TEMP113
TEMP114
TEMP115
TEMP116
TEMP117
TEMP118
TEMP119
TEMP120
TEMP121
TEMP122
TEMP123
TEMP124
TEMP125
TEMP126
TEMP127
TEMP128
TEMP129
TEMP130
TEMP131
TEMP132
TEMP133
TEMP134
TEMP135
TEMP136
TEMP137
TEMP138
TEMP139
TEMP140
TEMP141
TEMP142
TEMP143
TEMP144

Contents

272

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039

Signal Name
TEMP145
TEMP146
TEMP147
TEMP148
TEMP149
TEMP150
TEMP151
TEMP152
TEMP153
TEMP154
TEMP155
TEMP156
TEMP157
TEMP158
TEMP159
TEMP160
TEMP161
TEMP162
TEMP163
TEMP164
TEMP165
TEMP166
TEMP167
TEMP168
TEMP169
TEMP170
TEMP171
TEMP172
TEMP173
TEMP174
TEMP175
TEMP176
TEMP177
TEMP178
TEMP179
TEMP180
TEMP181
TEMP182
TEMP183
TEMP184
TEMP185
TEMP186
TEMP187
TEMP188
TEMP189
TEMP190
TEMP191
TEMP192
TEMP193
TEMP194
TEMP195
TEMP196
TEMP197
TEMP198
TEMP199
TEMP200
TEMP201
TEMP202
TEMP203
TEMP204
TEMP205
TEMP206
TEMP207
TEMP208
TEMP209
TEMP210
TEMP211
TEMP212
TEMP213
TEMP214
TEMP215
TEMP216
TEMP217
TEMP218
TEMP219
TEMP220
TEMP221
TEMP222
TEMP223
TEMP224

Contents

273

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071

Signal Name
TEMP225
TEMP226
TEMP227
TEMP228
TEMP229
TEMP230
TEMP231
TEMP232
TEMP233
TEMP234
TEMP235
TEMP236
TEMP237
TEMP238
TEMP239
TEMP240
TEMP241
TEMP242
TEMP243
TEMP244
TEMP245
TEMP246
TEMP247
TEMP248
TEMP249
TEMP250
TEMP251
TEMP252
TEMP253
TEMP254
TEMP255
TEMP256

Contents

274

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

For IEC61850
Measure Table
NO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

SIGNAL NAME
Va_mag
Vb_mag
Vc_mag
Va_ang
Vb_ang
Vc_ang
Ves_mag
Ves_ang
Vab_mag
Vbc_mag
Vca_mag
Vab_ang
Vbc_ang
Vca_ang
Ia_mag
Ib_mag
Ic_mag
Ia_ang
Ib_ang
Ic_ang
Ie_mag
Ie_ang
Ise_mag
Ise_ang
V1_mag
V2_mag
V0_mag
V1_ang
V2_ang
V0_ang
I1_mag
I2_mag
I0_mag
I1_ang
I2_ang
I0_ang
Freq
FLT_DIS_KM
FLT_Z

CONTENTS
Va magnitude
Vb magnitude
Vc magnitude
Va angle
Vb angle
Vc angle
Ves magnitude
Ves angle
Vab magnitude
Vbc magnitude
Vca magnitude
Vab angle
Vbc angle
Vca angle
Ia magnitude
Ib magnitude
Ic magnitude
Ia angle
Ib angle
Ic angle
Ie magnitude
Ie angle
Ise magnitude
Ise angle
V1 magnitude
V2 magnitude
V0 magnitude
V1 angle
V2 angle
V0 angle
I1 magnitude
I2 magnitude
I0 magnitude
I1 angle
I2 angle
I0 angle
Frequency
FLT_DIS_KM
FLT_Z

275

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Setting Table
NO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

SIGNAL NAME

CONTENTS

GROUP_NO
ACT_GROUP
EDIT_GROUP
CHG_GROUP

number of groups
active group number
edit group number
change active group

NO

276

61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

SIGNAL NAME

CONTENTS

1A2_5A1
1A1_5A2
1A1_5A0
1A0_5A1

1A:2 5A:1
1A:1 5A:2
1A:1 5A:0
1A:0 5A:1

SoftType
MappingName
Vendor

Software type
Mapping info
venfor name

Const0
Const1
Const2
Const3

Always 0
Always 1
Always 2
Always 3

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Status Table
NO

SIGNAL NAME
0 GOOSE_V_001
1 GOOSE_V_002

CONTENTS
GOOSE_Value_001
GOOSE_Value_002

2 GOOSE_V_003
3 GOOSE_V_004
4 GOOSE_V_005

NO

SIGNAL NAME
51 GOOSE_V_052
52 GOOSE_V_053

CONTENTS
GOOSE_Value_052
GOOSE_Value_053

GOOSE_Value_003
GOOSE_Value_004
GOOSE_Value_005

53 GOOSE_V_054
54 GOOSE_V_055
55 GOOSE_V_056

GOOSE_Value_054
GOOSE_Value_055
GOOSE_Value_056

5 GOOSE_V_006
6 GOOSE_V_007

GOOSE_Value_006
GOOSE_Value_007

56 GOOSE_V_057
57 GOOSE_V_058

GOOSE_Value_057
GOOSE_Value_058

7 GOOSE_V_008
8 GOOSE_V_009
9 GOOSE_V_010

GOOSE_Value_008
GOOSE_Value_009
GOOSE_Value_010

58 GOOSE_V_059
59 GOOSE_V_060
60 GOOSE_V_061

GOOSE_Value_059
GOOSE_Value_060
GOOSE_Value_061

10 GOOSE_V_011
11 GOOSE_V_012
12 GOOSE_V_013

GOOSE_Value_011
GOOSE_Value_012
GOOSE_Value_013

61 GOOSE_V_062
62 GOOSE_V_063
63 GOOSE_V_064

GOOSE_Value_062
GOOSE_Value_063
GOOSE_Value_064

13 GOOSE_V_014
14 GOOSE_V_015
15 GOOSE_V_016

GOOSE_Value_014
GOOSE_Value_015
GOOSE_Value_016

64 GOOSE_V_065
65 GOOSE_V_066
66 GOOSE_V_067

GOOSE_Value_065
GOOSE_Value_066
GOOSE_Value_067

16 GOOSE_V_017
17 GOOSE_V_018
18 GOOSE_V_019

GOOSE_Value_017
GOOSE_Value_018
GOOSE_Value_019

67 GOOSE_V_068
68 GOOSE_V_069
69 GOOSE_V_070

GOOSE_Value_068
GOOSE_Value_069
GOOSE_Value_070

19 GOOSE_V_020
20 GOOSE_V_021
21 GOOSE_V_022

GOOSE_Value_020
GOOSE_Value_021
GOOSE_Value_022

70 GOOSE_V_071
71 GOOSE_V_072
72 GOOSE_V_073

GOOSE_Value_071
GOOSE_Value_072
GOOSE_Value_073

22 GOOSE_V_023
23 GOOSE_V_024
24 GOOSE_V_025

GOOSE_Value_023
GOOSE_Value_024
GOOSE_Value_025

73 GOOSE_V_074
74 GOOSE_V_075
75 GOOSE_V_076

GOOSE_Value_074
GOOSE_Value_075
GOOSE_Value_076

25 GOOSE_V_026
26 GOOSE_V_027
27 GOOSE_V_028

GOOSE_Value_026
GOOSE_Value_027
GOOSE_Value_028

76 GOOSE_V_077
77 GOOSE_V_078
78 GOOSE_V_079

GOOSE_Value_077
GOOSE_Value_078
GOOSE_Value_079

28 GOOSE_V_029
29 GOOSE_V_030

GOOSE_Value_029
GOOSE_Value_030

79 GOOSE_V_080
80 GOOSE_V_081

GOOSE_Value_080
GOOSE_Value_081

30 GOOSE_V_031
31 GOOSE_V_032
32 GOOSE_V_033

GOOSE_Value_031
GOOSE_Value_032
GOOSE_Value_033

81 GOOSE_V_082
82 GOOSE_V_083
83 GOOSE_V_084

GOOSE_Value_082
GOOSE_Value_083
GOOSE_Value_084

33 GOOSE_V_034
34 GOOSE_V_035
35 GOOSE_V_036

GOOSE_Value_034
GOOSE_Value_035
GOOSE_Value_036

84 GOOSE_V_085
85 GOOSE_V_086
86 GOOSE_V_087

GOOSE_Value_085
GOOSE_Value_086
GOOSE_Value_087

36 GOOSE_V_037
37 GOOSE_V_038
38 GOOSE_V_039

GOOSE_Value_037
GOOSE_Value_038
GOOSE_Value_039

87 GOOSE_V_088
88 GOOSE_V_089
89 GOOSE_V_090

GOOSE_Value_088
GOOSE_Value_089
GOOSE_Value_090

39 GOOSE_V_040
40 GOOSE_V_041
41 GOOSE_V_042

GOOSE_Value_040
GOOSE_Value_041
GOOSE_Value_042

90 GOOSE_V_091
91 GOOSE_V_092
92 GOOSE_V_093

GOOSE_Value_091
GOOSE_Value_092
GOOSE_Value_093

42 GOOSE_V_043
43 GOOSE_V_044
44 GOOSE_V_045

GOOSE_Value_043
GOOSE_Value_044
GOOSE_Value_045

93 GOOSE_V_094
94 GOOSE_V_095
95 GOOSE_V_096

GOOSE_Value_094
GOOSE_Value_095
GOOSE_Value_096

45 GOOSE_V_046
46 GOOSE_V_047
47 GOOSE_V_048

GOOSE_Value_046
GOOSE_Value_047
GOOSE_Value_048

96 GOOSE_V_097
97 GOOSE_V_098
98 GOOSE_V_099

GOOSE_Value_097
GOOSE_Value_098
GOOSE_Value_099

48 GOOSE_V_049
49 GOOSE_V_050
50 GOOSE_V_051

GOOSE_Value_049
GOOSE_Value_050
GOOSE_Value_051

99 GOOSE_V_100
100 GOOSE_V_101
101 GOOSE_V_102

GOOSE_Value_100
GOOSE_Value_101
GOOSE_Value_102

277

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

NO

SIGNAL NAME
101 GOOSE_V_102
102 GOOSE_V_103

CONTENTS
GOOSE_Value_102
GOOSE_Value_103

103 GOOSE_V_104
104 GOOSE_V_105
105 GOOSE_V_106

GOOSE_Value_104
GOOSE_Value_105
GOOSE_Value_106

153
154
155

106 GOOSE_V_107
107 GOOSE_V_108
108 GOOSE_V_109

GOOSE_Value_107
GOOSE_Value_108
GOOSE_Value_109

156
157
158

109 GOOSE_V_110
110 GOOSE_V_111
111 GOOSE_V_112

GOOSE_Value_110
GOOSE_Value_111
GOOSE_Value_112

159
160
161

112 GOOSE_V_113
113 GOOSE_V_114
114 GOOSE_V_115

GOOSE_Value_113
GOOSE_Value_114
GOOSE_Value_115

162
163
164

115 GOOSE_V_116
116 GOOSE_V_117
117 GOOSE_V_118

GOOSE_Value_116
GOOSE_Value_117
GOOSE_Value_118

165
166
167

118 GOOSE_V_119
119 GOOSE_V_120
120 GOOSE_V_121

GOOSE_Value_119
GOOSE_Value_120
GOOSE_Value_121

168
169
170

121 GOOSE_V_122
122 GOOSE_V_123
123 GOOSE_V_124

GOOSE_Value_122
GOOSE_Value_123
GOOSE_Value_124

171
172
173

124 GOOSE_V_125
125 GOOSE_V_126
126 GOOSE_V_127

GOOSE_Value_125
GOOSE_Value_126
GOOSE_Value_127

174
175
176 DIRMODE_OC1

DIRMODE_OC1

127 GOOSE_V_128
128 XCBR_POS0
129

GOOSE_Value_128
XCBR_POS0

177 DIRMODE_OC2
178 DIRMODE_OC3
179 DIRMODE_OC4

DIRMODE_OC2
DIRMODE_OC3
DIRMODE_OC4

130
131
132

180 DIRMODE_EF1
181 DIRMODE_EF2
182 DIRMODE_EF3

DIRMODE_EF1
DIRMODE_EF2
DIRMODE_EF3

133
134
135 LEDRST_EXEC

183 DIRMODE_EF4
184 DIRMODE_SEF1
185 DIRMODE_SEF2

DIRMODE_EF4
DIRMODE_SEF1
DIRMODE_SEF2

LEDRST_EXEC

136 RREC1
137
138 FLT_LOOP_ST

RREC1

139 XCBR_OPCNT0
140
141

XCBR_OPCNT0

flt loop value

NO

SIGNAL NAME

186 DIRMODE_SEF3 DIRMODE_SEF3


187 DIRMODE_SEF4 DIRMODE_SEF4
188 DIRMODE_NOC1 DIRMODE_NOC1
189 DIRMODE_NOC2 DIRMODE_NOC2
190
191

142
143
144

192
193
194

145
146
147

195
196
197

148
149

198
199

150 HEALTH

HEALTH

CONTENTS

151
152

200 MOD_001

278

IEC-MODE_001

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

NO

SIGNAL NAME
201 MOD_002
202 MOD_003

CONTENTS
IEC-MODE_002
IEC-MODE_003

203 MOD_004
204 MOD_005
205 MOD_006

NO

SIGNAL NAME
251 MOD_052
252 MOD_053

CONTENTS
IEC-MODE_052
IEC-MODE_053

IEC-MODE_004
IEC-MODE_005
IEC-MODE_006

253 MOD_054
254 MOD_055
255 MOD_056

IEC-MODE_054
IEC-MODE_055
IEC-MODE_056

206 MOD_007
207 MOD_008
208 MOD_009

IEC-MODE_007
IEC-MODE_008
IEC-MODE_009

256 MOD_057
257 MOD_058
258 MOD_059

IEC-MODE_057
IEC-MODE_058
IEC-MODE_059

209 MOD_010
210 MOD_011
211 MOD_012

IEC-MODE_010
IEC-MODE_011
IEC-MODE_012

259 MOD_060
260 MOD_061
261 MOD_062

IEC-MODE_060
IEC-MODE_061
IEC-MODE_062

212 MOD_013
213 MOD_014
214 MOD_015

IEC-MODE_013
IEC-MODE_014
IEC-MODE_015

262 MOD_063
263 MOD_064
264 MOD_065

IEC-MODE_063
IEC-MODE_064
IEC-MODE_065

215 MOD_016
216 MOD_017
217 MOD_018

IEC-MODE_016
IEC-MODE_017
IEC-MODE_018

265 MOD_066
266 MOD_067
267 MOD_068

IEC-MODE_066
IEC-MODE_067
IEC-MODE_068

218 MOD_019
219 MOD_020
220 MOD_021

IEC-MODE_019
IEC-MODE_020
IEC-MODE_021

268 MOD_069
269 MOD_070
270 MOD_071

IEC-MODE_069
IEC-MODE_070
IEC-MODE_071

221 MOD_022
222 MOD_023
223 MOD_024

IEC-MODE_022
IEC-MODE_023
IEC-MODE_024

271 MOD_072
272 MOD_073
273 MOD_074

IEC-MODE_072
IEC-MODE_073
IEC-MODE_074

224 MOD_025
225 MOD_026
226 MOD_027

IEC-MODE_025
IEC-MODE_026
IEC-MODE_027

274 MOD_075
275 MOD_076
276 MOD_077

IEC-MODE_075
IEC-MODE_076
IEC-MODE_077

227 MOD_028
228 MOD_029
229 MOD_030

IEC-MODE_028
IEC-MODE_029
IEC-MODE_030

277 MOD_078
278 MOD_079
279 MOD_080

IEC-MODE_078
IEC-MODE_079
IEC-MODE_080

230 MOD_031
231 MOD_032
232 MOD_033

IEC-MODE_031
IEC-MODE_032
IEC-MODE_033

280 MOD_081
281 MOD_082
282 MOD_083

IEC-MODE_081
IEC-MODE_082
IEC-MODE_083

233 MOD_034
234 MOD_035
235 MOD_036

IEC-MODE_034
IEC-MODE_035
IEC-MODE_036

283 MOD_084
284 MOD_085
285 MOD_086

IEC-MODE_084
IEC-MODE_085
IEC-MODE_086

236 MOD_037
237 MOD_038
238 MOD_039

IEC-MODE_037
IEC-MODE_038
IEC-MODE_039

286 MOD_087
287 MOD_088
288 MOD_089

IEC-MODE_087
IEC-MODE_088
IEC-MODE_089

239 MOD_040
240 MOD_041
241 MOD_042

IEC-MODE_040
IEC-MODE_041
IEC-MODE_042

289 MOD_090
290 MOD_091
291 MOD_092

IEC-MODE_090
IEC-MODE_091
IEC-MODE_092

242 MOD_043
243 MOD_044
244 MOD_045

IEC-MODE_043
IEC-MODE_044
IEC-MODE_045

292 MOD_093
293 MOD_094
294 MOD_095

IEC-MODE_093
IEC-MODE_094
IEC-MODE_095

245 MOD_046
246 MOD_047
247 MOD_048

IEC-MODE_046
IEC-MODE_047
IEC-MODE_048

295 MOD_096
296 MOD_097
297 MOD_098

IEC-MODE_096
IEC-MODE_097
IEC-MODE_098

248 MOD_049
249 MOD_050

IEC-MODE_049
IEC-MODE_050

298 MOD_099
299 MOD_100

IEC-MODE_099
IEC-MODE_100

250 MOD_051

IEC-MODE_051

300 BEH_001

IEC-Behavier_001

279

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

NO

SIGNAL NAME
301 BEH_002
302 BEH_003

CONTENTS
IEC-Behavier_002
IEC-Behavier_003

303 BEH_004
304 BEH_005
305 BEH_006

NO

SIGNAL NAME
351 BEH_052
352 BEH_053

CONTENTS
IEC-Behavier_052
IEC-Behavier_053

IEC-Behavier_004
IEC-Behavier_005
IEC-Behavier_006

353 BEH_054
354 BEH_055
355 BEH_056

IEC-Behavier_054
IEC-Behavier_055
IEC-Behavier_056

306 BEH_007
307 BEH_008
308 BEH_009

IEC-Behavier_007
IEC-Behavier_008
IEC-Behavier_009

356 BEH_057
357 BEH_058
358 BEH_059

IEC-Behavier_057
IEC-Behavier_058
IEC-Behavier_059

309 BEH_010
310 BEH_011
311 BEH_012

IEC-Behavier_010
IEC-Behavier_011
IEC-Behavier_012

359 BEH_060
360 BEH_061
361 BEH_062

IEC-Behavier_060
IEC-Behavier_061
IEC-Behavier_062

312 BEH_013
313 BEH_014
314 BEH_015

IEC-Behavier_013
IEC-Behavier_014
IEC-Behavier_015

362 BEH_063
363 BEH_064
364 BEH_065

IEC-Behavier_063
IEC-Behavier_064
IEC-Behavier_065

315 BEH_016
316 BEH_017
317 BEH_018

IEC-Behavier_016
IEC-Behavier_017
IEC-Behavier_018

365 BEH_066
366 BEH_067
367 BEH_068

IEC-Behavier_066
IEC-Behavier_067
IEC-Behavier_068

318 BEH_019
319 BEH_020
320 BEH_021

IEC-Behavier_019
IEC-Behavier_020
IEC-Behavier_021

368 BEH_069
369 BEH_070
370 BEH_071

IEC-Behavier_069
IEC-Behavier_070
IEC-Behavier_071

321 BEH_022
322 BEH_023
323 BEH_024

IEC-Behavier_022
IEC-Behavier_023
IEC-Behavier_024

371 BEH_072
372 BEH_073
373 BEH_074

IEC-Behavier_072
IEC-Behavier_073
IEC-Behavier_074

324 BEH_025
325 BEH_026
326 BEH_027

IEC-Behavier_025
IEC-Behavier_026
IEC-Behavier_027

374 BEH_075
375 BEH_076
376 BEH_077

IEC-Behavier_075
IEC-Behavier_076
IEC-Behavier_077

327 BEH_028
328 BEH_029
329 BEH_030

IEC-Behavier_028
IEC-Behavier_029
IEC-Behavier_030

377 BEH_078
378 BEH_079
379 BEH_080

IEC-Behavier_078
IEC-Behavier_079
IEC-Behavier_080

330 BEH_031
331 BEH_032
332 BEH_033

IEC-Behavier_031
IEC-Behavier_032
IEC-Behavier_033

380 BEH_081
381 BEH_082
382 BEH_083

IEC-Behavier_081
IEC-Behavier_082
IEC-Behavier_083

333 BEH_034
334 BEH_035
335 BEH_036

IEC-Behavier_034
IEC-Behavier_035
IEC-Behavier_036

383 BEH_084
384 BEH_085
385 BEH_086

IEC-Behavier_084
IEC-Behavier_085
IEC-Behavier_086

336 BEH_037
337 BEH_038
338 BEH_039

IEC-Behavier_037
IEC-Behavier_038
IEC-Behavier_039

386 BEH_087
387 BEH_088
388 BEH_089

IEC-Behavier_087
IEC-Behavier_088
IEC-Behavier_089

339 BEH_040
340 BEH_041
341 BEH_042

IEC-Behavier_040
IEC-Behavier_041
IEC-Behavier_042

389 BEH_090
390 BEH_091
391 BEH_092

IEC-Behavier_090
IEC-Behavier_091
IEC-Behavier_092

342 BEH_043
343 BEH_044
344 BEH_045

IEC-Behavier_043
IEC-Behavier_044
IEC-Behavier_045

392 BEH_093
393 BEH_094
394 BEH_095

IEC-Behavier_093
IEC-Behavier_094
IEC-Behavier_095

345 BEH_046
346 BEH_047
347 BEH_048

IEC-Behavier_046
IEC-Behavier_047
IEC-Behavier_048

395 BEH_096
396 BEH_097
397 BEH_098

IEC-Behavier_096
IEC-Behavier_097
IEC-Behavier_098

348 BEH_049
349 BEH_050

IEC-Behavier_049
IEC-Behavier_050

398 BEH_099
399 BEH_100

IEC-Behavier_099
IEC-Behavier_100

350 BEH_051

IEC-Behavier_051

400 Const0

Const0

280

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

NO

SIGNAL NAME
401 Const1
402 Const2

CONTENTS
Const1
Const2

403 Const3
404 Const4
405 Const5

Const3
Const4
Const5

NO

SIGNAL NAME
451
452
453
454
455

406
407
408

456
457
458

409
410
411

459
460
461

412
413
414

462
463
464

415
416
417

465
466
467

418
419
420

468
469
470

421
422
423

471
472
473

424
425
426

474
475
476
477

427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449

478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499

450

281

CONTENTS

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Control Table
NO

SIGNAL NAME
0 LEDRST_SIG
1 LEDRST_ORCAT

CONTENTS
LED Reset
Control - LED Reset Originator category

2 LEDRST_ORID

Control - LED Reset Originator category

3 LEDRST_ORCAT_ST

Status - LED Rst Originator category

4 LEDRST_ORID_ST

Status - LED Rst Originator category

5 RESERVE

Reserve

6 RESERVE

Reserve

7 RESERVE

Reserve

8 RESERVE

Reserve

9 RESERVE

Reserve

10 MOD_CHECK

MOD_CHECK

11 MOD_CTLNUM

MOD_CTLNUM

12 MOD_CTLVAL

MOD_CTLVAL

13 MOD_ORCAT

MOD_ORCAT

14 MOD_ORIDENT

MOD_ORIDENT

15 MOD_TEST

MOD_TEST

16 MOD_CTLMDL

MOD_CTLMDL

17 MOD_ST_ORCAT

MOD_ST_ORCAT

18 MOD_ST_ORIDENT

MOD_ST_ORIDENT

19 MOD_SELECT

MOD_SELECT

20 MOD_SBOTIMEOUT

MOD_SBOTIMEOUT

21 MOD_SBOCLASS

MOD_SBOCLASS

282

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix D
Event Record Default Setting list

283

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Event record
Default setting
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

Name
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV5
EV6
EV7
EV8
EV9
EV10
EV11
EV12
EV13
EV14
EV15
EV16
EV17
EV18
EV19
EV20
EV21
EV22
EV23
EV24
EV25
EV26
EV27
EV28
EV29
EV30
EV31
EV32
EV33
EV34
EV35
EV36
EV37
EV38
EV39
EV40
EV41
EV42
EV43
EV44
EV45
EV46
EV47
EV48
EV49
EV50
EV51
EV52
EV53
EV54
EV55
EV56
EV57
EV58
EV59
EV60
EV61
EV62
EV63
EV64

Range
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071

Unit

Contents

Signal No.

Signal name

Signal No.
Event record signal
768
ditto
769
ditto
770
ditto
771
ditto
772
ditto
773
ditto
774
ditto
775
ditto
1639
ditto
371
ditto
380
ditto
355
ditto
318
ditto
403
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
1251
ditto
1266
ditto
1268
ditto
1269
ditto
1270
ditto
1271
ditto
1275
ditto
1276
ditto
1277
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
1258
ditto
1438
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
ditto
0

Signal Name
BI1 command
BI2 command
BI3 command
BI4 command
BI5 command
BI6 command
BI7 command
BI8 command
Ind reset
GEN trip
GEN alarm
FRQ trip
CBF trip
ARC shot

Relay fail
CT err
V0 err
V2 err
TCSV
CBSV
CTF alarm
VTF1 alarm
VTF2 alarm

Ry fail-A
Data lost

284

Model
110D

Type

400D
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x

420D

x
x
x

x
x
x

x
-

x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x

x
x

On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Event record
Default setting
No.
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128

Name
EV65
EV66
EV67
EV68
EV69
EV70
EV71
EV72
EV73
EV74
EV75
EV76
EV77
EV78
EV79
EV80
EV81
EV82
EV83
EV84
EV85
EV86
EV87
EV88
EV89
EV90
EV91
EV92
EV93
EV94
EV95
EV96
EV97
EV98
EV99
EV100
EV101
EV102
EV103
EV104
EV105
EV106
EV107
EV108
EV109
EV110
EV111
EV112
EV113
EV114
EV115
EV116
EV117
EV118
EV119
EV120
EV121
EV122
EV123
EV124
EV125
EV126
EV127
EV128

Range
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071

Unit

Contents
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

Signal No.

Signal name

Signal No.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
0
0
0
0
0
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
1448
1449
1450
0
1272
1273
1274
0
0
0
1445
0
1409
1435
1436
1437
1439
1440
1441
1442

Signal Name

Model
110D

BO1 operate
BO2 operate
BO3 operate
BO4 operate
BO5 operate
BO6 operate
BO7 operate

x
x
x
x
x
x
x

SET.GROUP1
SET.GROUP2
SET.GROUP3
SET.GROUP4
SET.GROUP5
SET.GROUP6
SET.GROUP7
SET.GROUP8
Sys. change
Rly. change
Grp. change

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

TC alarm
SGM_Iy alarm
OT alarm

420D

x
-

x
x

PLC data CHG

LED RST
F.record_CLR
E.record_CLR
D.record_CLR
TP_COUNT_CL
R
Iy_COUNT_CLR
AR_COUNT_CL
R
DEMAND_CLR

x
x
x
x
x

285

Type

400D

x
x
x

On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

286

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix E
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation

287

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Test
/1 Record
F. record
E. record
D. record
Counter
/2 F.record
Display

/3 F.record

Clear

#1 16/Jul/2002
18:13:57.031

Refer to Section
4.2.3.1.

Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 E.record
Display

/3 E.record

Clear

16/Jul/2002 480
OC1-A trip On

Refer to Section
4.2.3.2.

Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 D.record
Display

/3 D.record

Clear

#1 16/Jul/2002
18:13:57.401

Refer to Section
4.2.3.3.

Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N

a-1 b-1

288

/4 F.record #1
16/Jul/2002

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1 b-1

/2 Counter
Display

/3 Counter
Trips *****

Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear

TripsA *****
TripsB *****
TripsC *****
I^yA ******E6
I^yB ******E6
I^yC ******E6
ARCs ******

Trips
Trips A
Trips B
Trips C
I^yA
I^yB
I^yC
ARCs

Refer to Section
4.2.3.4.

Clear Trips?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear I^yA?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear I^yB?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear I^yC?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear ARCs?
END=Y CANCEL=N

a-1

289

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1

/1 Status
Metering

/2 Metering
Current

Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast

Demand
Direction
/2 Binary I/O
IP [0000 0000]

Refer to Section 4.2.4.

/2 Ry element
A OC1-4[0000 ]
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Act.
/2 12/Nov/2002
22:56:19
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
/2 Version
Relay type
Serial No.
Software
/2 Description
Plant name

Refer to Section 4.2.5

GRD140-400D-10
-A0

GSPDM1-04-*

Description
/2 Comms
Addr./Param.
Switch

/3 Addr./Param.
IEC
2
/3 Switch

a-1, b-1

290

/3 Current
la
**.** kA
/3 Demand
lamax
**.** kA
/3 Direction
la
Forward

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1 b-1

/2 Record
F.record
E.record
D.record
Counter

/3 F.record
FL
Off/On

/3 E.record
Signal No.

/4 Signal No.
BITRN
100
/4 Event name

Event name
/3 D.record
Time/starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig.
Signal name

/4 Time/starter
Time
2.0s
/4 Scheme sw

/4 Binary sig.
SIG1

/4 Signal name
SIG1

/3 Counter
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.

/3 Metering

/3 Time sync.

/2 Act. gp. =*
Common
Group1
:
Group8
/3 Common

/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

291

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Alarm set
TCALM 10000

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

/4 Parameter
Line name
CT/VT ratio
Fault Locator

/5 CT/VT ratio
OCCT
400
/5 Fault Loc.
X1
10.0 OHM
/6 Application

/4 Trip
Scheme sw

/6 OC

Prot.element
/5 Scheme sw
Application
OC
EF
SEF
NOC
Misc.
Cold Load
OV
UV
ZOV
NOV
FRQ

/6 EF

/6 SEF

/6 NOC

/6 Misc.

/6 Cold Load

/6 OV

/6 UV

/6 ZOV

/6 NOV

/6 FRQ
a-1

b-1

C-1

d-1

e-1

292

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1

b-1

c-1

d-1 e-1

/5 Prot.element
OC
EF
SEF
NOC
Misc.
Cold Load
OV
UV
ZOV
NOV
FRQ
CTF/VTF

/6 OC
OC

45

/6 EF
EF

45

/6 SEF
SE

+90

/6 NOC
NC

45

/6 Misc.
UC1
0.40A
/6 Cold Load
OC1
2.00A

/4 ARC
Scheme sw

/6 OV
OV1

120.0V

/6 UV
UV1

60.0V

/6 ZOV
ZOV1

20.0V

/6 NOV
NOV1

20.0V

/6 FRQ
FRQ1

1.00Hz

/6 CTF/VTF
EFF
0.20A

ARC element
/5 Scheme SW
General

/6 General

OC
EF
SEF
Misc

/6 OC
/6 EF

/5 ARC element
TRDY
60.0s

/6 SEF
/6 Misc

a-1

b-1

C-1

293

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1

b-1

c-1

/3 Group2
Parameter
/3 Group8
Parameter
/2 Binary I/P
Timers

/4 Timers

Functions
/4 Functions

/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, D
1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1005
BO2 AND, DL
, ,
BO7 OR, L
, ,
BO1TBO 0.20s

BO7TBO

0.20s

/2 LED
LED

/3 LED

Virtual LED
/3 Virtual LED
IND1

/4 LED1
BIT1

I,O

/4 LED2
BIT1

I,O

IND2

a-1 b-1

294

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1

/1 Set.(change)
Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED

: Password trap

Password [_ ]
1234567890
: Confirmation trap

Input
[_ ]
1234567890

Change settings?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

Retype
[_ ]
1234567890

Refer to Section 4.2.6.2.

/2 Description
Plant name
Description
Alarm1 Text
:
Alarm4 Text
/2 Comms
Addr./Param.

_
ABCDEFG
_
ABCDEFG
/3 Addr./Param.

/3 Switch

Switch
Refer to Section
4.2.6.4.

/3 F.record

/2 Record
F.record

/3 E.record

E.record
D.record
Counter

BITRN
100 _
:

Refer to Section
4.2.6.5.

/3 D.record
Time/starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig.
/3 Counter
Scheme sw
Alarm set

a-1 b-2

295

/4 Time/starter

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Binary sig.

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Alarm set

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1 b-2

/3 Metering

/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
Time zone

/3 Time sync.

Refer to Section 4.2.6.6.

/3 Time zone
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set.
Copy gp.

Refer to Section
4.2.6.7.

/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
Group2
:
Group8
/4 Common

/4 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
/5 Parameter
Line name
CT/VT ratio
Fault Locator

_
ABCDEFG
/6 CT/VT ratio

/6 Fault Loc.

a-1 b-2

c-2 d-2 e-2

296

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

e-2

/5 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/6 Scheme sw
Application
OC
EF
SEF
NOC
Misc.
Cold Load
OV
UV
ZOV
NOV
FRQ

/7 Application

/7 OC

/7 EF

/7 SEF

/7 NOC

/7 Misc.

/7 Cold Load

/7 OV

/7 UV

/7 ZOV

/7 NOV

/7 FRQ

a-1, b-2 c-2 d-2 e-2 f-2

297

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

e-2 f-2

/7 OC
/6 Prot.element
OC
EF
SEF
NOC
Misc.
Cold Load
OV
UV
ZOV
NOV
FRQ
CTF/VTF

/7 EF
/7 SEF
/7 NOC
/7 Misc.
/7 Cold Load
/7 OV
/7 UV
/7 ZOV
/7 NOV
/7 FRQ

/5 ARC
Scheme sw

/7 CTF/VTF

ARC element
/6 Scheme SW
General

/7 General

OC
EF
SEF
Misc

/7 OC
/7 EF

/6 ARC element

/7 SEF
/7 Misc

a-1, b-2 c-2 e-2

298

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1 b-2 c-2

d-2

/4 Group2
Parameter
/4 Group8
Parameter
/3 Copy A to B
A
_
B

/2 Binary I/P
BI1

/3 BI1
Timers

BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI7
BI8

Functions

/4 Timers

/4 Functions

/3 BI8
Timers
Functions

Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.

/2 Binary O/P
BO1

/3 BO1
Logic/Reset
Functions

BO7
Refer to Section
4.2.6.9.

/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/3 LED
LED1

Functions
Refer to Section
4.2.6.10.

/4 LED1
Logic/Reset

LED6
/4 LED6
Logic/Reset
c-3

/4 Functions

/3 BO7
Logic/Reset

Functions

a-1

/4 Logic/Reset

Functions

299

/5 Logic/Reset

/5 Functions

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
a-1

c-3

/3 Virtual LED
IND1

/4 IND1
Reset

IND2

Functions

/5 Reset

/5 Functions

/4 IND2
Reset
Functions
/1 Test
Switch

/2 Switch

Binary O/P
Logic circuit

A.M.F.
Off/On
UVTST
Off/On
CLPTST
Off/S0/S3
THMRST
Off/On
SHOTNUM
Off/S1-S6
IECTST
Off/On

Refer to Section 4.2.7.


: Password trap

Password [_ ]
1234567890

1 _
0
0
0
0
0

/2 Binary O/P
BO1
0 _
Disable/Enable
FAIL
0
Disable/Enable
/2 Logic
circuit
TermA
1
TermB
1001

_
_
1

300

Operate?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION

MANUAL
MODE
1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED
ITEMS

NORMAL
(DISPLAY OFF)

VIEW

PRESS ANY
BUTTON
EXCEPT FOR
"VIEW" AND
"RESET"

2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN

1=RECORD
MENU
( DISPLAY ON )

1=FAULT RECORD
2=EVENT RECORD
3=DISTURBANCE RECORD

METERING 1
( DISPLAY ON )

4=COUNTER

2=STATUS
VIEW

RESET

1=METERING
2=BINARY INPUT&OUPUT

METERING 13
( DISPLAY ON )

VIEW

AUTOMODE 1

3=RELAY ELELMENT

TRIP OUTPUT
ISSUED !

5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

4=TIME SYNC SOURCE

RESET

TRIP
( LED ON )

3=SETTING
(VIEW)
1=RELAY VERSION

LATEST FAULT *
( DISPLAY ON )

2=DESCRIPTION

AUTOMODE 2

3=COMMUNICATION
4=RECORD

RELAY
FAILED !
VIEW

5=STATUS

RESET

ALARM
( LED ON )

6=PROTECTION
7=BINARY INPUT
8=BINARY OUTPUT

AUTO SUPERVISON *
( DISPLAY ON )

9=LED
*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO
SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS
DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA
IS STORED

VIEW

RESET

4=SETTING
(CHANGE)

Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu

5=TEST
1=SWITCH
2=BINARY OUTPUT

301

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

302

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix F
Case Outline

303

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

I N SERVICE

RESET

258

VI EW

T RIP
ALARM

0V CAN

CEL ENTER
END

15.6

104

185.2

32

Side view

Front view

4 holes-5.5

4 holes-4.5
OPT
T
TB1

TB3

TB1

TB2

R
TB3

F1
R
T

Rear view for


Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX

Rear view for


RS485 + 100BASE-TX

56
102

Panel cut-out
TB3

TB1

1
3
5
7
A1

A1

2
4
6
8

TB2

B1

B1

Terminal

Application

TB3: A1 A3

RS485 I/F

TB3: B1 B2

IRIG-B

OPT

Fibre optic for IEC 60870-5-103

T1

100BASE-TX

F1

100BASE-FX

TB1,TB2,TB3: Screw terminal (M3.5 Ring)


T1: RJ45
A10

OPT: ST connector

B10

F1: SC connector
A18

B18

Terminal block

Case Outline

304

24 9

T1

239

TB2

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix G
Typical External Connection

305

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
GRD140 110D

Core balance
CT

Ie
Ise

BO2

A7
B7
A6
B6

BO3

B8
A8
A9
B9

FRAME EARTH
TB11
2

Ves
FRAME EARTH

BI6

COMMAND

BI7

COMMAND

BI8

COMMAND

BI1

COMMAND

BI2

COMMAND

BI3

COMMAND

BI4

COMMAND

TB2A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8

COMMAND

GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
EF1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
ZOV1 TRIP

A10
B10
A11
B11

BO4
(P)

BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7

A4
A5
B5

BO1

TB15
6
7
8
Line VT

BI5

OUTPUT CONTACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

TB3B4

CT

A13
BI6

B13
A12
B12

BO5

BI7

A14
BI8

B14
A15
B15

BO6

BI1

A16

BI2

BO7

B16

FAIL

A17
A18
B18

BI3
B17

BI4
BI5

(N)

RELAY FAIL.

COM-A

TB3-A2

DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY

TB2- A9

(+)

+5Vdc
DC-DC

B9

(-)

0V

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)


A3

COM-0V

A10

OPT

B10

()

A1

COM-B

T
R

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

FRAME EARTH
E

TX

CASE EARTH

FX

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)


Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

TB3-B2
B1

Typical External Connection

306

IRIG-B

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
GRD140 400D
Bus VT
A

TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Vs

CT

Ia

Ic
Ie

B7
A6
B6

BO2

TB2A1
Va
Vb

A10

A2
B2

Vc

A3
B3

Ves

A13

(P)
COMMAND

BI2

COMMAND

BI3

COMMAND

BI4

COMMAND

BI5

COMMAND

B13
A12
B12

FRAME EARTH

(Note) In case busbar voltage Vs is introduced for


synchronizm check, zero phase voltage Ve
is composed from phase voltages by
software.

BI1

B10
A11
B11

BO4

BO5

Vs
(Busbar or Line Voltage)

GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
OC1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
UV1 TRIP
ZOV1 TRIP

B8
A8
A9
B9

BO3

B1

BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7

A4
A5
B5
A7

BO1

Ib

FRAME EARTH
Line VT

OUTPUT CONTACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

TB3B4

A14
B14
A15
B15

BO6
TB2A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8

BI1

A16
BO7

BI2

B16

BI3

B17
A17
A18
B18

FAIL

BI4
BI5

(N)
RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY

TB2- A9

(+)

B9

(-)

+5Vdc

TB3-A2

COM-A

DC-DC
0V

A1

COM-B

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)


A10
B10

()

FRAME EARTH
E

A3

COM-0V
OPT

T
R

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

CASE EARTH
TX
FX

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)


Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

TB3-B2
B1

IRIG-B

Typical External Connection

307

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

GRD140 420D

Bus VT
A

TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Vs

CT

Core balance
CT

Ia

Ic
Ise

B7
A6
B6

BO2

FRAME EARTH

Va

(Note) In case busbar voltage Vs is introduced


for synchronizm check, zero phase
voltage Ve is composed from phase
voltages by software.

(P)
BI1

COMMAND

BI3

COMMAND

BI4

COMMAND

BI5

COMMAND

A10

Vc

A3
B3

Ves

A13

FRAME EARTH

B13
A12
B12

B10
A11
B11

BO4

A14
B14
A15
B15

BO6
TB2A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8

COMMAND

BI2

Vb

A2
B2

BO5

Vs
(Busbar or LineVoltage)

GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
OC1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
UV1 TRIP
ZOV1 TRIP

B8
A8
A9
B9

BO3

B1

BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7

A4
A5
B5
A7

BO1

Ib

TB2A1

OUTPUT CONTACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

TB3B4

A16

BI1
BO7

B16

BI2
B17

BI3

A17
A18
B18

FAIL

BI4
BI5

(N)
RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY

TB2- A9

(+)

B9

(-)

+5Vdc

COM-A

TB3-A2

DC-DC
0V

A1

COM-B

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)

A10
FRAME EARTH
E

A3

COM-0V

B10

()

CASE EARTH

OPT

T
R
TX
FX

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)


Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

TB3-B2
B1

Typical External Connection

308

IRIG-B

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

GRD140 401D
TB3A4

Bus VT
A

(1) HBO1
TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Vs

CT

A5
(1) HBO2

Ia

A6
(1) HBO3

Ie

A8

TB3A10

TB2A1
Va

B1

BO1

A11

Vc

BO2

Ves

BO3

BI2

COMMAND

BI3

COMMAND

BI4

COMMAND

BI5

COMMAND

B12
A13

FRAME EARTH
BO4

(Note) In case busbar voltage Vs is introduced for


synchronizm check, zero phase voltage Ve
is composed from phase voltages by
software.

COMMAND

B11
A12

A3
B3

BI1

B10

Vb

A2
B2

(P)

(+)

B8

FRAME EARTH

Vs
(Busbar or Line Voltage)

(+)

B6

(1) HBO4

Line VT

(+)

B5

Ib
Ic

(+)

B4

B13
A14

TB2A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8

BO5

B14

BI1

A15
BO6

B15

BI2
BI3

B17
A17
A18
B18

FAIL

BI4
BI5

(N)
RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY

(+)

TB2- A9
B9

(-)

+5Vdc

COM-A

TB3-A2

DC-DC
0V

A1

COM-B

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)


A10
B10

(2)

FRAME EARTH
E

A3

COM-0V

T
R

OPT

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

CASE EARTH
TX
FX

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)


Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

TB3-B2
B1

IRIG-B

(1) HBO1 to HBO4: High-speed relay


(2) These connections are connected by
short-bars before shipment.

Typical External Connection

309

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

GRD140 421D
TB3A4

Bus VT
A

(1) HBO1
TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Vs

CT

Core balance
CT

A5
(1) HBO2

Ia

A6
(1) HBO3

A8

Ise

TB3A10

TB2A1
Va

B1

BO1

A11

Vc

BO2

Ves

BO3

BI2

COMMAND

BI3

COMMAND

BI4

COMMAND

BI5

COMMAND

B12
A13

FRAME EARTH
BO4

(Note) In case busbar voltage Vs is introduced for


synchronizm check, zero phase voltage Ve
is composed from phase voltages by
software.

COMMAND

B11
A12

A3
B3

BI1

B10

Vb

A2
B2

(P)

(+)

B8

FRAME EARTH

Vs
(Busbar or Line Voltage)

(+)

B6

(1) HBO4

Line VT

(+)

B5

Ib
Ic

(+)

B4

B13
A14

TB2A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8

BO5

B14

BI1

A15
BO6

B15

BI2
BI3

B17
A17
A18
B18

FAIL

BI4
BI5

(N)
RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY

(+)

TB2- A9
B9

(-)

+5Vdc

COM-A

TB3-A2

DC-DC
0V

A1

COM-B

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)


A10
B10

(2)

FRAME EARTH
E

A3

COM-0V

T
R

OPT

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

CASE EARTH
TX
FX

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)


Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

TB3-B2
B1

IRIG-B

(1) HBO1 to HBO4: High-speed relay


(2) These connections are connected by
short-bars before shipment.

Typical External Connection

310

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
CT connection
Bus

Bus
TB1 -1
TB1 -2

TB1 -1

Ia

TB1 -2

TB1 -3
TB1 -4

Ib

TB1 -4

TB1 -5
TB1 -6

Ib

TB1 -5

Ic

TB1 -6

TB1 -7
TB1 -8

Ia

TB1 -3

Ic

TB1 -7

Ie(Io)

[APPL-CT] = 3P Setting for Model 400

TB1 -8

Ise(Io)

[APPL-CT] = 3P Setting for Model 420

Bus

Bus

TB1 -1

TB1 -1
TB1 -2

Ia

TB1 -2

TB1 -4

Ic

TB1 -4

Ic

TB1 -5

TB1 -5
TB1 -6

Ia

TB1 -3

TB1 -3

Ie(Io)

TB1 -6

TB1 -7

TB1 -7

TB1 -8

TB1 -8

[APPL-CT] = 2P Setting for Model 400

Bus

Ie(Io)
Ise(Io)

[APPL-CT] = 2P Setting for Model 420

Bus
TB1 -1

TB1 -1

TB1 -2

TB1 -2

TB1 -3

TB1 -3

TB1 -4

TB1 -4

TB1 -5
TB1 -6

TB1 -5

Ie(Io)

TB1 -6

TB1 -7

TB1 -7

TB1 -8

TB1 -8

[APPL-CT] = 1P Setting for Model 400

311

Ie(Io)
Ise(Io)

[APPL-CT] = 1P Setting for Model 420

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
VT connection
Bus

Bus
TB2A1

TB2-A1

Va

Va

TB2-B1

TB2-B1

Vb
TB2-A2
TB2-B2

Vc

TB2-B2

TB2-A3

TB2-A3

TB2-B3

TB1-B3

[APPLVT]=ON and [APPLVES]=Off Setting for


Model 400 or 420

Bus
TB2-A1

Va
TB2-B1

Vb
TB2-A2
TB2-B2

Vc

TB2-A3

To Bus or Line voltage

Vb
TB2-A2

TB1-B3

Vs(for 25)

[APPLVT]=ON and [APPLVES]=Vs Setting


for Model 400 or 420

312

Vc
Ve(Vo)

[APPLVT]=ON and [APPLVES]=Ve Setting


for Model 400 or 420

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix H
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Binary output setting
4. Relay setting
5. Disturbance record signal setting
6. LED setting

313

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
1. Relay Identification

Date:

Relay type

Serial Number

Frequency

AC current

AC voltage

DC supply voltage

Password
Active setting group

2. Line parameter
CT ratio

OC:

EF:

VT ratio

PVT:

RVT:

314

SEF:

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3. Binary output setting

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

Setting
Device
Name

Range

Unit

Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO

OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00

Contents
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer

Default Setting
Model
110D
400D
420D
Settin Signal Name Settin Signal Name Settin Signal Name
-OR
-OR
-OR
Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-371
GEN.TRIP
371
GEN.TRIP
371
GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
--OR
-OR
-OR
Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-371
GEN.TRIP
371
GEN.TRIP
371
GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
--OR
-OR
-OR
Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-371
GEN.TRIP
261
OC1_TRIP
371
GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
--OR
-OR
-OR
Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-261
OC1_TRIP
281
EF1_TRIP
281
EF1_TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
--OR
-OR
-OR
Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-281
EF1_TRIP
291
SEF1281
EF1_TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
-OR
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-341
UV1_TRIP
291
SEF1341
UV1_TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
--OR
-OR
-OR
Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-351 ZOV1_TRIP 351 ZOV1_TRIP 351 ZOV1_TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
--

315

Setting
Model
Setting

Signal Name

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
4. Relay setting
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

Def ault Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)

Range

(Of f set
No.)

Setting Device Name


5A rating

Model

Contents

Units
1A rating

110D

400D

420D

21000

Active group

1-8

Active setting group

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

21001
21010
21002
21003
21005
21006
21007
21008
21009
21011

APPLCT
APPLVT
APPLVES
CTFEN
VTF1EN
VTF2EN
CTSVEN
V0SVEN
V2SVEN
AOLED

Of f - 3P - 2P - 1P
Of f - On
Of f - Ve - Vs
Of f - On - OPT-On
Of f - On - OPT-On
Of f - On - OPT-On
Of f - ALM&BLK - ALM
Of f - ALM&BLK - ALM
Of f - ALM&BLK - ALM
Of f - On

Application setting of CT
Application setting of VT
Application setting of VT-Ves
CTF Enable
VTF1 Enable
VTF2 Enable
AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable
ditto
ditto
TRIP LED lighting control at alarm output

12

5000

Line name

Specif ied by user

Line name

13
14
15
16
17

6000
6001
6003
6004
6005

OCCT
EFCT
SEFCT
PVT
VESVT

1 - 20000
1 - 20000
1 - 20000
1 - 20000
1 - 20000

Phase CT ratio
Residual CT ratio
SEF CT ratio
Phase VT ratio
Ves's VT ratio

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010

0.00 - 199.99
0.0 - 999.9
0.00 - 199.99
0.0 - 999.9
0.00 - 199.99
0.0 - 999.9
0.00 - 199.99
0.0 - 999.9
80 - 120
80 - 120
80 - 120
80 - 120
80 - 120
80 - 120
0.0 - 399.9

%
%
%
%
%
%
km

Fault location
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

------------

2.00 / 10.0
6.80 / 34.0
0.20 / 1.0
0.70 / 3.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
50.0

29

1000

MOC1

D - IEC - IEEE - US - C

OC1 Delay Type

--

30
31
32
33
34
35
36

1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007

MOC2
MEF1
MEF2
MSE1
MSE2
MNC1
MNC2

D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C

OC2 Delay Type


EF1 Delay Type
EF2 Delay Type
SEF1 Delay Type
SEF2 Delay Type
NOC1 Delay Type
NOC2 Delay Type

--

D
D
---

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61

1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1208
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1209
1021
1022
1023
1210
1024
1025
1026
1211
1027
1028

OC

OC1EN
OC1-DIR
MOC1C-IEC
MOC1C-IEEE
MOC1C-US
OC1R
OC1-2F
VTF-OC1BLK
OC2EN
OC2-DIR
MOC2C-IEC
MOC2C-IEEE
MOC2C-US
OC2R
OC2-2F
VTF-OC2BLK
OC3EN
OC3-DIR
OC3-2F
VTF-OC3BLK
OC4EN
OC4-DIR
OC4-2F
VTF-OC4BLK
OCTP

Of f - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Of f - On
Of f - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Of f - On
Of f - On
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Of f - On
Of f - On
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Of f - On
3POR - 2OUTOF3

OC1 Enable
OC1 Directional Characteristic
OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
OC1 US Inverse Curve Type
OC1 Reset Characteristic
2f Block Enable
VTF block enable
OC2 Enable
OC2 Directional Characteristic
OC2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
OC2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
OC2 US Inverse Curve Type
OC2 Reset Characteristic
2f Block Enable
VTF block enable
OC3 Enable
OC3 Directional Characteristic
2f Block Enable
VTF block enable
OC4 Enable
OC4 Directional Characteristic
2f Block Enable
VTF block enable
OC trip mode

--------------------------

62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70

1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1212
1035
1036

EF

EF1EN
EF1-DIR
MEF1C-IEC
MEF1C-IEEE
MEF1C-US
EF1R
EF1-2F
CTF-EF1BLK
VTF-EF1BLK

Of f - On - POP
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Of f - On
Of f - On

EF1 Enable
EF1 Directional Characteristic
EF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
EF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
EF1 US Inverse Curve Type
EF1 Reset Characteristic
2f Block Enable
CTF block enable
VTF block enable

FL

X1
X0
R1
R0
Kab
Kbc
Kca
Ka
Kb
Kc
Line

316

1
----------

3P
On
Ve
Of f
Of f
Of f
ALM
ALM
ALM
On
no-name

-400
--

400
400
--

400
100

100

D
D
D
---

D
D
D
D
On
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Of f
Of f
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Of f
Of f
FWD
NA
Of f
Of f
FWD
NA
Of f
3POR

On
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
----

NA
Of f
Of f

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

Range
Setting Device Name

(No.)

71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146

(Offset
No.)
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1213
1043
1044
1045
1046
1214
1047
1048
1049
1050
1215
1051
1052
1053
1054
SEF
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1216
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1217
1068
1069
1070
1218
1071
1072
1073
1219
1074
1075
1076
NOC
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1220
1082
1083
1084
1085
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1086
1087
1088
UC
1089
1090
1091
1092 Thermal
1093
1094
BCD
1226
1095
CBF
1096
1097 Cold Load
1098

Units
5A rating

EF2EN
EF2-DIR
MEF2C-IEC
MEF2C-IEEE
MEF2C-US
EF2R
EF2-2F
CTF-EF2BLK
VTF-EF2BLK
EF3EN
EF3-DIR
EF3-2F
CTF-EF3BLK
VTF-EF3BLK
EF4EN
EF4-DIR
EF4-2F
CTF-EF4BLK
VTF-EF4BLK
CURREV
SE1EN
SE1-DIR
MSE1C-IEC
MSE1C-IEEE
MSE1C-US
SE1R
SE1S2
SE1-2F
VTF-SE1BLK
SE2EN
SE2-DIR
MSE2C-IEC
MSE2C-IEEE
MSE2C-US
SE2R
SE2-2F
VTF-SE2BLK
SE3EN
SE3-DIR
SE3-2F
VTF-SE3BLK
SE4EN
SE4-DIR
SE4-2F
VTF-SE4BLK
RPEN
NC1EN
NC1-DIR
MNC1C-IEC
MNC1C-IEEE
MNC1C-US
NC1R
NC1-2F
CTF-NC1BLK
VTF-NC1BLK
NC2EN
NC2-DIR
MNC2C-IEC
MNC2C-IEEE
MNC2C-US
NC2R
NC2-2F
CTF-NC2BLK
VTF-NC2BLK
UC1EN
CTF-UC1BLK
UC2EN
CTF-UC2BLK
THMEN
THMAEN
BCDEN
BCD-2F
BTC
RTC
CLEN
CLDOEN

Contents

1A rating

Off - On - POP
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On - POP
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On - POP
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - 1 - 2 - 3 - 4
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
Off - On
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - DIR - OC
Off - On
Off - On

Default Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)


Model
110D

EF2 Enable
EF2 Directional Characteristic
EF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
EF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
EF2 US Inverse Curve Type
EF2 Reset Characteristic
2f Block Enable
CTF block enable
VTF block enable
EF3 Enable
EF3 Directional Characteristic
2f Block Enable
CTF block enable
VTF block enable
EF4 Enable
EF4 Directional Characteristic
2f Block Enable
CTF block enable
VTF block enable
Current reverse detection
SEF1 Enable
SEF1 Directional Characteristic
SEF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
SEF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
SEF1 US Inverse Curve Type
SEF1 Reset Characteristic
SEF1 Stage 2 Timer Enable
2f Block Enable
VTF block enable
SEF2 Enable
SEF2 Directional Characteristic
SEF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
SEF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
SEF2 US Inverse Curve Type
SEF2 Reset Characteristic
2f Block Enable
VTF block enable
SEF3 Enable
SEF3 Directional Characteristic
2f Block Enable
VTF block enable
SEF4 Enable
SEF4 Directional Characteristic
2f Block Enable
VTF block enable
Residual Power block Enable
NOC1 Enable
NOC1 Directional Characteristic
NOC1 IEC InverNC Curve Type
NOC1 IEEE InverNC Curve Type
NOC1 US InverNC Curve Type
NOC1 ReNCt Characteristic
2f Block Enable
CTF block enable
VTF block enable
NOC2 Enable
NOC2 Directional Characteristic
NOC2 IEC InverNC Curve Type
NOC2 IEEE InverNC Curve Type
NOC2 US InverNC Curve Type
NOC2 ReNCt Characteristic
2f Block Enable
CTF block enable
VTF block enable
UC1 Enable
CTF block enable
UC2 Enable
CTF block enable
Thermal OL Enable
Thermal Alarm Enable
Broken Conductor Enable
2f Block Enable
Back-trip control
Re-trip control
Cold Load Protection Enable
Cold Load drop-off Enable

317

400D

420D

Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
----

NA
Off
Off
Off
FWD

----

NA
Off
Off
Off
FWD

----

NA
Off
Off
Off
--------

On
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
Off

On
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
Off
NA
Off
Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
FWD
NA
Off
Off
FWD
NA
Off
Off

--Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF

---------

Off
FWD

-----

Off
FWD

-----

Off
-------------------------------

-Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
NA
Off
Off
Off
Off

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

Def ault Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)

Range

(Of f set
No.)

Setting Device Name

Units
5A rating

Model

Contents

1A rating

110D

400D

420D

147
148
149
150

1099
1100
1227
1228

OV

OV1EN
OV2EN
OV3EN
OV4EN

Of f - DT - IDMT - C
Of f - DT - IDMT - C
Of f - On
Of f - On

OV1 Enable
OV2 Enable
OV3 Enable
OV4 Enable

-----

Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f

151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159

1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1241
1229
1230
1231

UV

UV1EN
VTF-UV1BLK
UV2EN
VTF-UV2BLK
UV3EN
VTF-UV3BLK
UV4EN
VTF-UV4BLK
VBLKEN

Of f - DT - IDMT - C
Of f - On
Of f - DT - IDMT - C
Of f - On
Of f - On
Of f - On
Of f - On
Of f - On
Of f - On

UV1 Enable
VTF block enable
UV2 Enable
VTF block enable
UV3 Enable
VTF block enable
UV4 Enable
VTF block enable
UV Block Enable

----------

DT
Of f
DT
Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f

160
161
162
163

1106
1107
1108
1109

ZOV

ZOV1EN
VTF-ZV1BLK
ZOV2EN
VTF-ZV2BLK

Of f - DT - IDMT - C
Of f - On
Of f - DT - IDMT - C
Of f - On

ZOV1 Enable
VTF block enable
ZOV2 Enable
VTF block enable

--

Of f

164
165
166
167

1110
1111
1112
1113

NOV

NOV1EN
VTF-NV1BLK
NOV2EN
VTF-NV2BLK

Of f - DT - IDMT - C
Of f - On
Of f - DT - IDMT - C
Of f - On

NOV1 Enable
VTF block enable
NOV2 Enable
VTF block enable

-----

Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f

168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175

1114
1115
1116
1117
1232
1233
1234
1235

FRQ

FRQ1EN
FRQ2EN
FRQ3EN
FRQ4EN
DFRQ1EN
DFRQ2EN
DFRQ3EN
DFRQ4EN

Of f - OF - UF
Of f - OF - UF
Of f - OF - UF
Of f - OF - UF
Of f - R - D
Of f - R - D
Of f - R - D
Of f - R - D

FRQ1 Enable
FRQ2 Enable
FRQ3 Enable
FRQ4 Enable
DFRQ1 Enable
DFRQ2 Enable
DFRQ3 Enable
DFRQ4 Enable

---------

Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f

176

3000

deg

177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200

3001
12000
3002
3003
3004
3005
12001
3006
3007
3008
3009
12002
3010
12003
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020

201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222

3021
3022
3023
12004
3024
3025
3026
3027
12005
3028
3029
3030
3031
12006
3032
12007
12008
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037

DFRQ

OC

EF

OC

-95 - 95

OC1
TOC1
TOC1M
TOC1R
TOC1RM
OC2
TOC2
TOC2M
TOC2R
TOC2RM
OC3
TOC3
OC4
TOC4
OC1-k
OC1-
OC1-C
OC1-kr
OC1-
OC2-k
OC2-
OC2-C
OC2-kr
OC2-

0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00

EF
EFV
EF1
TEF1
TEF1M
TEF1R
TEF1RM
EF2
TEF2
TEF2M
TEF2R
TEF2RM
EF3
TEF3
EF4
TEF4
TREBK
EF1-k
EF1-
EF1-C
EF1-kr
EF1-

-95 - 95
0.5 - 100.0
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 10.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00

A
s

A
s

A
s
A
s

deg
V
A
s

A
s

A
s
A
s
s

DT
--

Of f
Of f

OC Characteristic Angle

--

-45

OC1 Threshold setting


OC1 Def inite time setting
OC1 Time multiplier setting
OC1 Def inite time reset delay
OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
OC2 Threshold setting
OC2 Def inite time setting
OC2 Time multiplier setting
OC2 Def inite time reset delay
OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
OC3 Threshold setting
OC3 Def inite time setting
OC4 Threshold setting
OC4 Def inite time setting
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

-------------------------

5.0 / 1.00
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
25.0 / 5.00
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
50.0 / 10.00
1.00
100.0 / 20.00
1.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00

EF Characteristic Angle
EF ZPS voltage level
EF1 Threshold setting
EF1 EFinite time setting
EF1 Time multiplier setting
EF1 EFinite time reset delay
EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
EF2 Threshold setting
EF2 EFinite time setting
EF2 Time multiplier setting
EF2 EFinite time reset delay
EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
EF3 Threshold setting
EF3 EFinite time setting
EF4 Threshold setting
EF4 EFinite time setting
Current reverse blocking time
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

318

-45
3.0
1.5 / 0.30
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
15.0 / 3.00
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
25.0 / 5.00
1.00
50.0 / 10.00
1.00
0.10
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

(Of f set
No.)

Units
5A rating

223
224
225
226
227

3038
3039
3040
3041
3042

228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

3043
3044
3045
12009
3046
3047
3048
12010
3049
12011
3050
3051
3052
3053
12012
3054
12013
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065

SEF

256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277

3066
3067
3068
12014
3069
3070
3071
3072
12015
3132
3158
3133
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138

NOC

278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292

3078
12016
3079
12017
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
12018
3085
12019
12020
3159
3139

UC

293
294
295
296
297
298

Def ault Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)

Range
Setting Device Name

Thermal

BCD
CBF

Inrush

3086 Cold Load


3087
3088
3089
3090
3091

1A rating

EF2-k
EF2-
EF2-C
EF2-kr
EF2-

0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00

SE
SEV
SE1
TSE1
TSE1M
TSE1R
TSE1RM
TS1S2
SE2
TSE2
TSE2M
TSE2R
TSE2RM
SE3
TSE3
SE4
TSE4
RP
SE1-k
SE1-
SE1-C
SE1-kr
SE1-
SE2-k
SE2-
SE2-C
SE2-kr
SE2-

-95 - 95
0.5 - 100.0
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.00 - 300.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 100.00
0.00 - 20.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00

NC
NCV
NC1
TNC1
TNC1M
TNC1R
TNC1RM
NC2
TNC2
TNC2M
TNC2R
TNC2RM
NC1-k
NC1-
NC1-C
NC1-kr
NC1-
NC2-k
NC2-
NC2-C
NC2-kr
NC2-

-95 - 95
0.5 - 25.0
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00

UC1
TUC1
UC2
TUC2
THM
THMIP
TTHM
THMA
BCD
TBCD
CBF
TBTC
TRTC
ICD-2f
ICDOC

0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
2.0 - 10.0
0.40 - 2.00
0.0 - 5.0
0.00 - 1.00
0.5 - 500.0
50 - 99
0.10 - 1.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
10 - 50
0.5 - 25.0
0.10 - 5.00

OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
EF1
EF2

0.1 - 25.0
0.1 - 25.0
0.1 - 250.0
0.1 - 250.0
0.1 - 25.0
0.1 - 25.0

0.02 - 5.00
0.02 - 5.00
0.02 - 50.00
0.02 - 50.00
0.02 - 5.00
0.02 - 5.00

Model

Contents
110D

deg
V
A
s

Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2


ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

400D

420D

0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00

SEF Characteristic Angle


SEF ZPS voltage level
SEF1 Threshold setting
SEF1 Def inite time setting
SEF1 Time multiplier setting
SEF1 Def inite time reset delay
SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
SEF1 Stage 2 def inite timer settings
SEF2 Threshold setting
SEF2 Def inite time setting
SEF2 Time multiplier setting
SEF2 Def inite time reset delay
SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
SEF3 Threshold setting
SEF3 Def inite time setting
SEF4 Threshold setting
SEF4 Def inite time setting
Residual Power Threshold
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

0
3.0
0.05 / 0.010
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
1.00
0.05 / 0.010
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
0.05 / 0.010
1.00
0.05 / 0.010
1.00
0.00 / 0.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00

NOC Characteristic Angle


NOC NPS voltage level
NOC1 Threshold setting
NOC1 Def inite time setting
NOC1 Time multiplier setting
NOC1 Def inite time reset delay
NOC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
NOC2 Threshold setting
NOC2 Def inite time setting
NOC2 Time multiplier setting
NOC2 Def inite time reset delay
NOC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of NOC1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of NOC2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

-----------------------

-45
3.0
2.0 / 0.40
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
1.0 / 0.20
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00

s
A
s
s
%
A

UC1 Threshold setting


UC1 Def inite time setting
UC2 Threshold setting
UC2 Def inite time setting
Thermal overload setting
Pre Current value
Thermal Time Constant
Thermal alarm setting
Broken Conductor Threshold setting
Broken Conductor Def inite time setting
CBF Threshold setting
Back trip Def inite time setting
Re-trip Def inite time setting
Sensitivity of 2f
Threshold of f undamental current

----------------

1.0 / 0.20
1.00
2.0 / 0.40
1.00
5.0 / 1.00
0.0 / 0.00
10.0
80
0.20
1.00
2.5 / 0.50
0.50
0.40
15
0.5 / 0.10

A
A
A
A
A
A

OC1 Threshold setting in CLP mode


OC2 Threshold setting in CLP mode
OC3 Threshold setting in CLP mode
OC4 Threshold setting in CLP mode
EF1 Threshold setting in CLP mode
EF2 Threshold setting in CLP mode

-------

s
A
s

A
s
A
s
W

deg
V
A
s

A
s

A
s
A
s
A
A
min
%

319

-----------------------------

0
3.0
0.05 / 0.010
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
1.00
0.05 / 0.010
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
0.05 / 0.010
1.00
0.05 / 0.010
1.00
0.00 / 0.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00

10.0 /
25.0 /
100.0 /
200.0 /
10.0 /
25.0 /

2.00
5.00
20.00
40.00
2.00
5.00

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

Def ault Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)

Range

(Of f set
No.)

Setting Device Name

Units
5A rating

299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311

3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
12021
12022
3101
12023

312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333

3102
12024
3103
3104
3105
3106
12025
3140
3141
3107
3142
12065
3160
3143
12066
3144
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175

OV

334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352

3108
12026
3109
3110
3111
12027
3145
3146
3147
12067
3148
12068
3112
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181

UV

353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366

3113
12028
3114
3115
3116
12029
3149
3150
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187

ZOV

367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374

3117
12030
3118
3119
3120
12031
3151
3152

NOV

1A rating

EF3
EF4
SE1
SE2
SE3
SE4
NC1
NC2
BCD
TCLE
TCLR
ICLDO
TCLDO

0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.10 - 1.00
0 - 10000
0 - 10000
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 100.00

OV1
TOV1
TOV1M
TOV1R
OV1DPR
OV2
TOV2
TOV2M
TOV2R
OV2DPR
OV3
TOV3
OV3DPR
OV4
TOV4
OV4DPR
OV1-k
OV1-
OV1-C
OV2-k
OV2-
OV2-C

10.0 - 200.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
10 - 98
10.0 - 200.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
10 - 98
10.0 - 200.0
0.00 - 300.00
10 - 98
10.0 - 200.0
0.00 - 300.00
10 - 98
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000

UV1
TUV1
TUV1M
TUV1R
UV2
TUV2
TUV2M
TUV2R
UV3
TUV3
UV4
TUV4
VBLK
UV1-k
UV1-
UV1-C
UV2-k
UV2-
UV2-C

5.0 - 130.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
5.0 - 130.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
5.0 - 130.0
0.00 - 300.00
5.0 - 130.0
0.00 - 300.00
5.0 - 20.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000

ZOV1
TZOV1
TZOV1M
TZOV1R
ZOV2
TZOV2
TZOV2M
TZOV2R
ZOV1-k
ZOV1-
ZOV1-C
ZOV2-k
ZOV2-
ZOV2-C

1.0 - 160.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
1.0 - 160.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000

NOV1
TNOV1
TNOV1M
TNOV1R
NOV2
TNOV2
TNOV2M
TNOV2R

1.0 - 160.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
1.0 - 160.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0

Model

Contents
110D

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

s
s
A
s
V
s

s
%
V
s

s
%
V
s
%
V
s
%

V
s

s
V
s

s
V
s
V
s
V

V
s

s
V
s

V
s

s
V
s

400D

---

420D

EF3 Threshold setting in CLP mode


EF4 Threshold setting in CLP mode
SEF1 Threshold setting in CLP mode
SEF2 Threshold setting in CLP mode
SEF3 Threshold setting in CLP mode
SEF4 Threshold setting in CLP mode
NOC1 Threshold setting in CLP mode
NOC2 Threshold setting in CLP mode
Broken Conductor Threshold setting in CLP mode
Cold load enable timer
Cold load reset timer
Cold load drop-out threshold setting
Cold load drop-out timer

--------

OV1 Threshold setting


OV1 Def inite time setting
OV1 Time multiplier setting
OV1 Def inite time reset delay
OV1 DO/PU ratio
OV2 Threshold setting
OV2 Def inite time setting
OV2 Time multiplier setting
OV2 Def inite time reset delay
OV2 DO/PU ratio
OV3 Threshold setting
OV3 Def inite time setting
OV3 DO/PU ratio
OV4 Threshold setting
OV4 Def inite time setting
OV4 DO/PU ratio
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
ditto
ditto
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
ditto
ditto

-----------------------

120.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
95
140.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
95
140.0
1.00
95
140.0
1.00
95
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000

UV1 Threshold setting


UV1 Def inite time setting
UV1 Time multiplier setting
UV1 Def inite time reset delay
UV2 Threshold setting
UV2 Def inite time setting
UV2 Time multiplier setting
UV2 Def inite time reset delay
UV3 Threshold setting
UV3 Def inite time setting
UV4 Threshold setting
UV4 Def inite time setting
UV Blocking threshold
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
ditto
ditto
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
ditto
ditto

--------------------

60.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
40.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
40.0
1.00
40.0
1.00
10.0
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000

-----

ZOV1 Threshold setting


ZOV1 Def inite time setting
ZOV1 Time multiplier setting
ZOV1 Def inite time reset delay
ZOV2 Threshold setting
ZOV2 Def inite time setting
ZOV2 Time multiplier setting
ZOV2 Def inite time reset delay
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV1
ditto
ditto
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV2
ditto
ditto
NOV1 Threshold setting
NOV1 Def inite time setting
NOV1 Time multiplier setting
NOV1 Def inite time reset delay
NOV2 Threshold setting
NOV2 Def inite time setting
NOV2 Time multiplier setting
NOV2 Def inite time reset delay

320

100.0 / 20.00
200.0 / 40.00
0.10 /
0.10 /
0.10 /
0.10 /
4.0 / 0.80
2.0 / 0.40
0.40
100
100
2.5 / 0.50
0.00

20.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
40.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000
---------

20.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
40.0
1.00
1.00
0.0

0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

Def ault Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)

Range

(Of f set
No.)

375
376
377
378
379
380

3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193

381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393

3121
12032
3122
12033
3123
12034
3124
12035
3125
3153
3154
3155
3156

Setting Device Name

Units
5A rating

FRQ

DFRQ

394
395
396
397

3126 CTF/VTF

398

1118

399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450

1119
1120
1121
1122
1236
1237
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1238
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167

3127
3128
ARC

Model

Contents

1A rating

110D

NOV1-k
NOV1-
NOV1-C
NOV2-k
NOV2-
NOV2-C

0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000

FRQ1
TFRQ1
FRQ2
TFRQ2
FRQ3
TFRQ3
FRQ4
TFRQ4
FVBLK
DFRQ1
DFRQ2
DFRQ3
DFRQ4

-10.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
-10.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
-10.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
-10.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
40.0 - 100.0
0.1 - 15.0
0.1 - 15.0
0.1 - 15.0
0.1 - 15.0

Hz
s
Hz
s
Hz
s
Hz
s
V
Hzs
Hzs
Hzs
Hzs

EFF
OCDF
ZOVF
UVF

0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.5(Fixed)
0.1(Fixed)
5.0 - 130.0
5.0 - 130.0

ARCEN
ARC-NUM
VCHK
Df EN
VTPHSEL
VT-RATE
3PH-VT
OC1-INIT
OC1-TP1
OC1-TP2
OC1-TP3
OC1-TP4
OC1-TP5
OC1-TP6
OC2-INIT
OC2-TP1
OC2-TP2
OC2-TP3
OC2-TP4
OC2-TP5
OC2-TP6
OC3-INIT
OC3-TP1
OC3-TP2
OC3-TP3
OC3-TP4
OC3-TP5
OC3-TP6
OC4-INIT
OC4-TP1
OC4-TP2
OC4-TP3
OC4-TP4
OC4-TP5
OC4-TP6
COORD-OC
EF1-INIT
EF1-TP1
EF1-TP2
EF1-TP3
EF1-TP4
EF1-TP5
EF1-TP6
EF2-INIT
EF2-TP1
EF2-TP2
EF2-TP3
EF2-TP4
EF2-TP5
EF2-TP6
EF3-INIT
EF3-TP1
EF3-TP2

400D

420D

Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV1


ditto
ditto
Conf igurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV2
ditto
ditto

-------

1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000

FRQ1 Threshold setting


FRQ1 Def inite time setting
FRQ2 Threshold setting
FRQ2 Def inite time setting
FRQ3 Threshold setting
FRQ3 Def inite time setting
FRQ4 Threshold setting
FRQ4 Def inite time setting
UV Blocking threshold
DFRQ1 Threshold setting.
DFRQ2 Threshold setting.
DFRQ3 Threshold setting.
DFRQ4 Threshold setting.

--------------

-1.00
1.00
-1.00
1.00
-1.00
1.00
-1.00
1.00
40.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5

A
A
V
V

EF Threshold setting f or CTF/VTF scheme.


OCD Threshold setting f or CTF/VTF scheme.
ZOV Threshold setting f or CTF/VTF scheme.
UV(Ph-G) Threshold setting f or VTF scheme.

-----

1.0 / 0.20
-20.0
51.0

Of f - On

Autoreclosing Enable.

On

S1 - S2 - S3 - S4 - S5
Of f - LD - DL - DD - S
Of f - On
A-B-C
PH-G - PH-PH
Bus - Line
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - On
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set

Reclosing shot max. number


Autoreclosing volatge check
Frequency dif f erence checking enable
VT phase selection
VT rating
3ph. VT location
Autoreclosing initiation by OC1 enable
OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
OC1 trip mode of 5th trip
OC1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC2 enable
OC2 trip mode of 1st trip
OC2 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC2 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC2 trip mode of 4th trip
OC2 trip mode of 5th trip
OC2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC3 enable
OC3 trip mode of 1st trip
OC3 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC3 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC3 trip mode of 4th trip
OC3 trip mode of 5th trip
OC3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC4 enable
OC4 trip mode of 1st trip
OC4 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC4 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC4 trip mode of 4th trip
OC4 trip mode of 5th trip
OC4 trip mode of 6th trip
OC relay f or Co-ordination Enable
Autoreclosing initiation by EF1 enable
EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
EF1 trip mode of 5th trip
EF1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by EF2 enable
EF2 trip mode of 1st trip
EF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF2 trip mode of 4th trip
EF2 trip mode of 5th trip
EF2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by EF3 enable
EF3 trip mode of 1st trip
EF3 trip mode of 2nd trip

S1

321

-----------------------------------

Of f
Of f
A
PH-G
Line
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Of f
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

Def ault Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)

Range

(Of f set
No.)

451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492

1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1239
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1240
1207

493

12036

494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524

12037
12038
12039
12040
12041
12042
12043
12044
12045
12046
12047
12048
12049
12050
12051
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
12052
12053
12054
12055
3129
3130
3131

525

22040

526

22041

Setting Device Name

Units
5A rating

ARC

BI1

Model

Contents

1A rating

110D
EF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF3 trip mode of 4th trip
EF3 trip mode of 5th trip
EF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by EF4 enable
EF4 trip mode of 1st trip
EF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF4 trip mode of 4th trip
EF4 trip mode of 5th trip
EF4 trip mode of 6th trip
EF relay f or Co-ordination Enable
Autoreclosing initiation by SEF1 enable
SEF1 trip mode of 1st trip
SEF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF1 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF1 trip mode of 5th trip
SEF1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by SEF2 enable
SEF2 trip mode of 1st trip
SEF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF2 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF2 trip mode of 5th trip
SEF2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by SEF3 enable
SEF3 trip mode of 1st trip
SEF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF3 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF3 trip mode of 5th trip
SEF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by SEF4 enable
SEF4 trip mode of 1st trip
SEF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF4 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF4 trip mode of 5th trip
SEF4 trip mode of 6th trip
SEF relay f or Co-ordination Enable

400D

EF3-TP3
EF3-TP4
EF3-TP5
EF3-TP6
EF4-INIT
EF4-TP1
EF4-TP2
EF4-TP3
EF4-TP4
EF4-TP5
EF4-TP6
COORD-EF
SE1-INIT
SE1-TP1
SE1-TP2
SE1-TP3
SE1-TP4
SE1-TP5
SE1-TP6
SE2-INIT
SE2-TP1
SE2-TP2
SE2-TP3
SE2-TP4
SE2-TP5
SE2-TP6
SE3-INIT
SE3-TP1
SE3-TP2
SE3-TP3
SE3-TP4
SE3-TP5
SE3-TP6
SE4-INIT
SE4-TP1
SE4-TP2
SE4-TP3
SE4-TP4
SE4-TP5
SE4-TP6
COORD-SE
EXT-INIT

Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - On
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - Inst - Set
Of f - On
NA - On - Block

TRDY

0.0 - 600.0

TD1
TR1
TD2
TR2
TD3
TR3
TD4
TR4
TD5
TR5
TW
TSUC
TRCOV
TARCP
TRSET
OVB
UVB
OVL
UVL
SYNUV
SYNOV
SYNDV
SYN
SYNDf
TSYN
TLBDL
TDBLL
TDBDL
OC-CO
EF-CO
SE-CO

0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.0 - 600.0
0.1 - 600.0
0.1 - 600.0
0.01 - 300.00
10 - 150
10 - 150
10 - 150
10 - 150
10 - 150
10 - 150
0 - 150
5 - 75
0.01 - 2.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200

s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
deg
Hz
s
s
s
s
A
A
A

PUD

0.00 - 300.00

Binary Input Pick-up delay

0.00

DOD

0.00 - 300.00

Binary Input Drop-of f delay

0.00

NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Of f

Autoreclosing initiation by External Trip Command enable

Reclaim timer
1st shot Dead timer of Stage1
1st shot Reset timer of Stage1
2nd shot Dead timer of Stage1
2nd shot Reset timer of Stage1
3rd shot Dead timer of Stage1
3rd shot Reset timer of Stage1
4th shot Dead timer of Stage1
4th shot Reset timer of Stage1
5th shot Dead timer of Stage1
5th shot Reset timer of Stage1
Out put pulse timer
Autoreclosing Pause Time af ter manually close
Autoreclosing Recovery time af ter Final Trip
Autoreclosing Pause Time af ter manually close
ARC reset time in CB closing mode.
OV element of bus-voltage check
UV element of bus-voltage check
OV element of line-voltage check
UV element of line-voltage check
UV element of Synchro. check
OV element of Synchro. check
Voltage dif f erence f or SYN
Synchro. check (ph. dif f .)
Frequency dif f erence checking f or SYN
Synchronism check timer (Live-bus & Live-line)
Voltage check timer (Live-bus & Dead-line)
Voltage check timer (Dead-bus & Live-line)
Voltage check timer (Dead-bus & Dead-line)
For Co-ordination
ditto
ditto

322

Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Of f
-----------------------------NA

420D

NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Of f

60.0
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
2.00
3.0
10.0
10.0
3.00
--------------0.05 / 0.010

51
13
51
13
83
51
150
30
1.00
1.00
0.05
0.05
0.05
5.0 / 1.00
1.5 / 0.30
-0.05 / 0.010

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

Def ault Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)

Range

(Of f set
No.)

527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548

22000
22042
22043
22001
22044
22045
22002
22046
22047
22003
22048
22049
22004
22050
22051
22005
22052
22053
22006
22054
22055
22007

549

23032

550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602

23033
23000
23001
23002
23003
23034
23035
23004
23005
23006
23007
23036
23037
23008
23009
23010
23011
23038
23039
23012
23013
23014
23015
23040
23041
23016
23017
23018
23019
23042
23043
23020
23021
23022
23023
23080
23048
23049
23050
23051
23052
23053
23054
23055
23081
23056
23057
23058
23059
23060
23061
23062
23063

Setting Device Name

Units
5A rating

BI2

BI3

BI4

BI5

BI6

BI7

BI8

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

LED5

LED6

IND1

IND2

Model

Contents

1A rating

110D

SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS

Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv

s
s

Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary
Binary

Logic

OR - AND

LED1 Logic Gate Type

OR

Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Reset
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
Reset
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8

Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071

LED1 Reset operation


LED1 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED2 Logic Gate Type
LED2 Reset operation
LED2 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED3 Logic Gate Type
LED3 Reset operation
LED3 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED4 Logic Gate Type
LED4 Reset operation
LED4 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED5 Logic Gate Type
LED5 Reset operation
LED5 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED6 Logic Gate Type
LED6 Reset operation
LED6 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
Virtual LED1 Reset operation
Virtual LED1 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Virtual LED2 Reset operation
Virtual LED2 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
Inst
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Inst
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

s
s

s
s

s
s

s
s

s
s

s
s

Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input

Sense
Pick-up delay
Drop-of f delay
Sense
Pick-up delay
Drop-of f delay
Sense
Pick-up delay
Drop-of f delay
Sense
Pick-up delay
Drop-of f delay
Sense
Pick-up delay
Drop-of f delay
Sense
Pick-up delay
Drop-of f delay
Sense
Pick-up delay
Drop-of f delay
Sense

400D

323

420D

Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm

----------

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

Def ault Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)

Range

(Of f set
No.)

Setting Device Name

Units
5A rating

Model

Contents

1A rating

110D

400D

603

17000

Plant name

Specif ied by user

Plant name

no-name

604
605
606
607
608

17001
17162
17163
17164
17165

Description
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text

ditto
Specif ied by
Specif ied by
Specif ied by
Specif ied by

Memorandum f or user
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text

no-data
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4

609

19001

IEC

0 - 254

610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669

19024
19096
19097
19098
19099
19100
19101
19102
19103
19104
19105
19106
19107
19084
19085
19086
19087
19088
19089
19090
19091
19092
19093
19094
19095
19108
19109
19110
19111
19112
19113
19114
19115
19116
19117
19118
19119
19120
19121
19122
19123
19124
19042
19025
19076
19077
19078
19079
19080
19081
19082
19083
19032
19034
19035
19036
19037
19038
19039
19041

SYADJ
IP1-1
IP1-2
IP1-3
IP1-4
SM1-1
SM1-2
SM1-3
SM1-4
GW1-1
GW1-2
GW1-3
GW1-4
IP2-1
IP2-2
IP2-3
IP2-4
SM2-1
SM2-2
SM2-3
SM2-4
GW2-1
GW2-2
GW2-3
GW2-4
SI1-1
SI1-2
SI1-3
SI1-4
SI2-1
SI2-2
SI2-3
SI2-4
SI3-1
SI3-2
SI3-3
SI3-4
SI4-1
SI4-2
SI4-3
SI4-4
SMODE
DEADT
GOINT
PG1-1
PG1-2
PG1-3
PG1-4
PG2-1
PG2-2
PG2-3
PG2-4
232C
IECBR
IECBLK
850BLK
850AUT
TSTMOD
GSECHK
PINGCHK

-9999 - 9999
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0-1
1 - 120
1 - 60
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
9.6 - 19.2 - 57.6
9.6 - 19.2
Normal - Blocked
Normal - Blocked
Of f - On
Of f - On
Of f - On
Of f - On

670

18036

FL

671

18024

BITRN

672

18000

Time

673
674
675
676
677
678

18001
18002
18003
18004
18060
18061

OC
EF
SEF
NOC
OV
UV

user
user
user
user

ms

min
s

Station address f or IEC103

Time sync. Compensation


CH1 IP address

0
192
168
19
172
255
255
255
0
192
168
19
1
192
168
19
173
255
255
255
0
192
168
19
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
120
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9.6
19.2
Normal
Normal
Of f
Of f
Of f
Of f

CH1 Subnet mask

CH1 Gateway

IP Address of CH#2

Subnet Mask of CH#2

Gateway Address of CH#2

SNTP Server1 Address

SNTP Server2 Address

SNTP Server3 Address

SNTP Server4 Address

TCP KeepAlive Time

Ping check addrs port#1

Of f - On

FL f unction use or not

Of f

0 - 128

Number of bi-trigger (on/of f ) events

100

0.1 - 5.0

Disturbance record

0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
10.0 - 200.0
1.0 - 130.0

A
A
A
A
V
V

Realy element f or disturbance record initiation


ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto

Ping check addrs port#2

RS-232C baud rate


IEC103 baud rate
Monitor direction blocked
IEC61850 Block
IEC61850 Authorize
IEC61850 Test mode
GOOSE receive check
Ping check

324

420D

2.0
------

10.0 / 2.00
3.0 / 0.60
-1.00 / 0.200
2.0 / 0.40
120.0
60.0

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

(No.)

679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704

(Offset
No.)
18062
18063
18005
18007
18008
18009
18010
18064
18065
18066
18067
18043
18044
18045
18046
18047
18048
18049
18050
18051
20000
20001
20002
20008
20009
20010

Range
Setting Device Name

Units
5A rating

ZOV
NOV
TRIP
OC
EF
SEF
NC
OV
UV
ZOV
NOV
TCSPEN
CBSMEN
TCAEN
IyAEN
OPTAEN
TCALM
IyALM
YVALUE
OPTALM
Display
Power
Current
Time sync
GMT
GMTm

Contents

1A rating

1.0 - 160.0
1.0 - 160.0
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On - Opt-On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
1 - 10000
10 - 10000
1.0 - 2.0
100 - 5000
Pri - Sec - Pri-A
Send - Receive
Lag - Lead
Of - BI - IRI - IEC - SN
-12 - +12
-59 - +59

Default Setting (5A rating / 1A rating)


Model
110D

V
V

E6

ms

hrs
min

ditto
ditto
Disturbance record trigger use or not
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Trip Circuit Supervision Enable
CB condition super visor enable
Trip CounterAlarm Enable
I^y Alarm Enable
Operate Time Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm Threshold
I^y Alarm
Y value
Operate Time Alarm Threshold
Metering
Metering
Metering
Time sync.
Time
Time

325

400D

420D

20.0
--

20.0
On

-On
----

On
On
--

On
On
On
On

On
--

On
Off
Off
Off

---

Off
Off
10000

----

10000
2.0
1000
Pri
Send
Lead
Of
0
0

User
setting

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
5. PLC default setting
Output

Signal

1536 OC1_BLOCK
1537 OC2_BLOCK
1538 OC3_BLOCK
1539 OC4_BLOCK
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544 EF1_BLOCK
1545 EF2_BLOCK
1546 EF3_BLOCK
1547 EF4_BLOCK
1548 EF1_PERMIT
1549 EF2_PERMIT
1550 EF3_PERMIT
1551 EF4_PERMIT
1552 SEF1_BLOCK
1553 SEF2_BLOCK
1554 SEF3_BLOCK
1555 SEF4_BLOCK
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560 NOC1_BLOCK
1561 NOC2_BLOCK
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568 UC1_BLOCK
1569 UC2_BLOCK
1570 CBF_BLOCK
1571
1572 THM_BLOCK
1573 THMA_BLOCK
1574 BCD_BLOCK
1575
1576 DFRQ1_BLOCK
1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK
1578 DFRQ3_BLOCK
1579 DFRQ4_BLOCK
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584 OV1_BLOCK
1585 OV2_BLOCK
1586 OV3_BLOCK
1587 OV4_BLOCK
1588 UV1_BLOCK
1589 UV2_BLOCK
1590 UV3_BLOCK
1591 UV4_BLOCK
1592 ZOV1_BLOCK
1593 ZOV2_BLOCK
1594
1595
1596 NOV1_BLOCK
1597 NOV2_BLOCK
1598
1599
1600 FRQ1_BLOCK
1601 FRQ2_BLOCK
1602 FRQ3_BLOCK
1603 FRQ4_BLOCK
1604 ARC_BLOCK
1605 ARC_READY
1606 ARC_INIT
1607 MANUAL_CLOSE
1608 ARC_NO_ACT
1609
1610

Timing
Cycle
30

X
X

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Release
Back
Norm
Signal
Up

--

[771]BI4_COMMAND
[770]BI3_COMMAND

326

Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot

None

X
X

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Output

1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop

--

Back
Norm
Up

Flip Flop
Release
Signal

Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot

None

CTF_BLOCK
VTF_BLOCK
EXT_CTF
EXT_VTF

EXT_TRIP-A
EXT_TRIP-B
EXT_TRIP-C
EXT_TRIP
TC_FAIL
CB_N/O_CONT
CB_N/C_CONT

X
X

[769]BI2_COMMAND
[1]CONSTANT_1

X
X

IND.RESET

[768]BI1_COMMAND

ARC-S1_COND
ARC-S2_COND
ARC-S3_COND
ARC-S4_COND
ARC-S5_COND

X
X
X
X
X

[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK

X
X
X
X
X

[371]GEN.TRIP

[371]GEN.TRIP

SGM_IY-A
SGM_IY-B
SGM_IY-C

X
X
X

[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP

X
X
X

OT_ALARM-A
OT_ALARM-B
OT_ALARM-C

X
X
X

[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP

X
X
X

FRQ_S1_TRIP
FRQ_S2_TRIP
FRQ_S3_TRIP
FRQ_S4_TRIP

X
X
X
X

[356]FRQ1_TRIP + [360]DFRQ1_TRIP
[357]FRQ2_TRIP + [361]DFRQ2_TRIP
[358]FRQ3_TRIP + [362]DFRQ3_TRIP
[359]FRQ4_TRIP + [363]DFRQ4_TRIP

X
X
X
X

CBF_INIT-A
CBF_INIT-B
CBF_INIT-C
CBF_INIT
TP_COUNT-A
TP_COUNT-B
TP_COUNT-C
TP_COUNT

327

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

--

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Release
Back
Norm
Up
Signal

OC1_INST_TP
OC2_INST_TP
OC3_INST_TP
OC4_INST_TP
EF1_INST_TP
EF2_INST_TP
EF3_INST_TP
EF4_INST_TP
SEF1_INST_TP
SEF2_INST_TP
SEF3_INST_TP
SEF4_INST_TP

328

Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835

329

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910

330

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985

331

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060

332

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135

333

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210

334

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285

335

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360

336

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435

337

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Release
Back
Norm
Signal
Up

--

2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510

338

Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Release
Back
Norm
Signal
Up

--

2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560 DISP.ALARM1
2561 DISP.ALARM2
2562 DISP.ALARM3
2563 DISP.ALARM4
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576 SYNC_CLOCK
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585

339

Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

ALARM_LED_SET

F.RECORD1
F.RECORD2
F.RECORD3
F.RECORD4

D.RECORD1
D.RECORD2
D.RECORD3
D.RECORD4

SET.GROUP1
SET.GROUP2
SET.GROUP3
SET.GROUP4
SET.GROUP5
SET.GROUP6
SET.GROUP7
SET.GROUP8

CON_TPMD1
CON_TPMD2
CON_TPMD3
CON_TPMD4
CON_TPMD5

340

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

CON_TPMD6
CON_TPMD7
CON_TPMD8

ARC_COM_RECV
PROT_COM_RECV
TPLED_RST_RCV

341

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810

342

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

TEMP001
TEMP002
TEMP003
TEMP004
TEMP005
TEMP006
TEMP007
TEMP008
TEMP009
TEMP010
TEMP011
TEMP012
TEMP013
TEMP014
TEMP015
TEMP016
TEMP017
TEMP018
TEMP019
TEMP020
TEMP021
TEMP022
TEMP023
TEMP024
TEMP025
TEMP026
TEMP027
TEMP028
TEMP029
TEMP030
TEMP031
TEMP032
TEMP033
TEMP034
TEMP035
TEMP036
TEMP037
TEMP038
TEMP039
TEMP040
TEMP041
TEMP042
TEMP043
TEMP044
TEMP045
TEMP046
TEMP047
TEMP048
TEMP049
TEMP050
TEMP051
TEMP052
TEMP053
TEMP054
TEMP055
TEMP056
TEMP057
TEMP058
TEMP059
TEMP060
TEMP061
TEMP062
TEMP063
TEMP064
TEMP065
TEMP066
TEMP067
TEMP068
TEMP069
TEMP070

343

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

TEMP071
TEMP072
TEMP073
TEMP074
TEMP075
TEMP076
TEMP077
TEMP078
TEMP079
TEMP080
TEMP081
TEMP082
TEMP083
TEMP084
TEMP085
TEMP086
TEMP087
TEMP088
TEMP089
TEMP090
TEMP091
TEMP092
TEMP093
TEMP094
TEMP095
TEMP096
TEMP097
TEMP098
TEMP099
TEMP100
TEMP101
TEMP102
TEMP103
TEMP104
TEMP105
TEMP106
TEMP107
TEMP108
TEMP109
TEMP110
TEMP111
TEMP112
TEMP113
TEMP114
TEMP115
TEMP116
TEMP117
TEMP118
TEMP119
TEMP120
TEMP121
TEMP122
TEMP123
TEMP124
TEMP125
TEMP126
TEMP127
TEMP128
TEMP129
TEMP130
TEMP131
TEMP132
TEMP133
TEMP134
TEMP135
TEMP136
TEMP137
TEMP138
TEMP139
TEMP140
TEMP141
TEMP142
TEMP143
TEMP144
TEMP145

344

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal

--

TEMP146
TEMP147
TEMP148
TEMP149
TEMP150
TEMP151
TEMP152
TEMP153
TEMP154
TEMP155
TEMP156
TEMP157
TEMP158
TEMP159
TEMP160
TEMP161
TEMP162
TEMP163
TEMP164
TEMP165
TEMP166
TEMP167
TEMP168
TEMP169
TEMP170
TEMP171
TEMP172
TEMP173
TEMP174
TEMP175
TEMP176
TEMP177
TEMP178
TEMP179
TEMP180
TEMP181
TEMP182
TEMP183
TEMP184
TEMP185
TEMP186
TEMP187
TEMP188
TEMP189
TEMP190
TEMP191
TEMP192
TEMP193
TEMP194
TEMP195
TEMP196
TEMP197
TEMP198
TEMP199
TEMP200
TEMP201
TEMP202
TEMP203
TEMP204
TEMP205
TEMP206
TEMP207
TEMP208
TEMP209
TEMP210
TEMP211
TEMP212
TEMP213
TEMP214
TEMP215
TEMP216
TEMP217
TEMP218
TEMP219
TEMP220

345

Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot

Time Value

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Output

Signal

Timing
Cycle
30

90

User

Logic expression
Turn

Delay Time / Flip Flop


Flip Flop
Release
Back
Norm
Up
Signal

--

3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256

346

Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot

None

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
6. Disturbance record setting
Name

Range

Unit

SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
SIG8
SIG9
SIG10
SIG11
SIG12
SIG13
SIG14
SIG15
SIG16
SIG17
SIG18
SIG19
SIG20
SIG21
SIG22
SIG23
SIG24
SIG25
SIG26
SIG27
SIG28
SIG29
SIG30
SIG31

0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071

No.
101
102
103
261
131
281
141
291
201
202
203
341
211
351
0
371
401
1604
403
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Default setting
Signal
110D
Signal Name
OC1-A
-OC1-B
-OC1-C
-OC1 TRIP
-EF1
x
EF1 TRIP
x
SEF1
x
SEF1-S1 TRIP
x
UV1-A
-UV1-B
-UV1-C
-UV1 TRIP
-ZOV1
x
ZOV1 TRIP
x
NA
GEN.TRIP
x
ARC READY T
x
ARC BLOCK
x
ARC SHOT
x
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

347

Model
400D

---

--

420D
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-----

-------------

x
x

User Setting
Model

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

348

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix I
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
4. Function test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test

349

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
1.

Relay identification

Type

Serial number

Model

System frequency

Station

Date

Circuit

Engineer

Protection scheme

Witness

Active settings group number


2.

Preliminary check

Ratings
CT shorting contacts
DC power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3.

Hardware check

3.1 User interface check


3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit
Binary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit

350

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
4.

Function test

4.1 Overcurrent elements test


(1) Operating value test
Element

Current setting

Measured current

Element

OC1-A

UC1-A

OC2-A

UC2-A

OC3-A

THM-A

OC4-A

THM-T

EF1

NOC1

EF2

NOC2

EF3

CBF-A

Current setting

Measured current

EF4
SEF1
SEF2
SEF3
SEF4

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)


Element

Curve setting

Multiplier setting

Changed current

Measured time

OC1-A

Current setting
Current setting
Current setting

EF1

Current setting
Current setting
Current setting

SEF1

Current setting
Current setting
Current setting

(3) Directional operate characteristic test


Element

Current setting

Measured current

Element

OC1-A

SEF1

OC2-A

SEF2

OC3-A

SEF3

OC4-A

SEF4

EF1

NOC1

EF2

NOC2

EF3
EF4

351

Current setting

Measured current

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
4.2 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
(1) Operating value test
Element

Voltage
setting

Measured
voltage

Element

OV1

ZOV1

OV2

ZOV2

OV3

NOV1

OV4

NOV2

Voltage
setting

Measured
voltage

UV1
UV2
UV3
UV4

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)


Element

Voltage setting

Multiplier setting

Changed voltage

OV1

Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting

UV1

Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting

ZOV1

Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting

NOV1

Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting

Measured time

4.3 BCD element check


4.4 Cold load function check
4.5 Frequency elements test
Element

Frequency setting

FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4

352

Measured frequency

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
5.

Protection scheme test

6.

Metering and recording check

7.

Conjunctive test
Scheme

Results

On load check
Tripping circuit
Reclosing circuit

353

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

354

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix J
Return Repair Form

355

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

RETURN / REPAIR FORM


Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRD140 to be repaired.

Type:

GRD140

(Example: Type:

Model:
GRD140

Model:

400D

Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1.

Reason for returning the relay


mal-function
does not operate
increased error
investigation
others

2.

Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on floppy disk, or fill in the
attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.

356

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year
/
:

Time

/
:

(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002

15:09:58.442)

Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Ia:
Ib :
Ic:
Ie:
Ise:
I1 :
I2 :
I2 / I1 :

Fault values
Ia:
Ib :
Ic:
Ie:
Ise:
I1 :
I2 :
I2 / I1 :
THM:

A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Va :
Vb :
Vc :
Ves:
Vab:
Vbc:
Vca:
V0:
V1:
V2:
f:

V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz

A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Va :
Vb :
Vc :
Ves:
Vab:
Vbc:
Vca:
V0:
V1:
V2:
f:

V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz

357

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3.

What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?

4.

Describe the details of the incident:

5.

Date incident occurred


Day/Month/Year:

(Example: 10/July/2002)
6.

Give any comments about the GRD140, including the documents:

Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:

Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:

358

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix K
Technical Data

359

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings

AC current In:

1A or 5A

AC voltage Vn:

100V to 120 V

Frequency:

50Hz or 60Hz

DC auxiliary supply:

110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)


220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc)
48/54/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc)
24/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 - 36Vdc)

Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply:

maximum 12%

DC supply interruption:

maximum 50ms at 110V

Binary input circuit DC voltage:

110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)


220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc)
48/54/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc)
24/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 - 36Vdc)

Overload Ratings

AC current inputs:

4 times rated current continuous


100 times rated current for 1 second

AC voltage inputs:

2 times rated voltage continuous

Burden

AC phase current inputs:

0.1VA (1A rating)


0.2VA (5A rating)

AC earth current inputs:

0.3VA (1A rating)


0.4VA (5A rating)

AC sensitive earth inputs:

0.3VA (1A rating)


0.4VA (5A rating)

AC voltage inputs:

0.1VA (at rated voltage)

DC power supply:

10W (quiescent)
15W (maximum)

Binary input circuit:

0.5W per input at 110Vdc

Current Transformer Requirements

Phase Inputs

Typically 5P20 with rated burden according to load.

Standard Earth Inputs:

Core balance CT or residual connection of phase CTs.

Sensitive Earth Inputs:

Core balance CT.

Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection

P/F 1st Overcurrent threshold:

OFF, 0.02 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.1 25.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

Delay type:

DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC
EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:

0.010 1.500 in 0.001 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Type:

Definite Time or Dependent Time(complied with IEC 6055-151)

Reset Definite Delay:

0.0 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:

0.010 1.500 in 0.001 steps

P/F 2nd Overcurrent threshold:

OFF, 0.02 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.1 25.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

P/F 3rd, 4th Overcurrent thresholds:

OFF, 0.02 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.1 250.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

P/F Characteristic Angle:

95 to +95 in 1 steps

360

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Directional Earth Fault Protection

E/F 1st Overcurrent threshold:

OFF, 0.02 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.1 25.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

Delay type:

DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC
EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:

0.010 1.500 in 0.001 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Type:

Definite Time or Dependent Time(complied with IEC 6055-151)

Reset Definite Delay:

0.0 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:

0.010 1.500 in 0.001 steps

E/F 2nd threshold:

OFF, 0.02 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.1 25.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

E/F 3rd, 4th thresholds:

OFF, 0.02 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.1 250.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

E/F Characteristic angle:

95 to +95 in 1 steps

E/F directional voltage threshold:

0.5 100.0V in 0.1V steps

Directional Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

SEF 1st Overcurrent threshold:

OFF, 0.002 0.200A in 0.001A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.01 1.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)

Delay Type:

DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC
EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:

0.010 1.500 in 0.001 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Type:

Definite Time or Dependent Time(complied with IEC 6055-151)

Reset Definite Delay:

0.0 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:

0.010 1.500 in 0.001 steps

DTL delay (back-up timer):

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

SEF 2nd, 3rd, 4th threshold:

OFF, 0.002 0.200A in 0.001A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.01 1.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

SEF Characteristic angle:

95 to +95 in 1 steps

SEF Boundary of operation:

87.5, 90

SEF directional voltage threshold:

0.5 100.0V in 0.1V steps

Residual power threshold:

OFF, 0.00 20.00W in 0.01W steps (1A primary)


OFF, 0.0 100.0W in 0.1W steps (5A primary)

Phase Undercurrent Protection

Undercurrent 1st, 2nd threshold:

OFF, 0.10 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.5 10.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

DTL Delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Thermal Overload Protection

I = k.IFLC (Thermal setting):


Previous load current (IP)

OFF, 0.40 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 2.0 10.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
0.00 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.0 5.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

Time constant ():

0.5 500.0mins in 0.1min steps

Thermal alarm:

OFF, 50% to 99% in 1% steps

361

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Directional Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Protection (NOC)

NOC 1st, 2nd threshold:

OFF, 0.10 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.5 10.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

Delay type:

DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC
EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:

0.010 1.500 in 0.001 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Type:

Definite Time or Dependent Time(complied with IEC 6055-151)

Reset Definite Delay:

0.0 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:

0.010 1.500 in 0.001 steps

NOC Characteristic angle:

95 to +95 in 1 steps

NOC Directional voltage threshold

0.5 25.0V in 0.1V steps

Overvoltage Protection

1st, 2nd Overvoltage thresholds:


st

OFF, 10.0 200.0V in 0.1V steps

Delay type (1 threshold only):

DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127)

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:

0.05 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

DO/PU ratio

10 98% in 1% steps

Reset Delay (1st threshold only):

0.0 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Undervoltage Protection

1st, 2nd Undervoltage thresholds:


st

OFF, 5.0 130.0V in 0.1V steps

Delay type (1 threshold only):

DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127)

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:

0.05 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay (1st threshold only):

0.0 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Undervoltage Block

5.0 20.0Vin 0.1V steps

Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection (ZOV)

1st, 2nd ZOV Overvoltage thresholds:


st

OFF, 1.0 130.0V in 0.1V steps

Delay type (1 threshold only):

DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127)

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:

0.05 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay (1st threshold only):

0.0 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection (NOV)

1st, 2nd NOV Overvoltage thresholds:


st

OFF, 1.0 130.0V in 0.1V steps

Delay type (1 threshold only):

DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127)

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:

0.05 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay (1st threshold only):

0.0 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Under/Over Frequency Protection

1st - 4th under/overfrequency threshold

(Fnom 10.00Hz) (Fnom 10.00Hz) in 0.01Hz steps


Fnom: nominal frequency

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Frequency UV Block

40.0 100.0V in 0.1V steps

Broken Conductor Protection

Broken conductor threshold (I2/I1):

OFF, 0.10 1.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

362

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

CBF Protection

CBF threshold:

OFF, 0.10 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)


OFF, 0.5 10.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)

CBF stage 1 (Backup trip) DTL:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

CBF stage 2 (Re-trip) DTL:

0.00 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Autoreclose

ARC Reclaim Time

0.0 600.0s in 0.1s steps

Close Pulse Width

0.01 10.00s

Lock-out Recovery Time

OFF, 0.1 600.0s in 0.1s steps

Sequences

1 5 Shots to Lock-out, each trip programmable for inst or


Delayed operation

Dead Times(programmable for each shot)

0.01 300.00s in 0.01s steps

in 0.01s steps

Voltage and Synchronizm Check

Synchronism check angle (S)

5 to 75 in 1 steps

UV element (SYUV)

10 to 150V in 1V steps

OV element (SYOV)
Voltage difference check (V)

10 to 150V in 1V steps

Busbar or line dead check (VB)

10 to 150V in 1V steps

Busbar or line live check (VL)


Frequency difference check (f)

0.01 to 2.00Hz in 0.01 steps

0 to 150V in 1V steps
10 to 150V in 1V steps

Synchronism check time (TSYN)

0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps

Voltage check time

0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps

Accuracy

Overcurrent Pick-ups:

100% of setting 2%

Overcurrent PU/DO ratio:

100%

Undercurrent Pick-up:

100% of setting 2%

Undercurrent PU/DO ratio:

100%

Overvoltage Pick-ups:
Undervoltage Pick-ups:

100% of setting 2%
100% of setting 2%

Inverse Time Delays:

5% or 30ms (1.5 to 30 times setting)

Definite Time Delays:

1% or 10ms

Transient Overreach for instantaneous elements:

<5% for X/R = 100

Frequency variation:

2%: OC, EF operating value (5Hz variation of rated


frequency.)

Front Communication port - local PC (RS232)


Connection:
Cable type:
Cable length:
Connector:

Point to point
Multi-core (straight)
15m (max.)
RS232C 9-way D-type female

363

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Rear Communication port - remote PC


RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103:
Connection
Cable type
Cable length
Connection
Isolation
Transmission rate
Fibre optic I/F for IEC60870-5-103:
Cable type
Connector
Transmission rate

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100:

Multidrop (max. 32 relays)


Twisted pair cable with shield
1200m (max.)
Screw terminals
1kVac for 1 min.
9.6, 19.2kbps
Graded-index multi-mode 50/125 or 62.5/125m fibre
ST
9.6, 19.2kbps
100BASE-TX: RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX: SC connector

364

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Time synchronization port (IRIG-B port)

IRIG Time Code


Input impedance
Input voltage range
Connector type
Cable type

IRIG-B122
4k-ohm
4Vp-p to 10Vp-p
Screw terminal
50 ohm coaxial cable

Binary Inputs

Operating voltage

Typical 74Vdc(min. 70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating


Typical 138Vdc(min. 125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48V/54V/60Vdc rating
Typical 15Vdc(min. 13Vdc) for 24/30Vdc rating

Response time:

Less than 8ms

Binary Outputs

GRD140-110D,

Auxiliary relay

BO1 to BO7, FAIL

GRD140-400D,
GRD140-420D,

Ratings:

Make and carry: 4A continuously


Make and carry: 20A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R5ms)
Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms) or 0.2A, 110Vdc

Durability:

Loaded contact: 10000 operations


Unloaded contact: 100000 operations

Operating time

Approx. 12ms

GRD140-401D,

Auxiliary relay

BO1 to BO6, FAIL

GRD140-421D

Ratings:

Make and carry: 4A continuously


Make and carry: 20A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R5ms)
Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms) or 0.2A, 110Vdc

Operating time

Approx. 5ms

High-speed auxiliary relay

HBO1 to HBO4

Ratings:

Make and carry: 5A continuously


Make and carry: 20A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R5ms)
Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms) or 0.2A, 110Vdc

Durability:

Loaded contact: 10000 operations


Unloaded contact: 100000 operations

Operating time

Approx. 3ms

DC Supply Monitoring

Threshold of DC power fail:

Typical 74Vdc(min.70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating


Typical 138Vdc(min.125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48V/54/60dc rating
Typical 15Vdc(min. 13Vdc) for 24/30Vdc rating

Mechanical design

Weight
Case colour

4.5kg
Munsell No. 10YR8/1

Installation

Flush mounting

365

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test

Standards

Details

Atmospheric Environment

Temperature

IEC60068-2-1/2

Operating range: -10C to +55C.


Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.

Humidity

IEC60068-2-3

56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.

Enclosure Protection

IEC60529

IP51

Mechanical Environment

Vibration

IEC60255-21-1

Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1

Shock and Bump

IEC60255-21-2

Shock Response Class 1


Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1

Seismic

IEC60255-21-3

Class 1

Dielectric Withstand

IEC60255-5

2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.


2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.

High Voltage Impulse

IEC60255-5

Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak),


1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all
terminals and earth.

Electrical Environment

Electromagnetic Environment

High Frequency
Disturbance / Damped
Oscillatory Wave

IEC60255-22-1 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-12 / EN61000-4-12

1 MHz burst in common / differential modes


Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV

Electrostatic
Discharge

IEC60255-22-2 Class 4,
IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2

8kV contact discharge, 15kV air discharge.

Radiated RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance

IEC60255-22-3 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3

Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to


1GHz and 1.4GHz to 4.0GHz. Additional spot tests at 80,
160, 380, 450, 900, 1860 and 2150MHz.

Fast Transient
Disturbance

IEC60255-22-4, IEC61000-4-4 /
EN61000-4-4

4kV, 5k/100kHz, 5/50ns


2kV, 5k/100kHz, 5/50ns applied to com ports (RS485, etc.)

Surge Immunity

IEC60255-22-5,
IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5

1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:

HV ports: 2kV/1kV
PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV
RS485 port: 1kV/ -

Conducted RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance

IEC60255-22-6 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6

10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.


Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.

Power Frequency
Disturbance

IEC60255-22-7, IEC61000-4-16
/ EN61000-4-16

300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.


150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.

Conducted and
Radiated Emissions

IEC60255-25 Class A,
EN55022 Class A,
IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4

Conducted emissions:
0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB

366

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

European Commission Directives

89/336/EEC

Compliance with the European Commission


Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to EN 61000-6-2 and
EN 61000-6-4.

73/23/EEC

Compliance with the European Commission Low


Voltage Directive is demonstrated according to
EN 50178 and EN 60255-5.

367

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix L
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

368

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with

: Measuring element output signal

Marked with

: Signal number

Marked with

: Signal number and name of binary input by PLC function

Signal No.

Signal name

Marked with [

Marked with "

"

Unmarked

Scheme switch

Scheme switch position

: Internal scheme logic signal

AND gates
A
B

&

Output

&

Output

C
A
B

A
1

B
C
1
1
Other cases

Output
1
0

A
1

B
C
1
0
Other cases

Output
1
0

A
1

B
C
0
0
Other cases

Output
1
0

C
A
B

&

Output

Output

A
0

B
C
0
0
Other cases

Output
0
1

Output

A
0

B
C
0
1
Other cases

Output
0
1

Output

A
0

B
C
1
1
Other cases

Output
0
1

OR gates
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C

369

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Signal inversion
A

A
0
1

Output

Output
1
0

Timer
t

Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting

XXX:

Set time

XXX
0

Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX:

Set time

XXX
t

Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range


XXX - YYY
0

Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range


XXX - YYY

One-shot timer
A

Output

Output

XXX - YYY

XXX - YYY: Setting range


Flip-flop
S
0
1
0
1

S
F/F

Output

R
0
0
1
1

Output
No change
1
0
0

Scheme switch
A

Output
ON

Output
ON

370

A
Switch
1
ON
Other cases

Switch
ON
OFF

Output
1
0

Output
1
0

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

371

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix M
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability

372

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
IEC60870-5-103 Configurator
IEC103 configurator software is included in the same CD as RSM100, and can be installed
easily as follows:
Installation of IEC103 Configurator
Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.
Double click the Setup.exe of the folder IEC103Conf under the root directory, and
operate it according to the message.
When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start
menu.
Starting IEC103 Configurator
Click [Start][Programs][IEC103 Configurator][IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator
software.
Note: The instruction manual for the IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking the
[Help][Manual] in the IEC103 Configurator.
Requirements for IEC60870-5-103 master station
Polling cycle: 150ms or more
Timeout time (time to re-sending the request frame to relay): 100ms
IEC103 master

GR relay
Data request

Polling cycle:
150ms or more

Response frame

Data request

Response frame

IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
A maximum number of 32 relays can be connected.
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre (option)
ST type connector (option)
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)

373

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3. List of Information
The following items can be customized with the original software tool IEC103 configurator.
(For details, refer to IEC103 configurator manual No.6F2S0839.)
-

Items for Time-tagged message: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission


condition(Signal number), COT

Items for Time-tagged measurands: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number),


COT, Type of measurand quantities

Items for General command: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)

Items for Measurands: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of
measurand quantities

Common setting
Transmission cycle of Measurand frame
FUN of System function
Test mode, etc.
CAUTION: For the setting data written via RS232C to be effective, turn off the DC supply
to the relay and turn on again.

3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
3.1.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.
3.1.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values can be customized.
3.1.4 Commands
The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported
commands with a cause of transmission (COT) negative acknowledgement of a command.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.4.
3.1.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing
in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION test
mode. This means that the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 test mode is used for
messages normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.5.
3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and
measurands are no longer transmitted.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.6.

374

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
3.2 List of Information
The following are the default settings.
IEC103 Configurator Default setting
INF

Description

Contents

GI Type
ID

COT

FUN

DPI
Signal No. OFF ON

Standard Information numbers in monitor direction


System Function
0

End of General Interrogation

Transmission completion of GI items.

--

10

255

--

--

--

Time Synchronization

Time Synchronization ACK.

--

255

--

--

--

Reset FCB

Reset FC B(toggle bit) ACK

--

219

--

--

--

Reset CU

Reset CU ACK

--

219

--

--

--

Start/Restart

Relay start/restart

--

219

--

--

--

Power On

Relay power on.

1411

Not supported

Status Indications
16 Auto-recloser active

If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set


active, if impossible, inactive.

17 Teleprotection active

If protection using telecommunication is available,


this item is set to active. If not, set to inactive.

18 Protection active

If the protection is available, this item is set to


active. If not, set to inactive.

GI

1, 7, 12

219

1413

19 LED reset

Reset of latched LEDs

--

1, 7, 11, 12

219

1409

--

20 Monitor direction blocked

Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control


system. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.

GI

11

219

1241

21 Test mode

Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to


control system. IEC TST "ON" setting.

GI

11

219

1242

22 Local parameter Setting

When a setting change has done at the local, the


event is sent to control system.

23 Characteristic1

Setting group 1 active

GI

1, 7, 11, 12

219

1243

24 Characteristic2

Setting group 2 active

GI

1, 7, 11, 12

219

1244

25 Characteristic3

Setting group 3 active

GI

1, 7, 11, 12

219

1245

26 Characteristic4

Setting group 4 active

GI

1, 7, 11, 12

219

1246

27 Auxiliary input1

Binary input 1

No set

28 Auxiliary input2

Binary input 2

No set

29 Auxiliary input3

Binary input 3

No set

30 Auxiliary input4

Binary input 4

No set

GI

1, 7, 11, 12

219
Not supported

Not supported

Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I

Zero sequence current supervision

GI

1, 7

219

1266

33 Measurand supervision V

Zero sequence voltage supervision

GI

1, 7

219

1268

35 Phase sequence supervision

Negative sequence voltage supevision

GI

1, 7

219

1269

36 Trip circuit supervision

Output circuit supervision

GI

1, 7

219

1270

386

37 I>>backup operation

No set

38 VT fuse failure

VT failure

39 Teleprotection disturbed

CF(C ommunication system Fail) supervision

GI

1, 7

219

46 Group warning

Only alarming

GI

1, 7

219

1258

47 Group alarm

Trip blocking and alarming

GI

1, 7

219

1252

48 Earth Fault L1

A phase earth fault

GI

1, 7

219

800

49 Earth Fault L2

B phase earth fault

GI

1, 7

219

801

50 Earth Fault L3

C phase earth fault

GI

1, 7

219

802

Not supported

Earth Fault Indications

51 Earth Fault Fwd

Earth fault forward

GI

1, 7

219

803

52 Earth Fault Rev

Earth fault reverse

GI

1, 7

219

804

375

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

IEC103 Configurator Default setting


INF

Description

Contents

GI

Type
ID

COT

FUN

DPI
Signal NO. OFF ON

Fault Indications
64

Start/pick-up L1

A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up

GI

1, 7

219

805

65

Start/pick-up L2

B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up

GI

1, 7

219

806

66

Start/pick-up L3

C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up

GI

1, 7

219

807

67

Start/pick-up N

Earth fault element pick-up

GI

1, 7

219

808

68

General trip

Any trip

--

1, 7

219

371

--

2
2

69

Trip L1

A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip

--

1, 7

219

372

--

70

Trip L2

B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip

--

1, 7

219

373

--

71

Trip L3

C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip

--

1, 7

219

374

--

72

Trip I>>(back-up)

Back up trip

73

Fault location X In ohms

Fault location

--

1, 7

219

1048

--

--

74

Fault forward/line

Forward fault

--

1, 7

219

816

--

75

Fault reverse/Busbar

Reverse fault

--

1, 7

219

817

--

76

Teleprotection Signal
transmitted

Carrier signal sending

77

Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving

N ot supported

78

Zone1

Zone 1 trip

N ot supported

79

Zone2

Zone 2 trip

N ot supported

80

Zone3

Zone 3 trip

N ot supported

81

Zone4

Zone 4 trip

N ot supported

82

Zone5

Zone 5 trip

N ot supported

83

Zone6

Zone 6 trip

84

General Start/Pick-up

Any elements pick-up

GI

1, 7

219

1279

85

Breaker Failure

CBF trip or CBF retrip

--

1, 7

219

818

--

86

Trip measuring system L1

N ot supported

87

Trip measuring system L2

N ot supported

88

Trip measuring system L3

N ot supported

89

Trip measuring system E

90

Trip I>

Inverse time OC trip

--

1, 7

219

819

--

91

Trip I>>

Definite time OC trip

--

1, 7

219

820

--

92

Trip IN>

Inverse time earth fault OC trip

--

1, 7

219

821

--

93

Trip IN>>

Definite time earth fault OC trip

--

1, 7

219

822

--

CB close command output

--

1, 7

219

403

--

400

No set

N ot supported

N ot supported

N ot supported

Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose
129

CB 'ON' by long-time
Autoreclose

N ot supported

130 Autoreclose Blocked

Autoreclose block

GI

Details of Fault location settings in the IEC103 configurator


INF

Tbl

Offset

Data type

Coeff

219

26

short

0.1

376

1, 7

219

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

IEC103 configurator Default setting


INF

Description

Contents

GI

Type
COT
ID

FUN

Max. No.

Measurands
144 Measurand I

Ib <meaurand I>

--

2, 7

219

145 Measurand I,V

Ib, Vab <meaurand I>

--

2, 7

219

146 Measurand I,V,P,Q

Ib, Vab, P, Q <meaurand I>

--

2, 7

219

147 Measurand IN,VEN

Ie, Ve <meaurand I>

--

2, 7

219

Ia, Ib, Ic, Va, Vb, Vc, P, Q, f measurand


<meaurand II>

--

2, 7

219

148

Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,


P,Q,f

Generic Function
240 Read Headings

Not supported

Read attributes of all entries


241
of a group

Not supported

243 Read directory of entry

Not supported

244 Real attribute of entry

Not supported

245 End of GGI

Not supported

249 Write entry with confirm

Not supported

250 Write entry with execute

Not supported

251 Write entry aborted

Not supported

Details of MEA settings in the IEC103 configurator


INF MEA

Tbl

Offset Data type

Limit

Coeff

Lower

Upper

144

Ib

80

long

4096

1.70667

145

Ib

80

long

4096

1.70667

Vab

24

long

4096

3.2252

Ib

80

long

4096

1.70667

Vab

24

long

4096

3.2252

216

long

-4096

4096

0.000538

146

147

148

224

long

-4096

4096

0.000538

Ie

152

long

4096

1.70667

Ve

144

long

4096

3.2252

Ia

72

long

4096

1.70667

Ib

80

long

4096

1.70667

Ic

88

long

4096

1.70667

Va

long

4096

3.2252

Vb

long

4096

3.2252

Vc

16

long

4096

3.2252

216

long

-4096

4096

0.000538

224

long

-4096

4096

0.000538

184

long

4096

0.68267

377

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Note Further to the aforementioned default settings for measurement, the following power
quantities, which are measured routinely in the relay, can also be transmitted. The recommended
settings for each power quantity in IEC103 configurator are shown below.

Quantity
Magnitude of phase
current
Magnitude of residual
current
Magnitude of zero
sequence current from
core balance CT
Magnitude of
symmetrical
component current
Ratio of negative to
positive sequence
current
Magnitude of phase
voltage
Magnitude of phaseto-phase voltage
Magnitude of residual
voltage, or of
reference voltage for
sync. check
Magnitude of
symmetrical
component voltage
Active power
Reactive power
Apparent power
Power factor

Settings for IEC103 configurator


Limit
Name Tbl Offset Data type
Lower Upper

Coeff

Ia

72

long

4096

(0.001/2.4)*2^12=1.7067

Ib

80

long

4096

(0.001/2.4)*2^12=1.7067

Ic

88

long

4096

(0.001/2.4)*2^12=1.7067

Ie

152

long

4096

(0.001/2.4)*2^12=1.7067

Ise

160

long

4096

(0.00025/2.4)*2^12=0.42667

I1

128

long

4096

(0.001/2.4)*2^12=1.7067

I2

136

long

4096

(0.001/2.4)*2^12=1.7067

I0

120

long

4096

(0.001/2.4)*2^12=1.7067

I2/I1

168

long

1000

0.01

Va

long

4096

(0.06/63.5/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

Vb

long

4096

(0.06/63.5/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

Vc

16

long

4096

(0.06/63.5/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

Vab

24

long

4096

(0.06/110/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

Vbc

32

long

4096

(0.06/110/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

Vca

40

long

4096

(0.06/110/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

Ves

144

long

4096

(0.06/63.5/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

V1

56

long

4096

(0.06/63.5/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

V2

64

long

4096

(0.06/63.5/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

V0

48

long

4096

(0.06/63.5/1.2)*2^12=3.2252

216

long

-4096

4096

224

long

-4096

4096

232

long

4096

PF

208

long

-1000

1000

(0.001*0.06/63.5/2.4)*2^12
0.0016126
(0.001*0.06/63.5/2.4)*2^12
0.0016126
(0.001*0.06/63.5/2.4)*2^12
0.0016126
1
(0.001/1.2/50)*2^12=1.7067

Frequency

184

long

4096

for 50Hz operation


(0.001/1.2/60)*2^12=1.7067
for 60Hz operation

Percentage of thermal
capacity

THM%

176

long

378

1000

0.01

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
Note that the measured data that is transmitted from the relay should be multiplied by the following
coefficients, in order to correctly display these power quantities on SAS/SCADA.
Name
Ia, Ib, Ic,

Coefficient

Note

Unit

2.4*1[A]/2^12

1[A] rating
A

Ie, Ise, I1, I2, I0

2.4*5[A]/2^12

I2/I1
Va, Vb, Vc, Ves,
V1, V2, V0
Vab, Vbc, Vca

0.1

1.2*63.5[V]/2^12=0.03223

1.2*110[V]/2^12=0.03223
2.4*1[A]*63.5[V]/2^12

For primary display, appropriate VT ratio


should also be multiplied.

P, Q, S
PF
f
THM%

2.4*5[A]*63.5[V]/2^12
0.001
1.2*50[Hz]/2^12=0.01465
1.2*60[Hz]/2^12=0.01758
1

5[A] rating

For primary display, appropriate


CT ratio should also be
multiplied.

1[A] rating
W, Var,
VA 5[A] rating
Hz
%

379

For primary display, appropriate


CT and VT ratios should also
be multiplied.

50[Hz] operation
60[Hz] operation
-

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

IEC103 Configurator Default setting


INF

Description

Contents

Control
Type ID
direction

COT

FUN

Selection of standard information numbers in control direction


System functions
0

Initiation of general interrogation

--

255

Time synchronization

--

255

219

General commands
16

Auto-recloser on/off

ON/OFF

20

20

17

Teleprotection on/off

ON/OFF

20

20

219

18

Protection on/off

(*1)

ON/OFF

20

20

219

19

LED reset

Reset indication of latched LEDs.

ON

20

20

219

23

Activate characteristic 1

Setting Group 1

ON

20

20

219

24

Activate characteristic 2

Setting Group 2

ON

20

20

219

25

Activate characteristic 3

Setting Group 3

ON

20

20

219

26

Activate characteristic 4

Setting Group 4

ON

20

20

219

Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240
groups

Not supported

241

Read values or attributes of all


entries of one group

Not supported

243

Read directory of a single entry

Not supported

244

Read values or attributes of a


single entry

Not supported

245

General Interrogation of generic


data

Not supported

248

Write entry

Not supported

249

Write entry w ith confirmation

Not supported

250

Write entry w ith execution

Not supported

(1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, the "IN SERVICE LED" is off.

Details of Command settings in the IEC103 configurator


DCO

INF
Sig off

Sig on

16

2684

2684

17

2685

2685

18

2686

2686

19

2688

200

23

2640

1000

24

2641

1000

25

2642

1000

26

2643

1000

Rev

Valid time
0
0
0

: signal reverse

380

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Description

Contents

GRD140 supported

Basic a pplication function s


Test mo de

Yes

Blo cking o f m onitor d irection

Yes

Disturban ce data

No

Gen eric services

No

Private data

No

Misce llane ous


M ax. MVAL = ra ted va lue
tim es

M easurand
Cu rren t L1

Ia

Co nfigurable

Cu rren t L2

Ib

Co nfigurable

Cu rren t L3

Ic

Co nfigurable

Voltage L1-E

Va

Co nfigurable

Voltage L2-E

Vb

Co nfigurable

Voltage L3-E

Vc

Co nfigurable

Active p ower P

Co nfigurable

Re active p ower Q

Co nfigurable

Frequ ency f

Co nfigurable

Voltage L1 - L2

Vab

Co nfigurable

Details of Common settings in the IEC103 configurator


- Setting files remark:
IGRD140DA001
- Remote operation valid time [ms]:
4000
- Local operation valid time [ms]:
4000
- Measurand period [s]:
2
- Function type of System functions: 219
- Signal No. of Test mode:
1242
- Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279

381

Comment

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)
DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)
DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)

382

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:
(1) Naming for IEC103setting data
The file extension of IEC103 setting data is .csv. It is recommended that the revision name is
provided with a revision number in order to be able to accommodate future changes as follows:
First draft:

_01.csv

Second draft:

_02.csv

Third draft:

_03.csv
Revision number

The name is recommended in order to be able to discriminate the relay type such as
GRZ100 or GRL100, etc. The setting files remark field for IEC103 can accept up to 12
one-byte characters. It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.

(2) Saving theIEC103 setting data


It is recommended that IEC103 setting data is saved on electronic media and should not be left
in a folder.

383

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Troubleshooting
No.

Phenomena

Supposed causes

Check / Confirmation
Object

Communication
trouble (IEC103
communication is
not available.)

HMI does not


display IEC103
event on the
SAS side.

Procedure

Address setting is incorrect.

BCU
RY

Match address setting between BCU and relay.


Avoid duplication of address with other relay.

Transmission baud rate setting is


incorrect.

BCU
RY

Match transmission baud rate setting between


BCU and relay.

Start bit, stop bit and parity settings of


data that BCU transmits to relay is
incorrect.

BCU

Go over the following settings via the BCU.


Relay setting is fixed in accordance with the
following settings.
- Start bit: 1bit
- Stop bit: 1bit
- Parity setting: even

RS485 or optical cable


interconnection is incorrect.

Cable

- Check the connection port.


- Check the interconnection for RS485
A/B/COM
- Check the send and received interconnection
for the optical cable.

The setting of converter is incorrect.


(RS485/optic conversion is executed
with the transmission channel, etc.)

Converter

In the event of using G1IF2, change the


DIPSW setting in reference to INSTRUCTION
MANUAL (6F2S0794).

The relationship between logical 0/1


of the signal and Sig.on/off is
incorrect. (In the event of using
optical cable)

BCU

Check the following;


Logical0 : Sig.on
Logical1:Sig.off

Terminal resistor is not provided.


(Especially when the RS485 cable is
long.)

cable

Add terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to both ends


of RS 485 cable.

Relay cannot receive the requirement


frame from BCU.
(The timing coordination of sending
and receiving switch control is
irregular in half-duplex
communication.)

BCU

Check to ensure that there is a margin of more


than 15ms between receiving the reply frame
from the relay and transmitting the next
requirement frame from the BCU.

The requirement frame from the BCU


and the reply frame from relay
contend.
(The sending and receiving timing
coordination is irregular in half-duplex
communication.)

BCU

Check to set the time-out for the reply frame


from the relay.
Time-out setting: more than 100ms
(acceptable value of response time 50ms plus
margin)

The relevant event sending condition


is not valid.

RY

Change the event sending condition (signal


number) of the IEC103 configurator if there is a
setting error. When the setting is correct, check
the signal condition using the programmable
LED, etc.

384

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
No.

Phenomena

Supposed causes

Check / Confirmation
Object

Time can be not


synchronised
with IEC103
communication.

Procedure

The relevant event Information


Number (INF) and/or Function Type
(FUN) may be different between the
relay and SAS.

RY
SAS

Match the relevant event Information Number


(INF) or Function Type (FUN) between the
relay and SAS.

The relay is not initialised after writing


the IEC103 configurator setting.

RY

Check the sum value of the IEC103 setting


data on the LCD screen. When differing from
the sum value on the IEC103 configurator,
initialise the relay.

It changes to blocked mode.

RY

Change the IECBR setting to Normal.

BCU does not transmit the time


synchronisation frame.

BCU

Transmit the time synchronisation frame.

The settling of the time


synchronisation source is set to other
than IEC.

RY

Change the settling of time synchronisation


source to IEC.

(Note) BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay

385

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix N
IEC61850: MICS & PICS

386

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

MICS: IEC61850 Model Implementation Conformance Statement


The GRD140 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the
following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4
Logical Nodes
GRD140
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD
Yes
Common Logical Node
Yes
LLN0
Yes
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions
--PDIF
PDIR
--PDIS
--PDOP
--PDUP
--PFRC
Yes
PHAR
Yes
PHIZ
--PIOC
--PMRI
--PMSS
--POPE
--PPAM
--PSCH
----PSDE
--PTEF
Yes
PTOC
Yes
PTOF
Yes
PTOV
Yes
PTRC
Yes
PTTR
Yes
PTUC
Yes
PTUV
--PUPF
--PTUF
--PVOC
--PVPH
PZSU
--R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions
RDRE
--RADR
--RBDR
--RDRS
--RBRF
Yes
RDIR
--RFLO
Yes
RPSB
--RREC
Yes
RSYN
Yes
C: Logical Nodes for Control
CALH
--CCGR
--CILO
--CPOW
--CSWI
--G: Logical Nodes for Generic references
GAPC
--GGIO
Yes

Nodes
GRD140
GGIO_GOOSE
Yes
GSAL
--I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
IARC
--IHMI
--ITCI
--ITMI
--A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
ANCR
--ARCO
--ATCC
--AVCO
--M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
MDIF
--MHAI
--MHAN
--MMTR
--MMXN
--MMXU
Yes
MSQI
Yes
MSTA
--S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
SARC
--SIMG
--SIML
--SPDC
--X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
XCBR
Yes
XSWI
--T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
TCTR
--TVTR
--Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
YEFN
--YLTC
--YPSH
--YPTR
--Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment
ZAXN
--ZBAT
--ZCAB
--ZCAP
--ZCON
--ZGEN
--ZGIL
--ZLIN
--ZMOT
--ZREA
--ZRRC
--ZSAR
--ZTCF
--ZTCR
---

387

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3


Common data classes
Status information
SPS
DPS
INS
ACT
ACT_ABC
ACD
ACD_ABC
SEC
BCR
Measured information
MV
CMV
SAV
WYE
WYE_ABCN
DEL
SEQ
HMV
HWYE
HDEL
Controllable status information
SPC
DPC
INC
BSC
ISC
Controllable analogue information
APC
Status settings
SPG
ING
Analogue settings
ASG
CURVE
Description information
DPL
LPL
CSD

GRD140
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
----Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
------Yes
Yes
Yes
--------Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
---

388

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

LPHD class
Attribute Name
LNName
Data
PhyName
PhyHealth
OutOv
Proxy
InOv
NumPwrUp
WrmStr
WacTrg
PwrUp
PwrDn
PwrSupAlm
RsStat

Attr. Type

Explanation
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

DPL
INS
SPS
SPS
SPS
INS
INS
INS
SPS
SPS
SPS
SPC

Physical device name plate


Physical device health
Output communications buffer overflow
Indicates if this LN is a proxy
Input communications buffer overflow
Number of Power ups
Number of Warm Starts
Number of watchdog device resets detected
Power Up detected
Power Down detected
External power supply alarm
Reset device statistics

Common Logical Node class


Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LNName
Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mode
Mod
INC
Behaviour
Beh
INS
Health
Health
INS
Name plate
NamPlt
LPL
Optional Logical Node Information

T M/O GRD140

SPS
INS

Local operation for complete logical device


Operation time

SPC
SPC

Run Diagnostics
LED reset

389

M
M
M
M

Y
Y
Y
Y

O
O
O
O
O
O

N
N
N
N
N
N

T M/O GRD140

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

Loc
OpTmh
Controls
Diag
LEDRs

Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

T M/O GRD140

Local operation
Loc
SPS
External equipment health
EEHealth
INS
External equipment name plate
EEName
DPL
Operation counter resetable
OpCntRs
INC
Operation counter
OpCnt
INS
Operation time
OpTmh
INS
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

LLNO class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information

M
M
O
M
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

M
O
O

Y
N

O
O

Y
Y

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

PFRC class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD
Start
Op
ACT
Operate
BlkV
SPS
Blocked because of voltage
Settings
StrVal
ASG
Start Value df/dt
BlkVal
ASG
Voltage Block Value
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time

PHAR class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC Start
Settings
HarRst
ING
Number of harmonic restrained
PhStr
ASG
Start Value
PhStop
ASG
Stop Value
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time

390

M/O GRD140

M
O

M
M
O

Y
Y
Y

O
O
O
O

Y
Y
N
N

M/O GRD140

M
O

O
O
O
O
O

N
Y
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

PTOC class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC Start
Op
ACT_ABC Operate
TmASt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
Settings
TmACrv
CURVE
Operating Curve Type
StrVal
ASG
Start Value
TmMult
ASG
Time Dial Multiplier
MinOpTmms
ING
Minimum Operate Time
MaxOpTmms
ING
Maximum Operate Time
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
TypRsCrv
ING
Type of Reset Curve
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time
DirMod
ING
Directional Mode

M/O

GRD140

M
O

M
M
O

Y
Y
N

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N

M/O

GRD140

M
O

M
M
O

Y
Y
Y

O
O
O
O

Y
Y
Y
N

PTOF class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation


Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LNName

Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
Resetable operation counter
OpCntRs
INC
Status Information
Str
ACD
Op
ACT
BlkV
SPS
Settings

Start
Operate
Blocked because of voltage

StrVal
BlkVal
OpDITmms
RsDITmms

Start Value (frequency)


Voltage Block Value
Operate Delay Time
Reset Delay Time

ASG
ASG
ING
ING

391

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

PTOV class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC Start
Op
ACT_ABC Operate
TmVSt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
Settings
TmVCrv
CURVE
Operating Curve Type
StrVal
ASG
Start Value
TmMult
ASG
Time Dial Multiplier
MinOpTmms
ING
Minimum Operate Time
MaxOpTmms
ING
Maximum Operate Time
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time

392

M/O

GRD140

M
O

M
O
O

Y
Y
N

O
O
O
O
O
O
O

N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

PTRC class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Tr
ACT_ABC Trip
Op
ACT
Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions)
Str
ACD
Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes
Settings
TrMod
ING
Trip Mode
TrPlsTmms
ING
Trip Pulse Time

M/O

GRD140

M
O

C
C
O

Y
N
N

O
O

N
N

M/O

GRD140

M
O

O
O
O
O
O
O

N
N
N
N
N
N

O
M
O
O
O

Y
Y
Y
N
N

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N

Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.

PTTR class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Measured Values
Amp
MV
Current for thermal load model
Tmp
MV
Temperature for thermal load
TmpRl
MV
Relation between temperature and max. temperature
LodRsvAlm
MV
Load reserve to alarm
LodRsvTr
MV
Load reserve to trip
AgeRat
MV
Ageing rate
Status Information
Str
ACD
Start
Op
ACT
Operate
AlmThm
ACT
Thermal Alarm
TmTmpSt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
TmASt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
Settings
TmTmpCrv
CURVE
Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement
TmACrv
CURVE
Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model
TmpMax
ASG
Maximum allowed temperature
StrVal
ASG
Start Value
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
MinOpTmms
ING
Minimum Operate Time
MaxOpTmms
ING
Maximum Operate Time
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time
ConsTms
ING
Time constant of the thermal model
AlmVal
ASG
Alarm Value

393

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

PTUC class
Attribute Name
LNName

Attr. Type

Explanation
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

M/O

GRD140

M
O

M
O
O

Y
Y
N

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N

M/O

GRD140

M
O

M
M
O

Y
Y
N

O
O
O
O
O
O
O

N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N

Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC Start
Op
ACT_ABC Operate
TmVSt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
Settings
TmACrv
CURVE
Operating Curve Type
StrVal
ASG
Start Value
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
TmMult
ASG
Time Dial Multiplier
MinOpTmms
ING
Minimum Operate Time
MaxOpTmms
ING
Maximum Operate Time
TypRsCrv
ING
Type of Reset Curve
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time
DirMod
ING
Directional Mode

PTUV class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC Start
Op
ACT_ABC Operate
TmVSt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
Settings
TmVCrv
CURVE
Operating Curve Type
StrVal
ASG
Start Value
TmMult
ASG
Time Dial Multiplier
MinOpTmms
ING
Minimum Operate Time
MaxOpTmms
ING
Maximum Operate Time
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time

394

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

PTUF class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD
Start
Op
ACT
Operate
BlkV
SPS
Blocked because of voltage
Settings
StrVal
ASG
Start Value (frequency)
BlkVal
ASG
Voltage Block Value
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time

395

M/O

GRD140

M
O

M
M
O

Y
Y
Y

O
O
O
O

Y
Y
Y
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

RBRF class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC Start, timer running
OpEx
ACT_ABC Breaker failure trip (external trip)
OpIn
ACT_ABC Operate, retrip (internal trip)
Settings
FailMod
ING
Breaker Failure Detection Mode (current, breaker status, both, other)
FailTmms
ING
Breaker Failure Time Delay for bus bar trip
SPTrTmms
ING
Single Pole Retrip Time Delay
TPTrTmms
ING
Three Pole Retrip Time Delay
DetValA
ASG
Current Detector Value
ReTrMod
ING
Retrip Mode

T
T

M/O

GRD140

M
O

O
C
C

Y
Y
Y

O
O
O
O
O
O

Y
Y
N
N
Y
N

M/O

GRD140

M
O

M
M

Y
Y

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema.

RFLO class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Measured values
FDOhm
MV
Fault Distance in
FDkm
MV
Fault Distance in km
Status Information
FltLoop
INS
Fault Loop
Settings
LinLenKm
ASG
Line length in km
R1
ASG
Positive-sequence line resistance
X1
ASG
Positive-sequence line reactance
R0
ASG
Zero-sequence line resistance
X0
ASG
Zero-sequence line reactance
Z1Mod
ASG
Positive-sequence line impedance value
Z1Ang
ASG
Positive-sequence line impedance angle
Z0Mod
ASG
Zero-sequence line impedance value
Z0Ang
ASG
Zero-sequence line impedance angle
Rm0
ASG
Mutual resistance
Xm0
ASG
Mutual reactance
Zm0Mod
ASG
Mutual impedance value
Zm0Ang
ASG
Mutual impedance angle

396

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

RREC class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Controls
BlkRec
INC
Block Reclose
ChkRec
SPC
Check Reclosing
Status Information
Auto
SPC
Automatic Operation (external switch status)
Op
ACT
Operate (used here to provide close to XCBR)
AutoRecSt
INS
Auto Reclosing Status
Settings
Rec1Tmms
ING
First Reclose Time
Rec2Tmms
ING
Second Reclose Time
Rec3Tmms
ING
Third Reclose Time
PlsTmms
ING
Close Pulse Time
RclTmms
ING
Reclaim Time

397

M/O

GRD140

M
O

O
O

N
N

O
M
M

N
Y
Y

O
O
O
O
O

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

RSYN class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Controls
RHz
SPC
Raise Frequency
LHz
SPC
Lower Frequency
RV
SPC
Raise Voltage
LV
SPC
Lower Voltage
Status Information
Rel
SPS
Release
VInd
SPS
Voltage Difference Indicator
AngInd
SPS
Angle Difference Indicator
HzInd
SPS
Frequency Difference Indicator
SynPrg
SPS
Synchronising in progress
Measured values
DifVClc
MV
Calculated Difference in Voltage
DifHzClc
MV
Calculated Difference in Frequency
DifAngClc
MV
Calculated Difference of Phase Angle
Settings
DifV
ASG
Difference Voltage
DifHz
ASG
Difference Frequency
DifAng
ASG
Difference Phase Angle
LivDeaMod
ING
Live Dead Mode
DeaLinVal
ASG
Dead Line Value
LivLinVal
ASG
Live Line Value
DeaBusVal
ASG
Dead Bus Value
LivBusVal
ASG
Live Bus Value
PlsTmms
ING
Close Pulse Time
BkrTmms
ING
Closing time of breaker

398

M/O

GRD140

M
O

O
O
O
O

N
N
N
N

M
O
O
O
O

Y
N
N
N
N

O
O
O

N
N
N

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

GGIO class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
Loc
SPS
Local operation
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Measured values
AnIn
MV
Analogue input
Controls
SPCSO
SPC
Single point controllable status output
DPCSO
DPC
Double point controllable status output
ISCSO
INC
Integer status controllable status output
Status Information
IntIn
INS
Integer status input
Alm
SPS
General single alarm
Ind1
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind2
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind3
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind4
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind5
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind6
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind7
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind8
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind9
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind10
SPS
General indication (binary input)
:
:
:
Ind64
SPS
General indication (binary input)

399

M/O

GRD140

M
O
O
O
O

N
N
N
N

O
O
O

N
N
N

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

GGIO_GOOSE class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
Loc
SPS
Local operation
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Measured values
AnIn
MV
Analogue input
Controls
SPCSO
SPC
Single point controllable status output
DPCSO
DPC
Double point controllable status output
ISCSO
INC
Integer status controllable status output
Status Information
IntIn
INS
Integer status input
Alm
SPS
General single alarm
Ind1
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind2
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind3
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind4
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind5
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind6
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind7
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind8
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind9
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind10
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind11
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind12
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind13
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind14
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind15
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind16
SPS
General indication (binary input)

400

M/O

GRD140

M
O
O
O
O

N
N
N
N

O
O
O

N
N
N

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

MMXU class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
Measured values
TotW
MV
Total Active Power (Total P)
TotVAr
MV
Total Reactive Power (Total Q)
TotVA
MV
Total Apparent Power (Total S)
TotPF
MV
Average Power factor (Total PF)
Hz
MV
Frequency
PPV
DEL
Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, )
PhV
WYE_ABCN Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, )
A
WYE_ABDNPhase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
W
WYE
Phase active power (P)
VAr
WYE
Phase reactive power (Q)
VA
WYE
Phase apparent power (S)
PF
WYE
Phase power factor
Z
WYE
Phase Impedance

MSQI class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
Measured values
SeqA
SEQ
Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current
SeqV
SEQ
Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage
DQ0Seq
SEQ
DQ0 Sequence
ImbA
WYE
Imbalance current
ImbNgA
MV
Imbalance negative sequence current
ImbNgV
MV
Imbalance negative sequence voltage
ImbPPV
DEL
Imbalance phase-phase voltage
ImbV
WYE
Imbalance voltage
ImbZroA
MV
Imbalance zero sequence current
ImbZroV
MV
Imbalance zero sequence voltage
MaxImbA
MV
Maximum imbalance current
MaxImbPPV
MV
Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage
MaxImbV
MV
Maximum imbalance voltage

Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.

401

M/O

GRD140

M
O

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N

M/O

GRD140

M
O
O

N
N

C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

XCBR class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
OpCnt
INS
Operation counter
Controls
Pos
DPC
Switch position
BlkOpn
SPC
Block opening
BlkCls
SPC
Block closing
ChaMotEna
SPC
Charger motor enabled
Metered Values
SumSwARs
BCR
Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable
Status Information
CBOpCap
INS
Circuit breaker operating capability
POWCap
INS
Point On Wave switching capability
MaxOpCap
INS
Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged

402

M/O

GRD140

M
O
O
M

N
N
Y

M
M
M
O

Y
Y
Y
Y

M
O
O

Y
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

SPS class
Attribute Name
DataName
DataAttribute

Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

stVal
q
t

BOOLEAN
Quality
TimeStamp

subEna
subVal
subQ
subID

ST
ST
ST

dchg
qchg

Value/Value Range

Status
TRUE | FALSE

Substitution
SV
SV
TRUE | FALSE
SV
SV
configuration, description and extension
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
UNICODE STRING255
DC
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
Quality
VISIBLE STRING64

d
dU
cdcNs
cdcName
dataNs
Services
As defined in Table 13

INS class
Attribute Name
DataName
DataAttribute

Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

stVal
q
t

INT32
Quality
TimeStamp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRD140

M
M
M

Y
Y
Y

PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST

N
N
N
N

O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N
N

M/O/C

GRD140

M
M
M

Y(*1)
Y
Y

PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST

N
N
N
N

O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N
N

status

subEna
subVal
subQ
subID

ST
ST
ST

dchg
qchg

Substitution
SV
SV
SV
SV
configuration, description and extension
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
UNICODE STRING255
DC
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
BOOLEAN
INT32
Quality
VISIBLE STRING64

d
dU
cdcNs
cdcName
dataNs
Services
As defined in Table 13

(*1): ENUM type is also used.

403

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

ACT class
Attribute Name
DataName
DataAttribute
general
phsA
phsB
phsC
neut
q
t

Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Value/Value Range

status
ST
dchg
ST
dchg
ST
dchg
ST
dchg
ST
dchg
ST
qchg
ST
configuration, description and extension
TimeStamp
CF
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
UNICODE STRING255
DC
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
Quality
TimeStamp

operTm
d
dU
cdcNs
cdcName
dataNs
Services
As defined in Table 13

ACT_ABC class
Attribute Name
DataName
DataAttribute
general
phsA
phsB
phsC
neut
q
t

Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Value/Value Range

status
ST
dchg
ST
dchg
ST
dchg
ST
dchg
ST
dchg
ST
qchg
ST
configuration, description and extension
TimeStamp
CF
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
UNICODE STRING255
DC
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
Quality
TimeStamp

operTm
d
dU
cdcNs
cdcName
dataNs
Services
As defined in Table 13

404

M/O/C

GRD140

M
O
O
O
O
M
M

Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y

O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N
N
N

M/O/C

GRD140

M
O
O
O
O
M
M

Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y

O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

ACD class
Attribute
Name
DataName
DataAttribute

Attribute Type

FC

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRD140

M
M

Y
Y

GC_2 (1)
GC_2 (1)
GC_2 (2)
GC_2 (2)
GC_2 (3)
GC_2 (3)
GC_2 (4)
GC_2 (4)
M
M

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y

O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N
N

M/O/C

GRD140

M
M

Y
Y

GC_2 (1)
GC_2 (1)
GC_2 (2)
GC_2 (2)
GC_2 (3)
GC_2 (3)
GC_2 (4)
GC_2 (4)
M
M

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y

O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N
N

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)


status

general
dirGeneral

BOOLEAN
ENUMERATED

phsA
dirPhsA
phsB
dirPhsB
phsC
dirPhsC
neut
dirNeut
q
t

BOOLEAN
ENUMERATED
BOOLEAN
ENUMERATED
BOOLEAN
ENUMERATED
BOOLEAN
ENUMERATED
Quality
TimeStamp

d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 13

ST
ST

dchg
dchg

unknown | forward | backward |


both

ST dchg
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward
ST dchg
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward
ST dchg
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward
ST dchg
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward
ST qchg
ST
configuration, description and extension
DC
Text
DC
EX
EX
EX

ACD_ABC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
dirGeneral
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward |
both
phsA
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
dirPhsA
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward
phsB
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
dirPhsB
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward
phsC
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
dirPhsC
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward
neut
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
dirNeut
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
unknown | forward | backward
q
Quality
ST qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
configuration, description and extension
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 13

405

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

MV class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag
AnalogueValue
MX
mag
AnalogueValue
MX dchg
range
ENUMERATED
MX dchg
normal | high | low | high-high | low-low
|
q
Quality
MX qchg
t
TimeStamp
MX
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
AnalogueValue
SV
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
units
Unit
CF
see Annex A
db
INT32U
CF
0 100 000
zeroDb
INT32U
CF
0 100 000
sVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
rangeC
RangeConfig
CF
smpRate
INT32U
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 21

406

M/O/C

GRD140

O
M
O

N
Y
N

M
M

Y
Y

PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST

N
N
N
N

O
O
O
AC_SCAV
GC_CON
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

CMV class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal
Vector
MX
cVal
Vector
MX dchg
range
ENUMERATED
MX dchg
normal | high | low | high-high | low-low
|
q
Quality
MX qchg
t
TimeStamp
MX
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
Vector
SV
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
units
Unit
CF
see Annex A
db
INT32U
CF
0 100 000
zeroDb
INT32U
CF
0 100 000
rangeC
RangeConfig
CF
magSVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
angSVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
angRef
ENUMERATED
CF
V | A | other
smpRate
INT32U
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 21

407

M/O/C

GRD140

O
M
O

N
Y
N

M
M

Y
Y

PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST

N
N
N
N

O
O
O
GC_CON
AC_SCAV
AC_SCAV
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

WYE class
Attribute
Name
DataName
Data
phsA
phsB
phsC
neut
net
res
DataAttribute
angRef

Attribute Type

FC

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRD140

GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1

Y
Y
Y
N
N
N

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)


CMV
CMV
CMV
CMV
CMV
CMV

ENUMERATED

d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 21

configuration, description and extension


CF
Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc
O
| Vca | Vother | Aother
DC
Text
O
DC
O
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
EX
AC_DLN_M

WYE_ABCN class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
phsA
CMV
GC_1
phsB
CMV
GC_1
phsC
CMV
GC_1
neut
CMV
GC_1
net
CMV
GC_1
res
CMV
GC_1
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
angRef
ENUMERATED
CF
Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc
O
| Vca | Vother | Aother
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
O
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
O
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLN_M
Services
As defined in Table 21

408

N
N
N
N
N
N

GRD140

Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

DEL class
Attribute
Name
DataName
Data
phsAB
phsBC
phsCA
DataAttribute
angRef

Attribute Type

seqT

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRD140

GC_1
GC_1
GC_1

Y
Y
Y

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)


CMV
CMV
CMV

ENUMERATED

d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 21

SEQ class
Attribute
Name
DataName
Data
c1
c2
c3
DataAttribute

FC

Attribute Type

configuration, description and extension


CF
Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc
O
| Vca | Vother | Aother
DC
Text
O
DC
O
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
EX
AC_DLN_M

FC

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

N
N
N
N
N
N

M/O/C

GRD140

M
M
M

Y
Y
Y

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)


CMV
CMV
CMV

ENUMERATED

phsRef
ENUMERATED
d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 21

measured attributes
MX
pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero
configuration, description and extension
CF
A|B|C|
DC
Text
DC
EX
EX
EX

409

O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

SPC class
Attribute
Name
DataName
DataAttribute

Attribute Type

FC

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRD140

AC_CO_M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_SBO_N_M
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
AC_CO _M
AC_CO_SBO_N_M and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
AC_ST
AC_ST
AC_ST
AC_CO_O

N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N

PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST

N
N
N
N

AC_CO_O
M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

ctlVal
operTm
origin
ctlNum
SBO
SBOw
Oper
Cancel

BOOLEAN
TimeStamp
Originator
INT8U_RO
VISIBLE STRING65
SBOW
Oper
Cancel

stVal
q
t
stSeld

BOOLEAN
Quality
TimeStamp
BOOLEAN

subEna
subVal
subQ
subID

BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
Quality
VISIBLE STRING64

pulseConfig
PulseConfig
CtlModel
CtlModels
sboTimeout
INT32U
sboClass
SboClasses
d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 31

control and status


off (FALSE) | on (TRUE)

CO
CO
CO, ST
CO, ST
CO
CO
CO
CO

ST
ST
ST
ST

0..255

dchg
qchg

FALSE | TRUE

dchg

substitution
SV
SV
FALSE | TRUE
SV
SV
configuration, description and extension
CF
CF
CF
CF
DC
Text
DC
EX
EX
EX

410

Y
Y
Y
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

DPC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal
BOOLEAN
CO
off (FALSE) | on (TRUE)
operTm
TimeStamp
CO
origin
Originator_RO
CO, ST
ctlNum
INT8U_RO
CO, ST
0..255
stVal
CODED_ENUM
ST dchg
intermediate-state | off | on | bad-state
q
Quality
ST qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
stSeld
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
CODED_ENUM
SV
FALSE | TRUE
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
pulseConfig PulseConfig
CF
CtlModel
CtlModels
CF
sboTimeout
INT32U
CF
sboClass
SboClasses
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 31

411

M/O/C

GRD140

AC_CO_M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
M
M
M
AC_CO_O

N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N

PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST

N
N
N
N

AC_CO_O
M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

INC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal
INT32
CO
operTm
TimeStamp
CO
origin
Originator
CO, ST
ctlNum
INT8U
CO, ST
0..255
SBO
VISIBLE STRING65
CO
SBOw
SBOW
CO
Oper
Oper
CO
Cancel
Cancel
CO

stVal
q
t
stSeld

INT32
Quality
TimeStamp
BOOLEAN

ST
ST
ST
ST

subEna
subVal
subQ
subID

BOOLEAN
INT32
Quality
VISIBLE STRING64

SV
SV
SV
SV

dchg
qchg
dchg

M/O/C

GRD140

AC_CO_M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_SBO_N_M
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
AC_CO _M
AC_CO_SBO_N_M
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
M
M
M
AC_CO_O

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST

N
N
N
N

M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Y
Y
Y
N

substitution
FALSE | TRUE

configuration, description and extension


CtlModel
CtlModels
sboTimeout
INT32U
sboClass
SboClasses
minVal
INT32
maxVal
INT32
stepSize
INT32U
d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 31

CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
DC
DC
EX
EX
EX

1 (maxVal minVal)
Text

412

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

ING class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
setVal
setVal

INT32
INT32

minVal
INT32
maxVal
INT32
stepSize
INT32U
d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 39

Value/Value Range

setting
SP
SG, SE
configuration, description and extension
CF
CF
CF
1 (maxVal minVal)
DC
Text
DC
EX
EX
EX

M/O/C

GRD140

AC_NSG_M
AC_SG_M

Y(*3)
N

O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

M/O/C

GRD140

AC_NSG_M
AC_SG_M

Y
N

O
AC_SCAV
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

(*3): ENUM type is also used.

ASG class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
setMag
setMag

AnalogueValue
AnalogueValue

units
Unit
sVC
ScaledValueConfig
minVal
AnalogueValue
maxVal
AnalogueValue
stepSize
AnalogueValue
d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 42

Value/Value Range

setting
SP
SG, SE
configuration, description and extension
CF
see Annex A
CF
CF
CF
CF
1 (maxVal minVal)
DC
Text
DC
EX
EX
EX

413

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

DPL class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
vendor
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
hwRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
swRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
serNum
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
model
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
location
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 45

LPL class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
vendor
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
swRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
configRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
ldNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
shall be included in LLN0 only;
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 45

414

M/O/C

GRD140

M
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N

M/O/C

GRD140

M
M
M
O
AC_LN0_M
AC_LN0_EX

Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N

AC_DLD_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M

N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

PICS: IEC61850 ASCI Conformance Statement


Client/
subscriber

Server/
publisher

GRD140

c1

c1

Client-server roles
B11
Server side (of TWO-PARTYAPPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12
Client side of (TWO-PARTYAPPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21
SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used
B22
SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used
B23
SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used
B24
SCSM: other
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31
Publisher side
B32
Subscriber side
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41
Publisher side
B42
Subscriber side

Y
N
N
-

If Server side (B11) supported


M1
Logical device
M2
Logical node
M3
Data
M4
Data set
M5
Substitution
M6
Setting group control
Reporting
M7
Buffered report control
M7-1
sequence-number
M7-2
report-time-stamp
M7-3
reason-for-inclusion
M7-4
data-set-name
M7-5
data-reference
M7-6
buffer-overflow
M7-7
entryID
M7-8
BufTm
M7-9
IntgPd
M7-10
GI
Unbuffered report control
M8-1
sequence-number
M8-2
report-time-stamp
M8-3
reason-for-inclusion
M8-4
data-set-name
M8-5
data-reference
M8-6
BufTm
M8-7
IntgPd
M8-8
GI
Logging
M9
Log control
M9-1
IntgPd
M10
Log
M11
Control
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE
M12-1 entryID
M12-2 DataRefInc
M13
GSSE
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported

415

O
-

Y
Y

O
-

N
N

c2
c3
c4
c5
O
O

c2
c3
c4
c5
O
O

Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y

O
O

O
O

O
M

O
M

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y

Remarks

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
M14
Multicast SVC
M15
Unicast SVC
M16
Time
M17
File Transfer
Server
S1
ServerDirectory
Application association
S2
Associate
S3
Abort
S4
Release
Logical device
S5
LogicalDeviceDirectory
Logical node
S6
LogicalNodeDirectory
S7
GetAllDataValues
Data
S8
GetDataValues
S9
SetDataValues
S10
GetDataDirectory
S11
GetDataDefinition
Data set
S12
GetDataSetValues
S13
SetDataSetValues
S14
CreateDataSet
S15
DeleteDataSet
S16
GetDataSetDirectory
Substitution
S17
SetDataValues
Setting group control
S18
SelectActiveSG
S19
SelectEditSG
S20
SetSGValues
S21
ConfirmEditSGValues
S22
GetSGValues
S23
GetSGCBValues
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24
Report
S24-1
data-change (dchg)
S24-2
quality-change (qchg)
S24-3
data-update (dupd)
S25
GetBRCBValues
S26
SetBRCBValues
Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)
S27
Report
S27-1
data-change (dchg)
S27-2
quality-change (qchg)
S27-3
data-update (dupd)
S28
GetURCBValues
S29
SetURCBValues
Logging
Log control block
S30
GetLCBValues
S31
SetLCBValues
Log
S32
QueryLogByTime
S33
QueryLogAfter
S34
GetLogStatusValues
Generic substation event model (GSE)

O
O
M
O

416

O
O
M
O

N
N
Y
Y

M
M
M

M
M
M

Y
Y
Y

M
O

M
M

Y
Y

M
O
O
O

M
O
M
M

Y
N
Y
Y

O
O
O
O
O

M
O
O
O
O

Y
N
N
N
Y

O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
O
O
O
O

Y
N
N
N
N
Y

c6

c6

c6
c6

c6
c6

Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y

c6

c6

c6
c6

c6
c6

Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y

M
O

M
M

N
N

c7
c7
M

M
M
M

N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35
SendGOOSEMessage
S36
GetGoReference
S37
GetGOOSEElementNumber
S38
GetGoCBValues
S39
SetGoCBValues
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40
SendGSSEMessage
S41
GetGsReference
S42
GetGSSEElementNumber
S43
GetGsCBValues
S44
SetGsCBValues
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
S45
SendMSVMessage
S46
GetMSVCBValues
S47
SetMSVCBValues
Unicast SVC
S48
SendUSVMessage
S49
GetUSVCBValues
S50
SetUSVCBValues
Control
S51
Select
S52
SelectWithValue
S53
Cancel
S54
Operate
S55
CommandTermination
S56
TimeActivatedOperate
File Transfer
S57
GetFile
S58
SetFile
S59
DeleteFile
S60
GetFileAttributeValues
Time
T1
Time resolution of internal clock
T2
Time accuracy of internal clock
T3
Supported TimeStamp resolution

c8
O
O
O
O

c8
c9
c9
O
O

Y
N
N
Y
Y

c8
O
O
O
O

c8
c9
c9
O
O

N
N
N
N
N

c10
O
O

c10
O
O

N
N
N

c10
O
O

c10
O
O

N
N
N

M
M
O
M
M
O

O
O
O
M
O
O

N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N

O
O
O
O

M
O
O
O

Y
N
N
Y
1ms
1ms
1ms

T1

M Mandatory
O Optional
c1 shall be M if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 shall be M if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 shall be M if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 shall be M if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been declared.
c5 shall be M if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).

417

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

A-Profile
shortcut

Profile Description

PICS for A-Profile support


Client
Server
F/S
F/S

GRD140

Remarks

A1
A2

Client/server A-Profile
c1
c1
Y
GOOSE/GSE
c2
c2
Y
management A-Profile
A3
GSSE A-Profile
c3
c3
N
A4
TimeSync A-Profile
c4
c4
Y
c1 Shall be m if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be m if support for any service specified in Table 6 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c3 Shall be m if support for any service specified in Table 9 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC
61850-8-1.

A-Profile
shortcut
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
c1
c2
c3
c4

Profile Description

PICS for T-Profile support


Client
Server
F/S
F/S

TCP/IP T-Profile
c1
c1
OSI T-Profile
c2
c2
GOOSE/GSE T-Profile
c3
c3
GSSE T-Profile
c4
c4
TimeSync T-Profile
o
o
Shall be m if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
Shall be o if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
Shall be m if support for A2 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i.
Shall be m if support for A3 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i.

418

GRD140
Y
N
Y
N
Y

Remarks

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

InitiateRequest

MMS InitiateRequest general parameters


Client-CR
Server-CR
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling
proposedMaxServOustandingCalled
initRequestDetail
InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber
proposedParameterCBB
servicesSupportedCalling
additionalSupportedCalling
additionalCbbSupportedCalling
privilegeClassIdentityCalling
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI

InitiateRequest

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
c1
c1
c1

m
m
m
x
x
x

1 or greater
1 or greater

shall be 2.1

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
c1
c1
c1

m
m
m
x
x
x

1 or greater
1 or greater

shall be 2.1

MMS InitiateResponse general parameters


Client-CR
Server-CR
Base F/S
Value/range Base F/S Value/range

InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled
initResponseDetail
InitiateResponseDetail
negotiatedVersionNumber
negotiatedParameterCBB
servicesSupportedCalled
additionalSupportedCalled
additionalCbbSupportedCalled
privilegeClassIdentityCalled
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
c1
c1
c1

m
m
m
x
x
x

1 or greater
1 or greater

shall be 2.1

419

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
c1
c1
c1

m
m
m
x
x
x

1 or greater
1 or greater

shall be 2.1

GRD140
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
N
N
N

GRD140
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

MMS service supported conformance table


Client-CR
Server-CR
MMS service supported CBB
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
status
getNameList
identify
rename
read
write
getVariableAccessAttributes
defineNamedVariable
defineScatteredAccess
getScatteredAccessAttributes
deleteVariableAccess
defineNamedVariableList
getNamedVariableListAttributes
deleteNamedVariableList
defineNamedType
getNamedTypeAttributes
deleteNamedType
input
output
takeControl
relinquishControl
defineSemaphore
deleteSemaphore
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus
reportSemaphoreStatus
initiateDownloadSequence
downloadSegment
terminateDownloadSequence
initiateUploadSequence
uploadSegment
terminateUploadSequence
requestDomainDownload
requestDomainUpload
loadDomainContent
storeDomainContent
deleteDomain
getDomainAttributes
createProgramInvocation

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
i
i
o
o
o
o
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
o
i

o
o
m
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

420

m
c1
m
o
c2
c3
c4
o
i
i
o
o
c5
c6
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c14
i

GRD140
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

MMS service supported CBB


deleteProgramInvocation
start
stop
resume
reset
kill
getProgramInvocationAttributes
obtainFile
defineEventCondition
deleteEventCondition
getEventConditionAttributes
reportEventConditionStatus
alterEventConditionMonitoring
triggerEvent
defineEventAction
deleteEventAction
alterEventEnrollment
reportEventEnrollmentStatus
getEventEnrollmentAttributes
acknowledgeEventNotification
getAlarmSummary
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary
readJournal
writeJournal
initializeJournal
reportJournalStatus
createJournal
deleteJournal
fileOpen
fileRead
fileClose
fileRename
fileDelete
fileDirectory
unsolicitedStatus
informationReport
eventNotification
attachToEventCondition
attachToSemaphore
conclude
cancel
getDataExchangeAttributes
exchangeData

Base
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
m
o
o
o

Client-CR
F/S Value/range
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c9
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c13
o
o
i
i
i
c8
c8
c8
i
c9
c11
i
c7
i
i
i
m
o
c10
c10

421

Base
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
m
o
o
o

Server-CR
F/S Value/range
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c9
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c13
o
c12
i
i
i
c8
c8
c8
i
c9
c11
i
c7
i
i
i
m
m
c10
c10

GRD140
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

MMS service supported CBB

Base

Client-CR
F/S Value/range

Base

Server-CR
F/S Value/range

GRD140

defineAccessControlList
o
c10
o
c10
N
getAccessControlListAttributes
o
c10
o
c10
N
reportAccessControlledObjects
o
c10
o
c10
N
deleteAccessControlList
o
c10
o
c10
N
alterAccessControl
o
c10
o
c10
N
reconfigureProgramInvocation
o
c10
o
c10
N
c1 Shall be m if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be m if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the
MMS write service is declared.
c3 Shall be m if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.
c4 Shall be m if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c5 Shall be m if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c6 Shall be m if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.
c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.
c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.
c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.
c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.
c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.
c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.
c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.
c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.

MMS parameter CBB

Base

MMS Parameter CBB


Client-CR
F/S
Value/range Base

Server-CR
F/S
Value/range

STR1
o
o
o
c1
STR2
o
o
o
o
NEST
1
1 or greater
1
c2
VNAM
o
o
o
c1
VADR
o
o
o
o
VALT
o
o
o
c1
bit
x
x
x
x
TPY
o
o
o
o
VLIS
o
c1
o
c3
bit
x
x
x
x
bit
x
x
x
x
CEI
o
i
o
i
ACO
o
c4
o
c4
SEM
o
c4
o
c4
CSR
o
c4
o
c4
CSNC
o
c4
o
c4
CSPLC
o
c4
o
c4
CSPI
o
c4
o
c4
c1 Shall be m if ACSI logical node model support declared.
c2 Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared.
c3 Shall be m if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared.
c4 Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.

422

GRD140
Y
N
Y(10)
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

GetNameList

GetNameList conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
Base F/S
Value/range
Base F/S
Value/range

Request
ObjectClass
m
m
ObjectScope
m
m
DomainName
o
o
ContinueAfter
o
m
Response+
List Of Identifier
m
m
MoreFollows
m
m
ResponseError Type
m
m
NOTE Object class vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0)
ObjectClass, an MMS Reject shall be issued.

GRD140

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
m

Y
Y
Y
Y

m
m

m
m

Y
Y

m
m
Y
shall not appear. If a request contains this

AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement

Not applicable.

VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
VariableAccessSpecification
Base F/S
Value/range
Base F/S
Value/range
listOfVariable
o
o
o
c1
variableSpecification
o
o
o
c1
alternateAccess
o
o
o
c1
variableListName
o
o
o
c2
c1 Shall be m if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared.
c2 Shall be m if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.

VariableSpecification conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
VariableSpecification
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S
Value/range
name
address
variableDescription
scatteredAccessDescription
invalidated

o
o
o
o
o

o
o
o
x
x

o
o
o
o
o

423

m
i
i
x
x

GRD140
Y
Y
Y
Y

GRD140
Y
N
N
N
N

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Read conformance statement


Client-CR
Base F/S
Value/range
Base

Read
Request
specificationWithResult
variableAccessSpecification
Response
variableAccessSpecification
listOfAccessResult

Request
variableAccessSpecification
listOfData
Response
failure
success

o
m

o
m

m
m

Y
Y

o
m

o
m

o
m

m
m

Y
Y

Server-CR
F/S
Value/range

Request
variableAccessSpecification
listOfAccessResult

m
m

m
m

m
m

Y
Y

m
m

m
m

m
m

m
m

Y
Y

Base

F/S

m
m

m
m

Value/range

Base

F/S

m
m

m
m

Value/range

GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
GetVariableAccessAttributes
Base F/S
Value/range
Base F/S Value/range
Request
name
address
Response
mmsDeletable
address
typeSpecification

GRD140

m
m

InformationReport conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR

InformationReport

GRD140

o
m

Write conformance statement


Client-CR
Base F/S
Value/range
Base

Write

Server-CR
F/S
Value/range

GRD140
Y
Y

GRD140

o
o

o
o

m
m

m
x

Y
N

m
o
m

m
x
m

m
o
m

m
x
m

Y
N
Y

DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.

424

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
GetNamedVariableListAttributes
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
Request
ObjectName
Response
mmsDeletable
listOfVariable
variableSpecification
alternateAccess

GRD140

m
m
m
o

m
m
m
m

m
m
m
o

m
m
m
i

Y
Y
Y
N

DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
ReadJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
JournalEntry conformance statement

Not applicable.
InitializeJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.

FileDirectory
Request
filespecification
continueAfter
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry
MoreFollows

FileOpen
Request
filename
initialPosition
Response+
frsmID
fileAttributes

FileDirectory conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
Base F/S
Value/range Base F/S
Value/range

GRD140

o
o

o
o

m
m

m
m

Y
Y

m
m

m
m

m
m

m
m

Y
Y

FileOpen conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
Base F/S
Value/range Base F/S
Value/range

GRD140

m
o

m
o

m
m

m
m

Y
Y

m
m

m
m

m
m

m
m

Y
Y

425

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

FileRead
Request
frsmID
Response+
fileData
MoreFollows

FileClose
Request
frsmID
Response+

FileRead conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
Base F/S
Value/range Base F/S
Value/range

GRD140

m
m

m
m

m
m

m
m

Y
Y

FileClose conformance statement


Client-CR
Server-CR
Base F/S
Value/range Base F/S
Value/range
m
m

m
m

m
m

m
m

GOOSE conformance statement


Subscriber
Publisher
Value/comment

GRD140
Y
Y

GRD140

GOOSE Services
c1
c1
Y
SendGOOSEMessage
m
m
Y
GetGoReference
o
c3
N
GetGOOSEElementNumber
o
c4
N
GetGoCBValues
o
o
Y
SetGoCBValues
o
o
Y
GSENotSupported
c2
c5
N
GOOSE Control Block (GoCB)
o
o
Y
c1 Shall be m if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be m if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is
declared.
c3 Shall be m if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared.
c4 Shall be m if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber.
c5 Shall be m if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.

GSSE conformance statement

Not applicable.

426

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

427

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix O
Inverse Time Characteristics

428

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI)


(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

100

IEC/UK Inverse Curves (VI)


(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

100

10

Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)

10
TMS
1.5
1.

TMS
1.5

1.0
0.5

0.5

0.2

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.01

0.1
1

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)

100

Normal Inverse

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Very Inverse

429

100

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000

100

UK Inverse Curves (LTI)


(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

10

100

Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)

1000

1
TMS
1.5
1.0

0.1

TMS
1.5

10

1.0
0.5

0.5

0.2

0.1

0.2
0.1

0.1

0.01
1

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)

100

Extremely Inverse

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)

Long Time Inverse

430

100

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
IEEE Inverse Curves (MI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

IEEE Inverse Curves (VI)


(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

10

10

Operating Time (s)

100

Operating Time (s)

100

TMS
1.5

1.0
0.5

TM
1

1.5
1.0
0.5

0.2
0.2

0.1

0.1
0.1

0.1

0.01

0.01
1

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)

100

Moderately Inverse

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)

Very Inverse

431

100

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
IEEE Inverse Curves (EI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

100

Operating Time (s)

10

1
TMS
1.5
1.0

0.1
0.5

0.2
0.1
0.01
1

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)

100

Extremely Inverse

432

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7
US Inverse Curves (CO8)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

US Inverse Curves (CO2)


(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

10

100

10
1
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)

TMS

1
TMS

1.5
1.0

0.5

1.5
0.1

1.0
0.1

0.2

0.5

0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01

0.01
1

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)

100

CO8 Inverse

10
Current (Multiple of Setting)

CO2 Short Time Inverse

433

100

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Appendix P
Ordering

434

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Ordering
Directional Overcurrent Relay
GRD140

Type:
Directional Overcurrent Relay

GRD140

Model:
-Model 110: Directional earth fault and directional sensitive
earth fault, 8BIs, 7BOs

110

-Model 400: Directional 3 phase + earth fault, 5BIs, 7BOs

400

-Model 420: Directional 3 phase + earth + sensitive earth,


5BIs, 7BOs

420

-Model 400: Directional 3 phase + earth fault, 5BIs, 6BOs,


4HBOs

401

-Model 420: Directional 3 phase + earth + sensitive earth,


5BIs, 6BOs, 4HBOs

421

Ratings:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

1A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc


1A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc
5A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc
5A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc
1A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc
1A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc
5A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc
5A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc
1A, 50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc
1A, 60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc
5A, 50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc
5A, 60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc
1A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc
1A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc
5A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc
5A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc
Communications:
For IEC60870-5-103
RS485
RS485
Fibre optic
Fibre optic

For IEC61850 / RSM100


100BASE-TX
100BASE-FX
100BASE-TX
100BASE-FX

A
B
D
E

Miscellaneous:
None

435

6 F 2 S 0 8 9 7

Version-up Records
Version
No.
0.0
1.0

2.0

Date
Dec. 5, 2009
Feb. 1, 2010

Jun. 4, 2010

3.0

Aug. 25, 2010

4.0

Jan. 18, 2011

4.1
4.2

Sep. 16, 2011


Oct. 27, 2011

5.0

Dec. 26, 2011

Revised Section
-1
2.1.1.1
2.1.2.2
2.1.8.1
2.2.1 to 2.2.4
2.4
3.2.3, 3.3.3, 3.3.4,
3.3.9, 3.4.2
4.2.1, 4.2.6.4, 4.2.7
Appendices
1
2.1.1.1
2.1.8.2
2.5.3
3.1.1 to 3.2.4
3.4.3
3.5
4.1.2
4.2, 4.2.4.2, 4.2.6.7,
4.2.6.9, 4.2.7.2
6.4.2
6.5.1.1
6.5.1.3, 6.5.1.6
6.6.1, 6.6.2
Appendices
Precaution
4.2.4.5, 4.2.6.4
6.4.3
Appendices
3.3.2, 3.3.4
4.2.6.4
Appendices
Appendix K
2.3.2
2.4
2.1.3.5
2.1.8.1
4.2.6.6
4.2.6.7
Appendix

Contents
First issue
Modified Table 1.1.1.
Modified the description (IEC60255-151 added).
Modified the description and Table 2.1.2.
Modified Figure 2.1.48.
Modified the description (IEC60255-127 added).
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified Appendix K.
Modified the description and Table 1.1.1 (added 41D).
Modified the description.
Added the setting table for CLP.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description (Table 3.4.2 and setting rage table).
Modified the description.
Modified the description and Figure 4.1.1.
Modified the description.
Modified Figure 6.4.1.
Modified the description and added Figure 6.5.2.1.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified Appendix C, F, G, H, K and P.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified Appendix B and M.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified Appendix G and K.
Modified the description.
Modified the descriptions.
Modified Figure 2.1.32
Modified Figure 2.1.47
Modified the description
Modified the description
Modified Appendix K and M

436

You might also like